PAKKUMUS
HINDAMISKRITEERIUMID JA HINNATAVAD NÄITAJAD
Viitenumber: 288186
Hankija: Riigi Kaitseinvesteeringute Keskus (70009764)
Hange: Veesõidukite soetamine
Pakkumus: 560986
Ettevõtja: Boomeranger Boats Oy (0860699-8), roll: peapakkuja
OSA 1 – VEESÕIDUKID KOGUPIKKUSEGA 9-12 M
Pakkumuse maksumust hinnatakse - Ilma maksudeta
1. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite ehitustöödele antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 1 objektiks olevate veesõidukite ehitustöödele garantii vähemalt 24 kuud. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse ehitustöödele antava garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 20%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
24,000 months
2. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite kerele (korpusele) antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 1 objektiks olevate veesõidukite kerele (korpusele) garantii vähemalt 60 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse kerele (korpusel) antava garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 50%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
60,000 months
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27 1/5 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/
8178924/general-info
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
3. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite mootoritele antav tehase garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 1 objektiks olevate veesõidukite mootoritele tehase garantii vähemalt 24 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse mootoritele antava tehase garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 25%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
24,000 months
4. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukitega seotud seadmetele, varustusele ja materjalidele ning
süsteemidele antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 1 objektiks olevate veesõidukitega seotud seadmetele, varustusele ja materjalile ning süsteemidele garantii vähemalt 12
kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse seadmetele,
varustusele ja materjalile ning süsteemidele antava tehase garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 5%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
12,000 months
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ta:
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ga:
OSA 2 – VEESÕIDUKID KOGUPIKKUSEGA 6-9 M
Pakkumuse maksumust hinnatakse - Ilma maksudeta
1. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite ehitustöödele antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 2 objektiks olevate veesõidukite ehitustöödele garantii vähemalt 24 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27 2/5 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/
8178924/general-info
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse ehitustöödele antava garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 20%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
24,000 months
2. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite kerele (korpusele) antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 2 objektiks olevate veesõidukite kerele (korpusele) garantii vähemalt 60 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse kerele (korpusel) antava garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 50%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
60,000 months
3. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite mootoritele antav tehase garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 2 objektiks olevate veesõidukite mootoritele tehase garantii vähemalt 24 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse mootoritele antava tehase garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 25%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
24,000 months
4. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukitega seotud seadmetele, varustusele ja materjalidele ning
süsteemidele antav garantii
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27 3/5 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/
8178924/general-info
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 2 objektiks olevate veesõidukitega seotud seadmetele, varustusele ja materjalile ning süsteemidele garantii vähemalt 12
kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse seadmetele,
varustusele ja materjalile ning süsteemidele antava tehase garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 5%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
12,000 months
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ta:
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ga:
OSA 3 – VEESÕIDUKID KOGUPIKKUSEGA KUNI 6 M
Pakkumuse maksumust hinnatakse - Ilma maksudeta
1. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite ehitustöödele antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 3 objektiks olevate veesõidukite ehitustöödele garantii vähemalt 24 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse ehitustöödele antava garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 30%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
24,000 months
2. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukite kerele (korpusele) antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 3 objektiks olevate veesõidukite kerele (korpusele) garantii vähemalt 60 kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem
pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse kerele (korpusel) antava garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 60%
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27 4/5 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/
8178924/general-info
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
60,000 months
3. Pakkuja poolt pakutavate tehnilise kirjelduse miinimumnõuetele vastavate veesõidukitega seotud seadmetele, varustusele ja materjalidele ning
süsteemidele antav garantii
Pakkuja peab pakkuma hanke osa 3 objektiks olevate veesõidukitega seotud seadmetele, varustusele ja materjalile ning süsteemidele garantii vähemalt 12
kuuks. Mida pikem garantii antakse, seda rohkem pakkumusele punkte antakse. Pakkuja sisestab hindamiskriteeriumite nõutud lahtrisse seadmetele,
varustusele ja materjalile ning süsteemidele antava tehase garantii kuudes.
Tüüp ja hindamismeetod: Kvaliteet, suurim on parim
Osakaal: 10%
Hindamismetoodika kirjeldus: Suurima väärtusega pakkumus saab maksimaalse arvu punkte. Teised pakkumused saavad punkte proportsionaalselt vähem
ja arvutatakse valemiga: "pakkumuse väärtus" / "suurim väärtus" * "osakaal".
Väärtus Ühik Märkused
12,000 months
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ta:
Osa maksumus kokku KM-ga:
Pakkumuse maksumus kokku
Maksumus kokku KM-ta:
Maksumus kokku KM-ga:
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27 5/5 https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/
8178924/general-info
1/5
PAKKUMUS
VASTAVUSTINGIMUSED
Viitenumber: 288186
Hankija: Riigi Kaitseinvesteeringute Keskus (70009764)
Hange: Veesõidukite soetamine
Pakkumus: 560986
Ettevõtja: Boomeranger Boats Oy (0860699-8), roll: peapakkuja
OSA 1: VEESÕIDUKID KOGUPIKKUSEGA 9-12 M
PAKKUMUSE ESITAMINE
Pakkumuse esitamisega kinnitab pakkuja kõigi riigihanke alusdokumentides esitatud tingimuste
ülevõtmist.
Tingimusliku pakkumuse esitamine ei ole lubatud.
Pakkuja peab esitama pakkumuse hanke osas 1 vastavalt etteantud vormile.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas ettevõtja saab kinnitada, et pakkumus vastab hanke alusdokumentides sätestatud
tingimustele? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
2. Tehniline kirjeldus osa 1 (Dokumendi vorm /
Lisa1_Osa1_Veesõidukid_kogupikkusega_9-12m_TK_EST_ENG.xlsx)
Vastus: 1_1_2_5137_1stMate_forMercury_Bro-5-20_Lo-Res (1).pdf, 1_1_2_513_Mercury
Outboard engines V10.pdf, 1_1_2_5174_Vector charts.docx,
1_1_2_5176_Halo_20-20-24_IM_EN_988-12307-005_w.pdf,
1_1_2_5177_Forwardscan_UG_EN_988-10761-002_w.pdf, 1_1_2_5178_airmar weather
station doc 116-d-17-461-01-1-16-1.pdf,
1_1_2_5179_PRECISION-9_IG_EN_988-10984-004_w.pdf,
1_1_2_5184_NAIS-500_UM_EN_988-11240-001_w.pdf, 1_1_2_Boomeranger Boats_Features
and Equipment 9-12m Boats.pdf,
1_1_2_Lisa1_Osa1_Veesõidukid_kogupikkusega_9-12m_TK_EST_ENG(2)_1162025.xlsx
ÄRISALADUS
Pakkuja märgib pakkumuses, milline teave on pakkuja ärisaladus ning põhjendab teabe
määramist ärisaladuseks.
Teabe ärisaladuseks määramisel lähtutakse ebaausa konkurentsi takistamise ja ärisaladuse kaitse
seaduse § 5 lõikes 2 sätestatust. Pakkuja ei või ärisaladusena märkida:
1) pakkumuse maksumust ega osamaksumusi;
2) teenuste hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste hindamise
kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid numbrilisi näitajaid;
3) asjade ja ehitustööde hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste
hindamise kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid näitajaid (RHS § 46 (1)).
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kirjeldage lühidalt pakkumuses sisalduvat ärisaladust ja lisage selle määramise põhjendus või
märkige, et pakkumus ei sisalda ärisaladust. (Suur sisestusala (max pikkus 4000 tähemärki))
Vastus: The offer do not include trade secrets
ÜHISPAKKUJATE VOLIKIRI
Ühispakkujad nimetavad riigihankega ning hankelepingu sõlmimise ja täitmisega seotud
toimingute tegemiseks endi seast volitatud esindaja.
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
2/5
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas tegemist on ühispakkumusega? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on ühispakkumusega, kas olete lisanud pakkumuse "Lisadokumentide" lehele
ühispakkujate volikirja? Kui tegemist ei ole ühispakkumusega, vastake "Ei"". (Raadionupp
valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
EL NÕUKOGU SANKTSIOON. ALLTÖÖVÕTJAD JA TARNIJAD.
Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele
alltöövõtjaid ega tarnijaid, kes on:
1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest
isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu üksus;
2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu
üksuse omandis;
3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või tegutseb sellise isiku
juhiste alusel.
Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel
tühine.
Määrust kohaldatakse riigihangetele alates rahvusvahelisest piirmäärast. NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS
(EL) 2022/576, 8. aprill 2022, millega muudetakse määrust (EL) nr 833/2014, mis käsitleb
piiravaid meetmeid seoses Venemaa tegevusega, mis destabiliseerib olukorda Ukrainas.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele
alltöövõtjaid ega tarnijaid, kes on: 1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene
Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu
üksus; 2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või
muu üksuse omandis; 3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või
tegutseb sellise isiku juhiste alusel. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
RAHVUSVAHELISE SANKTSIOONI OBJEKT
Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks või pärit
sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav
hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel tühine.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks ega pärit
sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
OSA 2: VEESÕIDUKID KOGUPIKKUSEGA 6-9 M
PAKKUMUSE ESITAMINE
Pakkumuse esitamisega kinnitab pakkuja kõigi riigihanke alusdokumentides esitatud tingimuste
ülevõtmist.
Tingimusliku pakkumuse esitamine ei ole lubatud.
Pakkuja peab esitama pakkumuse hanke osas 2 vastavalt etteantud vormile.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas ettevõtja saab kinnitada, et pakkumus vastab hanke alusdokumentides sätestatud
tingimustele? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
3/5
Vastus: Jah
2. Tehniline kirjeldus osa 2 (Dokumendi vorm /
Lisa1_Osa2_Veesõidukid_kogupikkusega_6-9m_TK_EST_ENG.xlsx)
Vastus: 2_2_2_5137_1stMate_forMercury_Bro-5-20_Lo-Res (1).pdf, 2_2_2_513_Mercury
Outboard engines V10.pdf, 2_2_2_5174_Vector charts.docx,
2_2_2_5176_Halo_20-20-24_IM_EN_988-12307-005_w.pdf,
2_2_2_5177_Forwardscan_UG_EN_988-10761-002_w.pdf, 2_2_2_5178_airmar weather
station doc 116-d-17-461-01-1-16-1.pdf,
2_2_2_5179_PRECISION-9_IG_EN_988-10984-004_w.pdf,
2_2_2_5184_NAIS-500_UM_EN_988-11240-001_w.pdf, 2_2_2_Boomeranger Boats_Features
and Equipment 6-9m Boats.pdf,
2_2_2_Lisa1_Osa2_Veesõidukid_kogupikkusega_6-9m_TK_EST_ENG_1162025.xlsx
ÄRISALADUS
Pakkuja märgib pakkumuses, milline teave on pakkuja ärisaladus ning põhjendab teabe
määramist ärisaladuseks.
Teabe ärisaladuseks määramisel lähtutakse ebaausa konkurentsi takistamise ja ärisaladuse kaitse
seaduse § 5 lõikes 2 sätestatust. Pakkuja ei või ärisaladusena märkida:
1) pakkumuse maksumust ega osamaksumusi;
2) teenuste hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste hindamise
kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid numbrilisi näitajaid;
3) asjade ja ehitustööde hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste
hindamise kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid näitajaid (RHS § 46 (1)).
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kirjeldage lühidalt pakkumuses sisalduvat ärisaladust ja lisage selle määramise põhjendus või
märkige, et pakkumus ei sisalda ärisaladust. (Suur sisestusala (max pikkus 4000 tähemärki))
Vastus: The offer do not include trade secrets
ÜHISPAKKUJATE VOLIKIRI
Ühispakkujad nimetavad riigihankega ning hankelepingu sõlmimise ja täitmisega seotud
toimingute tegemiseks endi seast volitatud esindaja.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas tegemist on ühispakkumusega? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on ühispakkumusega, kas olete lisanud pakkumuse "Lisadokumentide" lehele
ühispakkujate volikirja? Kui tegemist ei ole ühispakkumusega, vastake "Ei"". (Raadionupp
valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
EL NÕUKOGU SANKTSIOON. ALLTÖÖVÕTJAD JA TARNIJAD.
Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele
alltöövõtjaid ega tarnijaid, kes on:
1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest
isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu üksus;
2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu
üksuse omandis;
3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või tegutseb sellise isiku
juhiste alusel.
Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel
tühine.
Määrust kohaldatakse riigihangetele alates rahvusvahelisest piirmäärast. NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS
(EL) 2022/576, 8. aprill 2022, millega muudetakse määrust (EL) nr 833/2014, mis käsitleb
piiravaid meetmeid seoses Venemaa tegevusega, mis destabiliseerib olukorda Ukrainas.
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
4/5
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele
alltöövõtjaid ega tarnijaid, kes on: 1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene
Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu
üksus; 2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või
muu üksuse omandis; 3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või
tegutseb sellise isiku juhiste alusel. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
RAHVUSVAHELISE SANKTSIOONI OBJEKT
Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks või pärit
sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav
hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel tühine.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks ega pärit
sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
OSA 3: VEESÕIDUKID KOGUPIKKUSEGA KUNI 6 M
PAKKUMUSE ESITAMINE
Pakkumuse esitamisega kinnitab pakkuja kõigi riigihanke alusdokumentides esitatud tingimuste
ülevõtmist.
Tingimusliku pakkumuse esitamine ei ole lubatud.
Pakkuja peab esitama pakkumuse hanke osas 3 vastavalt etteantud vormile.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas ettevõtja saab kinnitada, et pakkumus vastab hanke alusdokumentides sätestatud
tingimustele? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
2. Tehniline kirjeldus osa 3 (Dokumendi vorm /
Lisa1_Osa3_Veesõidukid_kogupikkusega_kuni_6m_TK_EST_ENG.xlsx)
Vastus: 3_3_2_Boomeranger Boats_Features and Equipment under 6m Boats.pdf,
3_3_2_Lisa1_Osa3_Veesõidukid_kogupikkusega_kuni_6m_TK_EST_ENG_1162025.xlsx
ÄRISALADUS
Pakkuja märgib pakkumuses, milline teave on pakkuja ärisaladus ning põhjendab teabe
määramist ärisaladuseks.
Teabe ärisaladuseks määramisel lähtutakse ebaausa konkurentsi takistamise ja ärisaladuse kaitse
seaduse § 5 lõikes 2 sätestatust. Pakkuja ei või ärisaladusena märkida:
1) pakkumuse maksumust ega osamaksumusi;
2) teenuste hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste hindamise
kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid numbrilisi näitajaid;
3) asjade ja ehitustööde hankelepingute puhul lisaks punktis 1 nimetatule muid pakkumuste
hindamise kriteeriumidele vastavaid pakkumust iseloomustavaid näitajaid (RHS § 46 (1)).
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kirjeldage lühidalt pakkumuses sisalduvat ärisaladust ja lisage selle määramise põhjendus või
märkige, et pakkumus ei sisalda ärisaladust. (Suur sisestusala (max pikkus 4000 tähemärki))
Vastus: The offer do not include trade secrets
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
5/5
ÜHISPAKKUJATE VOLIKIRI
Ühispakkujad nimetavad riigihankega ning hankelepingu sõlmimise ja täitmisega seotud
toimingute tegemiseks endi seast volitatud esindaja.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas tegemist on ühispakkumusega? (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on ühispakkumusega, kas olete lisanud pakkumuse "Lisadokumentide" lehele
ühispakkujate volikirja? Kui tegemist ei ole ühispakkumusega, vastake "Ei"". (Raadionupp
valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Ei
EL NÕUKOGU SANKTSIOON. ALLTÖÖVÕTJAD JA TARNIJAD.
Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele
alltöövõtjaid ega tarnijaid, kes on:
1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest
isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu üksus;
2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu
üksuse omandis;
3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või tegutseb sellise isiku
juhiste alusel.
Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel
tühine.
Määrust kohaldatakse riigihangetele alates rahvusvahelisest piirmäärast. NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS
(EL) 2022/576, 8. aprill 2022, millega muudetakse määrust (EL) nr 833/2014, mis käsitleb
piiravaid meetmeid seoses Venemaa tegevusega, mis destabiliseerib olukorda Ukrainas.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et ta ei kaasa üle 10% hankelepingu maksumusest hankelepingu täitmisele
alltöövõtjaid ega tarnijaid, kes on: 1. Vene Föderatsiooni kodanik, resident või Vene
Föderatsioonis asutatud ettevõtja, sh füüsilisest isikust ettevõtja, juriidiline isik, asutus või muu
üksus; 2. rohkem kui 50% ulatuses otseselt või kaudselt punktis 1 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või
muu üksuse omandis; 3. punktis 1 või 2 nimetatud isiku, asutuse või muu üksuse esindaja või
tegutseb sellise isiku juhiste alusel. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
RAHVUSVAHELISE SANKTSIOONI OBJEKT
Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks või pärit
sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. Hankija lükkab tagasi pakkumuse, mille alusel sõlmitav
hankeleping oleks RSanS § 7 lg 1 alusel tühine.
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Pakkuja kinnitab, et pakutav kaup ei ole rahvusvahelise sanktsiooni objektiks ega pärit
sanktsiooni all olevatest piirkondadest. (Raadionupp valikutega "Jah/Ei")
Vastus: Jah
Koostatud 12.06.2025 09:51:27
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
STATEMENT 1 (1)
21.2.2025
Boomeranger Boats Oy
STATEMENT
Grounds for exclusion
Riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 1 p 1, 4 ja 5
Hankija ei sõlmi raamlepingut ja kõrvaldab hankemenetlusest taotleja, kellel esineb riigihangete
seaduse § 95 lg 1 punktis 1, 4 või 5 kirjeldatud asjaolu..
This is to certify that Boomeranger Boats Oy registered under FI08606998, has not committed any
violations as specified under § 95(1)(1), (4), and (5) of the Public Procurement Act.
Specifically, Boomeranger Boats has not:
1. Engaged in any criminal activities related to its professional conduct, as outlined in §
95(1)(1).
2. Committed any serious professional misconduct, as stipulated in § 95(1)(4).
3. Been subject to bankruptcy or insolvency proceedings, nor has it been declared insolvent, as
defined in § 95(1)(5).
This statement is substantiated by the company's criminal record, criminal record from legal
representative, certificate of paid taxes and summary of finance report which shows that the
company have no tax debts.
Sincery,
Boomeranger Boats Oy
Jani Leskinen
CEO
Boomeranger Boats Oy Tel. +358 19 515 805 www.boomeranger.fi
Troolitie 12, FI-07910 Valko, Finland boomeranger@boomeranger
.fi
STATEMENT 1 (1)
21.2.2025
Boomeranger Boats Oy
STATEMENT
Grounds for exclusion
Riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 4 p 3-4 ja § 177 lg 2 p 1-2
Hankija võib kõrvaldada hankemenetlusest taotleja, kellel esineb riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 4 p 3
ja 4 või § 177 lg 2 p 1 ja 2 nimetatud kõrvaldamise alus.
This is to certify that Boomeranger Boats Oy registered under FI 08606998, has not committed any
violations as specified under § 95(4)(3-4) and § 177(2)(1-2) of the Public Procurement Act.
Specifically, Boomeranger Boats has not:
1. Engaged in any serious regulatory infringements that could jeopardize the performance of a
procurement contract, as outlined in § 95(4)(3-4).
2. Demonstrated unreliability in previous procurement contract performances, as stipulated in
§ 95(4)(3-4).
3. Incurred any liabilities or sanctions related to the procurement procedures, as defined in §
177(1-2).
This statement is substantiated by the company's criminal record, which is clean and free of any
offenses related to the sections of the Public Procurement Act.
Sincery,
Boomeranger Boats Oy
Jani Leskinen
CEO
Boomeranger Boats Oy Tel. +358 19 515 805 www.boomeranger.fi
Troolitie 12, FI-07910 Valko, Finland
[email protected]
STATEMENT 1 (1)
21.2.2025
Boomeranger Boats Oy
STATEMENT
Grounds for exclusion
Riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 4 p 12
Hankija võib kõrvaldada hankemenetlusest taotleja, kellel esineb riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 4 p
12 nimetatud kõrvaldamise alus.
This is to certify that Boomeranger Boats Oy registered under FI 08606998 confirms that the
company meets all the requirements specified under § 95(4)(12) of the Public Procurement Act.:
1. The company is financially stable and has sufficient financial capacity to participate in the
procurement procedure. The company complies with all applicable laws and regulations,
including timely payment of taxes and social security contributions. The company operates
ethically and adheres to the principles of procurement legislation, such as honesty and
transparency. The company meets all professional requirements and has the necessary
technical expertise and professional qualifications to perform the task subject to
procurement.
2. The company has no existing prohibitions on participating in public procurements, including
international sanctions or other restrictions.
This statement is issued by Boomeranger Boats Oy and is based on the company's criminal record,
the criminal record of its legal representative, a certificate of paid taxes, and a summary of the
finance report, which shows that the company has no tax debts.
Sincery,
Boomeranger Boats Oy
Jani Leskinen
CEO
Boomeranger Boats Oy Tel. +358 19 515 805 www.boomeranger.fi
Troolitie 12, FI-07910 Valko, Finland
[email protected]
Halo20, 20+ and 24
Dome Radars
Installation Manual
ENGLISH
www.lowrance.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.bandg.com
Disclaimer
! Warning: Refer to important safety information in the user app guides, product
documentation and review all warnings, limitations, and disclaimers before using this
product.
This product is not a substitute for proper training and prudent seamanship. It is the owner’s
sole responsibility to install and use the equipment in a manner that will not cause accidents,
personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is solely responsible for
observing maritime safety practices.
Navigational features that appear in this guide are not a substitute for proper training and
prudent seamanship. They do not replace a human navigator and SHOULD NOT be relied on
as a sole or primary source of navigation. It is the operator’s sole responsibility to use more
than one navigational methods to ensure the route suggested by the system is safe.
BRUNSWICK CORPORATION AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, BRANCHES AND AFFILIATES DISCLAIM ALL
LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A WAY THAT MAY CAUSE ACCIDENTS, DAMAGE
OR THAT MAY VIOLATE THE LAW.
This document represents the product as at the time of publishing. Brunswick Corporation
and its subsidiaries, branches and affiliates reserve the right to make changes to the product
and/or specifications at any time without notice. Please contact your nearest distributor if you
require any further assistance.
Governing language
This statement, any instruction manuals, user guides and other information relating to
the product (Documentation) may be translated to, or has been translated from, another
language (Translation). In the event of any conflict between any Translation of the
Documentation, the English language version of the Documentation will be the official
version of the Documentation.
Copyright
© 2023 Navico Group. All Rights Reserved. Navico Group is a division of Brunswick
Corporation.
Warranty
This product’s warranty is supplied as a separate document.
Compliance
Declarations of conformity
The relevant declarations of conformity are available at: www.lowrance.com,
www.simrad-yachting.com and www.bandg.com.
Europe
This product complies with CE under the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU.
United Kingdom
This product complies with UKCA under The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
United States of America
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
! Warning: The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
| Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |3
RF emissions notice
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This device’s antenna must be installed in accordance with provided instructions, and it must
be operated with minimum 0.1 m (0.33 ft) for Halo20+ and Halo24, and 0.0 m (0.0 ft) for
Halo20 spacing between the antennas and all person’s body (excluding extremities of hands,
wrist and feet) during operation.
¼ Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that of the receiver is
connected
• Consult the dealer or an experienced technician for help
Japan
¼ Note: The following statement applies to the Halo24 Radar only.
V0N
V = Emission of pulses: Which is a combination of the foregoing or is produced by other
means
0 = No modulating signal
N = No information transmitted
Q0N
Q = Emission of pulses: In which the carrier is angle-modulated during the period of pulse
0 = No modulating signal
N = No information transmitted
Canada
This product complies with ISED (Innovation, Science and Economic Development) Canada’s
license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et.
(2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnemen.
Industry Canada Statement
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna
of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should
be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that
necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut
fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé
4| | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain
de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépassepas l’intensité
nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model number if
Category I) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed
below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each
antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the
maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son
numéro de modèle s’il fait partie du matériel de catégorie I) a été approuvé par Industrie
Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d’antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain
admissible maximal et l’impédance requise pour chaque type d’antenne. Les types d’antenne
non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont
strictement interdits pour l’exploitation de l’émetteur.
Max. permissible antenna gain
Halo Antennas Impedance
(dBi)
Halo 20 Radar
22.5 dBi
Halo20+ Radar Not applicable
Halo24 Radar 23.5 dBi
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure
System 100 W/m2 occupational safe 10 W /m2 public safe
distance distance
Halo20 Radar 0.0 m (0.0 ft)
Halo20+ Radar 0.0 m (0.0 ft) 0.1 m (0.33 ft)
Halo24 Radar 0.1 m (0.33 ft)
Safe distances as measured by an independent laboratory.
Trademarks
®Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off, and ™ common law marks.
Visit www.navico.com/intellectual-property to review the global trademark rights and
accreditations for Navico Group and other entities.
• Navico® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Lowrance® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Simrad® is a trademark of Kongsberg Maritime AS, licensed to Navico Group.
• B&G® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Halo® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Tef-Gel® is a trademark of Ultra Safety Systems, Inc.
| Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |5
Contents
7 Introduction
7 Parts included
8 Installation
8 Wiring guidelines
9 Choose the scanner location
10 Considerations for roof mounting
13 Wiring overview
14 Scanner connection
15 Installing the scanner
16 Ethernet connection
18 Power connection
19 Power control connection
20 Setup and configuration
21 Maintenance
22 Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G Radar
22 RI-10 Radar interface box and wiring
23 Troubleshooting
23 Status LED
23 Error messages
24 Error codes
25 Dimensional drawings
25 Halo dome radar dimensions
27 Technical specifications
27 Halo20/20+ Radar
28 Halo24 Radar
29 Accessories
6| Contents | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
1
Introduction
Parts included
Inst
ENG
Installatio
LISH
ENG
Installati n M
LISH
ENG
Installatioon Maanual
LISH
ENG alla n M nua
LISH
tion an l
Ma ual
nua
l
ba
nd and and and
g.c g.c g.c g.c
om om om om
b b b
A B C
D E F G
A Halo Radar
B Mounting bolts and washers
Hex bolt (M8x30), 4x
Flat washer, 4x
Spring washer, 4x
C Documentation pack
D Interconnection cable
E Ethernet adapter RJ45 to 5-pin, 1.5m (4.9 ft)
F Waterproof cable boot for interconnection cable RJ45 plug
G Cable retainer kit
Cable retainer clip, 2x
Screw (Phillips drive), 4x
Introduction | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |7
2
Installation
¼ Note: The Halo Radar is factory sealed. Removing the cover will void the factory warranty.
¼ Note: If replacing an already installed Broadband 3G/4G Radar, refer to ”Replacing a Broadband
3G/4G Radar” on page 22.
Wiring guidelines
Safely pulling the interconnection cable
• Connect a mouse line to the outer jacket of the radar interconnection cable so that the
strain of pulling is transferred to the stronger outer jacket of the cable. Use some small
cable ties to secure the mouse line to the outer jacket as well if there is sufficient clearance.
• Tape the conductors and tape the RJ45 connector to the mouse line so that it does not
get caught and bent backwards.
B A B
A C B B
A Mouse line
B Electrical tape
C Cable tie
Do:
• make drip and service loops
• use cable-ties on all cables to keep them secure
• solder/crimp and insulate all wiring connections if extending or shortening the cables
• use the appropriate length of ready-made interconnection cable
• leave room adjacent to device to ease plugging and unplugging of connectors
Do not:
• make sharp bends in the cables
• run cables in a way that allows water to flow down into the connectors
• run the data cables adjacent to radar, transmitter, or large/high current carrying cables or
high frequency signal cables
• run cables so they interfere with mechanical systems
• run cables over sharp edges or burrs
• attach a mouse line directly to the Ethernet cable or connector
! Warning: Before starting the installation, be sure to turn electrical power off. If power
is left on or turned on during the installation, fire, electrical shock, or other serious injury
may occur.
! Warning: The positive supply wire (red) should always be connected to (+) DC with
the supplied fuse or a circuit breaker (closest available to fuse rating). Be sure that the
voltage of the power supply is compatible with the unit.
8| Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Choose the scanner location
The radar’s ability to detect targets greatly depends on the position of its scanner. The ideal
location for the scanner is high above the vessel’s keel line where there are no obstacles.
When you are deciding on the location, consider the following:
A higher installation position increases the radar ranging distance, but it also increases the
minimum range around the vessel where targets cannot be detected. Higher installation
height also reduces the ability of the radar to detect targets in sea clutter.
The length of the interconnection cable supplied with your radar is sufficient for the majority
of installations. If you think you’ll need a longer cable, consult your dealer before installation.
Optional cable lengths are 5 m (16 ft) 10 m (33 ft), 20 m (65.5 ft) and 30 m (98 ft).
If you mount the scanner on a pedestal or base, ensure that rain and sea spray can drain away
rapidly, and the breather hole (A) in the base can operate.
A
The scanner should, where possible, be installed parallel to the line of the keel.
Do not install the scanner:
• directly on to a large flat roof area. Use a pedestal to elevate the scanner so the radar beam
clears the roof line. Refer to “Considerations for roof mounting” on page 10
• too high up (eg at the top of a mast), which may cause degradation of the radar picture
over short ranges
• close to lamps or exhaust outlets. The heat emissions may damage the dome. Soot and
smoke will degrade the performance of the radar
• close to the antennas of other equipment such as direction finders, VHF antennas, GPS
equipment, as it may cause or be subject to interference
• where a large obstruction (such as an exhaust stack) is at the same level as the beam, the
obstruction is likely to generate false echoes and/or shadow zones
• where it will be subjected to strong vibrations. Vibrations could degrade the performance
or service life of the radar.
! Warning: Never store your Halo radar upside down unprotected in the rain as it
will cause water ingress. If the radar must be inverted, you should protect it by placing a
waterproof cover over the entire radar or by shielding the entire cable channel area (and
beyond) with the mounting plate or auxiliary plate.
! Warning: For dual radar installations, ensure the Halo Radar is not installed in the
beam of a pulse radar at any time.
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |9
Compass TX
Halo Radar
(6 ft) Min.
2 m
Pulse Radar
STBY
0.7 m (2.3 ft) Min.
Minimum distance to install near the Do not install the Halo Radar on the same beam
ships compass is 0.7 m (2.3 ft). plane as a conventional pulse radar. A pulse radar
must be set to STBY or OFF any time the Halo
Radar is being operated.
If possible, ensure that the mounting If installed on power boats that have a steep
location provides the scanner with a planing angle, it is recommended to tilt the
clear view all round the vessel. scanner angle down at the front.
Considerations for roof mounting
When deciding a suitable mounting location for the Halo Radar, be aware that the vertical
radar beam extends 25° above and below horizontal for Halo20/20+ and 22° above and
below horizontal for Halo24. 50% of the power projects in a beam 12.5° above and below
horizontal for Halo 20/20+ and 11° above and below horizontal for Halo24. If the radar beam
cannot clear the roof line, this will decrease performance of the radar. Depending on the size
of the hard top of the vessel, it is recommended to elevate the antenna to allow the radar
beam to clear the roof line.
¼ Note: Where the mounting surface is constructed of any form of metal you must elevate the
radar so that the beam has complete clearance, as per Optimum performance section, else
performance will be severely impaired.
Determine scanner height
This is a guide to determine scanner height in relation to the furthest forward corner of the
hard top.
Measure the distance (A) from the Halo Radar to the furthest forward corner of the hard top.
BOW BOW BOW
A
A
A
Use the following illustrations to determine the height of the scanner in relation to distance
(A).
10 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Possible performance loss
50%
of be
am p
ower
50% of beam power
Above illustrates an installation with the Halo Radar mounted directly on to a large hard top.
This installation could suffer decreased performance as the radar energy is either reflected or
absorbed by the hard top.
¼ Note: Where the mounting surface is constructed of any form of metal you must elevate the
dome so that the beam has complete clearance, else performance will be severely impaired.
Good performance
The image above illustrates that raising the radar scanner off the hard top allows most of the
radar energy to clear the hard top.
Halo20/20+ Radar
0.55 m
1.00 m0.80 m
0 mm
60 mm
1.40 m1.20 m
100 mm
12.5°
145 mm
1.60 m 190 mm
2.00 m1.80 m
235 mm
280 mm
2.20 m 325 mm
2.40 m 370 mm
2.60 m 415 mm
2.80 m 460 mm
3.0 m 500 mm
545 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 45 mm
(1.77”).
Halo24 Radar
0.80 m 0 mm
1.00 m 40 mm
1.20 m 80 mm
1.40 m
11°
1.60 m 120 mm
1.80 m 160 mm
2.00 m 200 mm
2.20 m 240 mm
2.40 m 280 mm
2.60 m 320 mm
2.80 m 360 mm
400 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 40 mm
(1.57”).
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 11
Optimum performance
For best performance, the radar should be positioned to allow the full beam to clear the
superstructure of the boat.
Halo20/20+ Radar
0.25 m 0 mm
0.40 m 70 mm
0.80 m 250 mm
1.00 m 350 mm
1.20 m 440 mm
1.40 m 530 mm
25°
1.60 m 630 mm
1.80 m 720 mm
2.00 m 815 mm
2.20 m 905 mm
2.40 m 1000 mm
2.60 m 1095 mm
2.80 m 1190 mm
3.00 m 1280 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 90 mm
(3.54”).
Halo24 Radar
0.38 m 0 mm
0.60 m 88 mm
0.80 m 170 mm
1.00 m 250 mm
1.20 m 330 mm
22°
1.40 m 410 mm
1.60 m 490 mm
1.80 m 570 mm
2.00 m 650 mm
2.20 m 730 mm
2.40 m 810 mm
2.60 m 890 mm
2.80 m 970 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 80 mm
(3.14”).
12 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Halo light
¼ Note: Only available for Halo20+ and Halo24 Radars.
The Halo Radar has a blue accent light that can be activated from the display unit. Refer to
“Setup and configuration” on page 20.
! Warning: Halo Radar’s lighting may not be approved for use in your boating location.
Please check your local boating regulations before turning the blue accent lights ON.
Wiring overview
Run the interconnection cable between the scanner and the display unit or Ethernet switch.
A
B
F
C
D
E
A Halo Radar
B Scanner connector
C Interconnection cable
D Ethernet connector
E Power wires
F Ethernet adapter RJ45 to 5-pin (optional)
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 13
Scanner connection
¼ Note: If replacing an existing Broadband 3G/4G Radar, refer to ”Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G
Radar” on page 22.
The scanner interconnection cable connects to the scanner using an 8 pin connector.
1. Insert interconnection cable connector into the socket on the scanner, rotating locking collar
clockwise until it clicks.
2. Place the cable into the cable retention channel.
3. Install the two cable retainers (A) using the supplied screws. Tighten the screws gently.
¼ Note: If routing the interconnection cable down through a hole in the mounting surface
concealed by the radar, install only the retainer nearest the interconnection cable socket.
¼ Note: If installing the scanner in a location where the dome radar can’t be placed upside
down within reach of the scanner cable, install the retainers on one side first. After the cable
is laid into place, swivel the retainers (B) over the retention channel and gently tighten the
screws.
! Warnings:
The retainers only help hold the cable in place. They are not intended to provide strain relief.
Do not allow the cable to be pulled tight when fitted to the scanner.
Do not hang the scanner from the cable.
A
B
Scanner connection details
8 8
1 7 7 1
2 6 6 2
3 5 5 3
4 4
Scanner socket Interconnection cable plug (scanner end)
Pin-out Wire color Description
1 Black DC negative
2 Yellow Power control
3 Green Data Receive -
4 White / Green Data Receive +
5 Orange Data Transmit -
6 White / Orange Data Transmit +
14 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
7 Red +12/24 V DC
8 Drain Shield
Installing the scanner
Tape the supplied mounting template securely to the chosen location. Before drilling, check:
• you have oriented the mounting template correctly so that the front of the scanner unit
will face the front of the vessel
• clearance to other objects in all directions is >255 mm (10.0”) for Halo20/20+ and >315 mm
(12.5”) for Halo24 from the center of the product as indicated on the mounting templates
• the thickness of chosen mounting surface must be at least 3 mm (0.11“) and maximum 18
mm (0.7”). If the location is thicker, longer bolts than those supplied will be required
¼ Note: The bolts supplied are M8 x 30 mm. If you need to use longer bolts make sure they are
marine grade stainless steel and allow for minimum of 8 mm (0.3”) and maximum of 18 mm
(0.7”) of thread contact.
1. Use a 9.5 mm (3/8”) drill bit to drill the four holes where shown on the mounting template.
2. Connect the scanner interconnection cable. Refer to “Scanner connection” on page 14.
3. If mounting bolts penetrate a roof or a closed dry cavity, use a marine high-grade sealant/
adhesive compound to seal around the bolt holes. Do not fill holes directly with sealant.
4. Position the scanner carefully over the bolt holes so that they are aligned.
5. Place a lock washer and a plain washer onto each bolt.
6. Where necessary, apply a small amount of sealant to the bolt thread length that passes
through the mounting surface. Avoid applying sealant to the thread inserted into the radar.
7. Insert bolts into the scanner’s threaded mounting holes and tighten securely.
¼ Note: The torque settings for the mounting bolts are 12 Nm – 18 Nm (8.9 lb ft – 13.3 lb ft).
! Important: To prevent galling and corrosion, apply a light coating of Tef-Gel® or
other suitable nickel- or PTFE-based lubricant to the threads of the mounting bolts or the
threaded insert in the radar.
¼ Note: Any extension should be made using appropriate marine grade cable, using tinned
copper conductors.
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 15
Ethernet connection
The scanner can be connected either directly to a RJ45 Ethernet socket or to a 5-pin Ethernet
socket via the supplied Ethernet adapter.
A B
Ethernet Ethernet
C
C
D
F
E
Key Description
A Display unit or Ethernet switch with a 5-pin Ethernet socket
B Display unit or Ethernet switch with a RJ45 Ethernet socket
C Ethernet cable plug (RJ45)
D Ethernet adapter cable (RJ45 to 5-pin)
E Power and power control wires
F Interconnection cable to scanner
RJ45 Ethernet connector details
1 8 8 1
Ethernet switch socket Interconnection cable (RJ45 plug)
Pin-out Wire color Description
1 White/Orange Data transmit +
2 Orange Data transmit -
3 White/Green Data receive +
4 Blue Not used
5 White/Blue Not used
6 Green Data receive -
7 White/Brown Not used
8 Brown Not used
16 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Ethernet adapter cable
The ethernet adapter cable is used to connect the scanner to a 5-pin Ethernet connector.
Use the supplied waterproof cable boot to seal the connection between the interconnection
cable and the Ethernet adapter cable.
Waterproof cable boot
1. Slide the boot parts over the interconnection cable.
2. Connect the cables together first inserting the RJ45 socket, then turn and lock the cable boot
(A) to the adapter cable (B).
B A
3. Tighten the boot gland.
Ethernet adapter cable details
5
1 8
4 1
3 2
5-pin plug RJ45 socket
5-pin plug RJ45 socket Wire color Description
1 1 Orange / White Data transmit +
2 2 Orange Data transmit -
3 3 Blue / White Data receive +
4 6 Blue Data receive -
5 Shield -- Drain
-- 4-5 -- Not used
-- 7-8 -- Not used
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 17
Power connection
The unit is designed to be powered by a 12 or 24 V DC system. It is protected against reverse
polarity, under voltage, and over voltage (for a limited duration of time).
A fuse should be fitted to the positive supply, for recommended fuse rating refer to “Technical
specifications” on page 27.
¼ Note: Connection via a switch panel and main isolator switch is assumed. Wiring directly to a
vessels battery bank is not recommended.
The shield (bare wire) can be insulated from all other wires.
If interference is encountered from other on board electronics, the screen can be connected
to a vessel hull ground to help reduce any interference, but it is not generally required.
E
F
D
C
A B
Key Color Description
A Black DC negative
B Red +12/24 V DC
C Yellow Power control wire
D -- Shield
E -- Data cable
F -- Interconnection cable to scanner
Recommended wire gauges for extending power wire length for a 12 V system:
Extension wiring length
2m 5m 10 m 20 m 30 m
(6.56 ft) (16.40 ft) (32.80 ft) (65.61 ft) (98.42 ft)
5m
16 16 16 14
(16.40 ft)
10 m
Min. AWG
16 16 14 12
(32.80 ft)
16
Interconnection cable length
20 m
16 16 14 12
(65.61 ft)
30 m
14 12 8 6
(98.42 ft)
5m
1.00 1.00 1.00 2.50
(16.40 ft)
Min. Cross-section
10 m
1.00 1.00 2.50 4.00
(mm2)
(32.80 ft)
1.00
20 m
1.00 1.00 2.50 4.00
(65.61 ft)
30 m
2.50 4.00 10.00 16.00
(98.42 ft)
18 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Power control connection
The yellow wire in the power cable is used to control how the unit is turned on and off.
Power control by supply power
The scanner will turn on/off when power is applied/removed. Connect the yellow wire to the
red wire after the fuse.
A
Key Wire color Description
A Yellow Power control wire, connected to supply power
Power on by switch
The unit will be turned on as long as the switch is closed.
A
B
Key Wire color Description
A Yellow Power control wire
B Power switch
Power controlled
The scanner can be connected to a common power control bus, and will turn on when
power is applied to the bus by a display unit.
For Lowrance displays connect the yellow wire of the power connector cable to the bus.
For Simrad and B&G displays connect the yellow wire of the power connector cable to the
bus and set all displays intended to power on/off the system to be master.
For more information, refer to the documentation supplied with your display unit.
A
B
A
Key Wire color Description
A Yellow Power control wire
B Master slave bus
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 19
3
Setup and configuration
Setup and configuration of the Halo Radar has been simplified compared to traditional pulse
radars. There is no zero range adjustment (time delay), no warm up time and no burn in
required.
Make the following settings before use. Refer to the documentation supplied with your
display unit to locate the settings to be adjusted.
Adjust bearing alignment
Aligns the heading marker on the screen with the center line of the vessel. This ensures that
MARPA targets and bearings taken with the EBL are displayed accurately.
Antenna height adjustment
The antenna height is the height of the antenna above the water line. Ensure the antenna
height is set correctly, as it affects the sea clutter function. Do not set the height to zero.
Sector blanking
Used to stop the radar transmitting in the direction of structures that could cause unwanted
reflections or interference to appear on the radar image. Four sectors can be set, the bearing
of which is measured from the bow of the vessel to the center line of the sector.
Sidelobe suppression
¼ Note: This control should only be adjusted by experienced radar users. Target loss in harbor
environments may occur if this control is not adjusted correctly.
By default this control is set to Auto. Increase the suppression if there are false targets
appearing as arcs radiating from either side of an actual target (typically large structures such
as steel ships, container wharves, and large buildings).
Halo light
¼ Note: Only available for Halo20+ and Halo24 Radars.
Determines the light level of the LED accent light.
! Warning: Halo Radar’s lighting may not be approved for use in your boating location.
Please check your local boating regulations before turning the blue accent lights ON.
20 | Setup and configuration | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
4
Maintenance
Clean the radome using soapy water and a soft cloth. Avoid using abrasive cleaning products.
Do not use solvents such as gasoline, acetone, M.E.K etc. as this will damage the dome
surface.
Maintenance | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 21
5
Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G Radar
¼ Note: Some older displays may not be compatible with Halo 20, 20+ and 24 dome radars. For
information contact Navico customer service.
An adapter cable must be used if the Halo Radar is to be connected using a pre-existing
Broadband radar interconnection cable.
Before taking scanner up mast/pedestal:
1. Insert the connector of the adapter cable (A) into the scanner socket. Turn the locking collar to
secure the connector.
2. Install the first retainer across the adapter cable using the supplied screws. Tighten gently.
3. Install the second retainer using one screw only, leaving it turned to one side so the cable
channel is left open.
At mounting location:
4. Insert the connector of the existing interconnection cable (B) into the socket on the adapter
cable. Turn the locking collar to secure the connector.
5. Swivel the second retainer over cable and gently tighten both screws.
A
B
RI-10 Radar interface box and wiring
It is recommended to remove the RI-10 Radar interface box. After removing the RI-10 Radar
interface box, reterminate the connector. Use the appropriate tools to strip the 4G cable
about 20 cm to allow the waterproof cable boot to slide over the RJ45 connector. Refer to
“Waterproof cable boot” on page 17. Connect the 4G cable wires to power as described in
“Power connection” on page 18 and “Power control connection” on page 19.
If removing the RI-10 Radar interface box and associated cables/wiring is difficult they may
remain in place when a Halo 20/20+ or Halo24 is connected via the scanner adaptor cable,
with no detriment to performance.
Check the Fuse/circuit breaker rating is as specified. Refer to “Technical specifications” on page
27.
¼ Note: Halo dome radars do not require navigation data via Simnet or NMEA 2000 for MARPA
or Velocity Track to operate.
22 | Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G Radar | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
6
Troubleshooting
Status LED
There is a status LED (A) at the back of the scanner that indicates the status of the scanner.
A
Condition Flash repeat sequence Priority
Booting-up/Upgrading Continuous ON 1 (highest)
Fault Rapidly flashing 2
Low voltage 3 quick flashes then long gap 3
No Ethernet/Physical link 2 quick flashes then long gap 4
Operating normally Slow flash 5
¼ Note: If more than one condition exists simultaneously, the condition with the highest priority
will be indicated.
Error messages
If problems persists check that the software is up to date. Check the following websites for the
latest version of the radar and display unit software:
www.lowrance.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.bandg.com
Unknown Radar
Generally seen when overlaying the radar on the chart or when current display software is too
old to support radar.
Recommendations
Ensure that the correct radar source is selected and configured in the display unit. Refer to the
display unit’s documentation.
No radar
Indicates the Display and Radar have not established a network connection.
Recommendations
• Check the Radar Status LED
• Check that the Ethernet light is blinking at the radar and at the display (where applicable) or
network expansion port
• Check/select radar in Radar Sources
• Power cycle the system
• Check all connections, ensuring plugs are seated properly and no corrosion is evident on pins
• Check voltage to the yellow power control wire
• Check supply voltage/current
• Check for faults or pinch spots on the Ethernet cable and replace it
• Try another Ethernet port on the display or switch
Troubleshooting | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 23
No scanner
Happens when Ethernet connection is established between radar and display, but an internal
error in the scanner prevents normal radar operation.
Recommendations
• Check supply voltage/current
• If persistent, power cycle the system, check the scanner cable / RJ45
• Possible internal fault with the radar, contact service
No spoke data
Happens when Ethernet connection is established between radar and display, but an internal
error in the scanner prevents normal radar operation.
Recommendations
• Check supply voltage/current
• If persistent, power cycle the system, check the scanner cable / RJ45
• Possible internal fault with the radar, contact service
Error codes
If the error code repeats, please refer to list below.
Error code Description Recommendation
0x00000001 Radar saved settings corrupted Radar will revert to factory defaults. Re-enter
your settings including installation settings
0x0001000C Scanner not detected 1. Check the pedestal interconnection cable
connections
2. Power cycle the radar
3. Check input Voltage
0x0001000D Transmitter overheat (soft) 1. Try changing to shorter ranges <6 NM
2. Switch to STBY, Allow unit cool
0x0001000E Transmitter overheat (hard) Switch to STBY, Isolate power to the radar
and contact service
0x0001000F Signal processing error Unit should revert to STBY. Select transmit
If problem persists. power cycle the radar
0x00010017 Scanner failure Contact service
Power supply
0x00010010 Power supply overheating Switch to STBY, Allow unit cool then retry
0x00010011 Power supply voltage error Check scanner cable for connections for
corrosion or damage
0x00010012 Power supply overload Contact service
0x00010013 Power supply hardware fault Contact service
0x00010014 Power supply comms fault Contact service
0x00010019 Low battery voltage (Supply 1. Recharge and check supply voltage
voltage low) 2. Restart the radar
0x00010016 LED Lighting fault Turn accent lighting off then retry
0x00010018 Radar interface box fault Check the interconnection cable for damage
Mechanical
0x00010001 Zero bearing sensor fault Contact service
0x00010002 Bearing sensor fault Contact service
0x00010015 Mechanical transmission fault Contact service
0x00010003 Motor drive fault Contact service
0x0001001A Motor or antenna has stalled Contact service
24 | Troubleshooting | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
7
Dimensional drawings
Halo dome radar dimensions
A
B
C
D
Dimensions
Key
Halo20/20+ Radar Halo24 Radar Broadband 3G/4G Radar
A 223.0 mm (8.78”) 225 mm (8.9”) 280 mm (11.02”)
B 510.0 mm (20.08”) 610 mm (24”) 488.6 mm (19.24”)
C 233.0 mm (9.17”) 233.0 mm (9.17”) 233.0 mm (9.17”)
D 141.5 mm (5.57”) 141.5 mm (5.57”) 141.5 mm (5.57”)
¼ Note: The bolt holes are located in the same position for each radar.
Dimensional drawings | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 25
Halo dome radar bottom view
C C
D D
B
C C
A
Key Description
A Cable entry area
B Cable retention channel
C Bolt hole M8 x 30 mm
D LED accent light*
* Only available for Halo20+ and Halo24 Radars.
26 | Dimensional drawings | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
8
Technical specifications
Halo20/20+ Radar
Halo20 Halo20+
Characteristics
Environmental IEC60945 : 2002
Operating Temperature: -25° to +55°C (-13° to +130°F)
Relative humidity: +35° C (95° F), 95% RH
Waterproof: IPX6
Max relative wind velocity 51 m/sec (100 Knots)
Power
DC input 10.5-31.2 V with reverse polarity protection
Power consumption Operating: 17-20 W Operating: 17-29 W
(Range/mode dependent) (Range/mode dependent)
Standby: 3.9 W (Typ.) at Standby: 3.9 W (Typ.) at
13.8 V DC 13.8 V DC
Recommended fuse rating 5A
Outside dimensions Refer to “Dimensional drawings” on page 25
Scanner weight (no cable) 5.9 kg (13.0 lbs)
Radar and Antenna parameters
Radar ranges 24 NM 36 NM
Rotation speed (mode dependent) 20 - 24 rpm (mode and 20 - 60 rpm (mode and
MFD dependent) MFD dependent)
Transmitter frequency X-band - 9.4 to 9.5 GHz
Transmitter source (warm-up time) No Magnetron – all solid state. Instant On™
Plane of polarization Horizontal Polarization
Transmitter peak power output 10 W 25 W
Minimum range 6 m (19.7 ft)
Sweep repetition frequency 700-2400 Hz (mode dependent)
Pulse length 0.04 - 64 usec +/- 10%
Sweep bandwidth 48 MHz max
Horizontal beam width (Tx and Rx 4.9° nominal (-3 dB width)
antenna)
Target Separation Control N/A OFF: 4.9°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
LOW: ~4.3°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
MED: ~3.2°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
HIGH: ~2.5°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
Vertical beam width (Tx and Rx 25° (-3 dB width nominal)
antenna)
Side lobe level (Tx and Rx antenna) Below -18 dB (within ±10°); Below -23 dB (outside
±10°)
Noise figure Less than 5 dB nominal
Communications/Cabling
Protocol Ethernet 100Base-T
Max. interconnecting cable length 30 m (98.5 ft) – available as option
Technical specifications | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 27
Halo24 Radar
Characteristics
Environmental IEC60945 : 2002
Operating Temperature: -25° to +55°C (-13° to +130°F)
Relative humidity: +35° C (95° F), 95% RH
Waterproof: IPX6
Max relative wind velocity 51 m/sec (100 Knots)
Power
DC input 10.5-31.2 V with reverse polarity protection
Power consumption Operating: 17-29 W (Range/mode dependent)
Standby: 3.9 W (Typ.) at 13.8 V DC
Recommended fuse rating 5 A
Outside dimensions Refer to “Dimensional drawings” on page 25
Scanner weight (no cable) 6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
Radar and Antenna parameters
Radar ranges 100 m (328 ft) to 89 km (48 nm) with 18 range settings
(nm/sm/km)
Rotation (mode dependent) 20 - 60 rpm (mode and MFD dependent)
Transmitter frequency X-band - 9.4 to 9.5 GHz
Transmitter source (warm-up time) No Magnetron – all solid state. Instant On™
Plane of polarization Horizontal Polarization
Transmitter peak power output 25 W
Minimum range 6 m (19.7 ft)
Sweep repetition frequency 700-2400 Hz (mode dependent)
Pulse length 0.04 - 64 usec +/- 10%
Sweep bandwidth 48 MHz max
Horizontal beam width (Tx and Rx 3.9° nominal (-3 dB width)
antenna)
Target Separation Control OFF: 3.9°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
LOW: ~3.4°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
MED: ~2.5°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
HIGH: ~2.0°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
Vertical beam width (Tx and Rx 22° (-3B width nominal)
antenna)
Side lobe level (Tx and Rx antenna) Below -18 dB (within ±10°);Below -24 dB (outside ±10°)
Noise figure Less than 5 dB nominal
Communications/Cabling
Protocol Ethernet 100Base-T
Maximum interconnecting cable 30 m (98.5 ft) – available as option
length
28 | Technical specifications | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
9
Accessories
The most up-to-date accessories list is available at:
• www.lowrance.com
• www.simrad-yachting.com
• www.bandg.com
Accessories | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 29
*988-12307-005*
www.lowrance.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.bandg.com
*988-10984-004*
Precision™ 9 Installation Guide Scan to save a copy
The Precision™ 9 compass outputs magnetic heading for sail and powerboats. It connects to the vessel’s NMEA 2000®
network, allowing you to set up and control it from display units on the network. The compass outputs magnetic heading
data suitable for autopilot steering as well as rate of turn, pitch, roll and heave.
¼ Note: Pitch and roll are called trim and heel for B&G® products.
Installation
The Precision™ 9 compass can be mounted on a flat, horizontal or vertical surface, athwart ship or along ship. Select a
location that provides a solid mounting place free from vibration (as much as possible), and as close as possible to the vessel’s
center of pitch and roll, i.e. close to the water line.
It should be as far away as possible from:
• disturbing magnetic interferences, for example, engines (minimum of 2 m)
• ignition cables
• large metal objects, particularly the autopilot drive unit.
On steel hull vessels, the compass can be mounted 0.75 - 1 m (2.5 - 3.3 ft) above the wheel house on a non-magnetic stand, if
no other options are available.
¼ Warning: Never mount the compass upside down. Level the compass as close to horizontal as possible.
To mount the compass directly to a flat, horizontal surface:
1. Use the supplied direct mount template to mark 2 screw holes and a hole for the network cable.
¼ Note: Position the compass so it is parallel to the vessel’s center line.
2. Drill holes at the marks and position the compass so the holes line up.
3. Use 2 pan head or roundhead machine screws to secure the compass to the surface.
¼ Note: You must supply your own screws for direct mounting. Screw recommendations: Ø 10G - 4.8 mm - 3/16". Max 7.5 mm
(0.29”). Length is determined by the surface thickness. Screws must be non magnetic.
To mount the compass to a flat, vertical surface, such as a bulkhead:
1. Use the supplied bracket template to mark 2 holes to a vertical surface, then drill holes at the marks.
2. Use the supplied self-tapping screws to attach the supplied bracket to the wall.
3. Position the compass on the bracket so the mounting holes line up.
4. Insert the supplied machine screws and tighten them loosely (only half way).
5. Manually swivel the compass so it’s orientation is parallel to the vessel’s center line.
6. Fully tighten the mounting screws to secure the compass.
Wiring
Connect the Precision™ 9 compass to your NMEA 2000® network using the supplied tee connector.
Calibration
After installing and wiring your compass, you should calibrate it to compensate for the deviation (local magnetic field) on
board the vessel, and adapt the sensors to the earth’s magnetic field strength.
Your Precision™ 9 compass supports two calibration modes:
• Auto calibration
• Manual calibration
Auto calibration
There are 4 different auto calibration modes. In all modes, the compass continuously collects and calculates new calibration
parameters during normal use on the water - the difference is in how and when new parameters are applied.
The default mode is Auto, and for most users it’s not necessary to change this. However, if you wish to make sure the
compass doesn’t change its calibration, you can set it to Locked once you're satisfied with the performance.
To change the mode, go to your compatible display unit and find your Precision™ 9 compass in the devices list, usually under
Settings > Network (or Boat network) > Device list (or Devices) > Precision-9. Open the compass configuration screen and
select a different mode from the Compass auto calibration drop-down.
¼ Note: If the Compass auto calibration option isn't available on your display unit, go directly to the Manual calibration
section of this installation guide.
Mode Behavior
Auto In this mode, the compass will phase in new calibration parameters only if the parameters in use are deemed
invalid (their performance has dropped below a certain threshold) and the new parameters are proven to be
better. Parameters can become invalid due to changes in the magnetic field. This could be from moving to a
different geographic position. It takes around 20 minutes to phase in the new settings.
Locked In this mode, the compass won’t change calibration parameters in use by itself. If new parameters are
deemed better than the current ones, the following warning displays, "Parameters in use are not valid”. In
this situation, you can switch to Auto or On mode and phase in the new settings. Locked mode is suitable for
vessels operating in a small geographical area with no big variation in the local magnetic field.
On In this mode, the compass will phase in new parameters if they are deemed better (their performance is over a
certain threshold) than the parameters in use. It takes around 20 minutes to phase in the new settings.
Off In this mode, no auto calibration parameters are used, and the compass uses manual calibration.
Statuses and warnings
Calibration status and warning information also displays on the compass configuration screen.
Status Description
Is not calibrated The needed magnetic raw data is not yet collected.
Is calibrating New calibration parameters have been found, and are being phased in.
Is calibrated Calibration parameters have been found and are being used.
--- Auto calibration mode is set to Off.
Warning Description
First calibration in progress Data for first calibration is being collected.
No warning Performance of current parameters is deemed good.
Parameters in use are not valid Current parameters are not valid. If this is seen when the mode is Locked, the mode
should at least temporarily be set to On or Auto, to switch parameters.
--- Auto calibration mode is set to Off.
Manual calibration
To manually calibrate your Precision™ 9 compass, go to your compatible display unit and find it in the devices list, usually
under Settings > Network (or Boat network) > Device list (or Devices) > Precision-9. Select Calibrate or Recalibrate
compass (depending on your display unit) and follow the on-screen instructions.
¼ Note: If your display unit supports auto calibration, the auto calibration mode must first be set to Off.
Important points:
• Manually calibrate your compass in calm sea conditions with minimal wind and current.
• Ensure there's enough open water around the vessel to maneuver a turn of about 390 degrees.
• Maintain a turn rate of about 2-3 degrees per second until you see a notification that the calibration is complete.
¼ Note: If an autopilot is configured, a setup guide automatically takes you through compass calibration, without having to
go through the Settings menu.
¼ Note: For optimal performance, you should recalibrate the compass if the vessel has traveled far from where it was
previously calibrated. Recalibration may be required because the strength of the earth’s magnetic field varies in different
geographic locations.
Data
To see the data your compass is generating, select Data or Show details (depending on your display unit) under Settings >
Network (or Boat network) > Device list (or Devices) > Precision-9.
Offsets
After calibrating your compass, you should apply offsets for the heading, pitch and roll outputs to compensate for any
mounting alignment errors.
To apply pitch and roll offsets:
1. Ensure the vessel is stationary at the dock, loaded in normal trim.
2. Open the compass data screen by selecting Data or Show details (depending on your display unit) and take note of the
pitch and roll output values.
3. Open the compass configuration screen and adjust the pitch and roll offsets.
4. Return to the data screen to confirm the pitch and roll output values are 0.
The heading offset compensates for any difference between the vessel’s center line (A) and the x
compass lubber line (B).
To apply the heading offset: A
1. Open the compass data screen by selecting Data or Show details (depending on your display B
unit) and take note of the heading output value.
2. If necessary, change the heading reference on your display unit (Settings > Units (or
Preferences) > Heading) so it's the same as the compass heading (°M or °T).
3. Use a chart or chartplotter to find the bearing from the vessel position to a visible object.
4. Steer the vessel so its center line aligns with the bearing line pointing towards the object.
5. Open the compass configuration screen and adjust the heading offset so the bearing value and the compass heading
output are the same.
¼ Note: The compass heading and bearing values may be damped. Allow time for the heading and bearing values to settle
before applying offset.
Dimensions
119 mm (4.69”) 133 mm (5.23”)
119 mm (4.69”)
36 mm
36 mm
(1.42”)
(1.42”)
126 mm (4.96”)
126 mm (4.96”)
90 mm (3.54”)
90 mm (3.54”)
72 mm (2.83”)
Technical specifications
Module weight 165 g (5.8 oz)
Bracket weight 130 g (4.6 oz)
Supply and interface 8-16 V via NMEA 2000®
Power consumption 0.4 W
Calibration Automatic or manual
Repeatability ± 1.0° (or better)
Roll/pitch range ± 45°
Heading accuracy ± 2° after calibration
NMEA 2000 ®
Load equivalence no. (LEN) 1
Ports (input/output) 1
Output Messages: PGN 127250, 127251, 127257, 127252
Data: Magnetic heading (20 Hz), rate of turn (20 Hz), pitch/roll (10 Hz),
heave (10 Hz)
Status and warning information
Dynamic performance
- with random excitation of ± 10° at max 1 Hz Heading error <2°
- with heading step input of 90° at a rate of 10°/s Heading error 10 sec. after turn <2°
Environmental protection IPX7
Compass safe distance 0.5 m (1.7 ft)
Temperature range
Operation temperature -25 to +65°C (-13 to +149°F)
Storage temperature -30 to +70°C (-22 to +158°F)
Cable supplied 4.5 m (15 ft) incl. connector
Mounting Horizontal or vertical surface
Material Plastic
Disclaimer
Warning: Refer to important safety information in the user app guides, product documentation and review all warnings, limitations, and disclaimers before using this product.
This product is not a substitute for proper training and prudent seamanship. It is the owner’s sole responsibility to install and use the equipment in a manner that will not cause
accidents, personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is solely responsible for observing maritime safety practices.
Navigational features that appear in this guide are not a substitute for proper training and prudent seamanship. They do not replace a human navigator and SHOULD NOT be
relied on as a sole or primary source of navigation. It is the operator’s sole responsibility to use more than one navigational methods to ensure the route suggested by the system
is safe.
BRUNSWICK CORPORATION AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, BRANCHES AND AFFILIATES DISCLAIM ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A WAY THAT MAY
CAUSE ACCIDENTS, DAMAGE OR THAT MAY VIOLATE THE LAW.
This document represents the product at the time of publishing. Brunswick Corporation and its subsidiaries, branches and affiliates reserve the right to make changes to the
product and/or specifications at any time without notice. Please contact your nearest distributor if you require any further assistance.
Compliance statements
Declarations
The relevant declarations of conformity are available at: www.simrad-yachting.com, www.lowrance.com and www.bandg.com.
United Kingdom
The Precision™ 9 compass complies with UKCA under Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016.
Europe
The Precision™ 9 compass complies with CE under Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU.
United States of America
Note: The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Australia and New Zealand
The Precision™ 9 compass complies with the requirements of Level 2 devices of the Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Standard 2017.
Note: This product includes code from the Eigen project licensed under the MPL v2.0 license, available from http://eigen.tuxfamily.org/.
Copyright
©
2023 Navico Group. All Rights Reserved. Navico Group is a division of Brunswick Corporation.
Trademarks
®Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off, and ™ common law marks.
Visit www.navico.com/intellectual-property to review the global trademark rights and accreditations for Navico Group and other entities.
Warranty
The warranty card is supplied as a separate document. In case of any queries, refer to the brand website of your unit or system.
ForwardScan™ Sonar
User guide
Installation
Connecting the transducer
The ForwardScan™ transducer can be connected to the
StructureScan port on the SonarHub or the NSS evo2, leaving the
sonar port open for a CHIRP transducer. Refer to the ForwardScan
installation manual for transducer installation instructions.
Warning: It is the owner’s sole responsibility to install and
use the equipment in a manner that will not cause accidents,
personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is
solely responsible for observing safe boating practices.
Warning: Do not rely on this equipment as your principle
source of navigation or hazard detection.
Sonar performance
The accuracy of the sonar depth display can be affected by many
factors, including the type and location of the transducer and
water conditions. Never use this equipment to gauge depth or
other conditions for swimming or diving.
The choice, location, and installation of transducers and other
components of the system are critical to the performance of the
system as intended. If in doubt, consult your dealer.
To reduce the risk of misusing this equipment, you must read and
understand all aspects of the supplied documentation.
Sharing ForwardScan data
ForwardScan data can be shared with NSO evo2, NSS evo2 or
Zeus2 displays by connecting the forward-looking transducer to a
SonarHub on your Ethernet network.
You can also connect the transducer to a NSS evo2 to share
ForwardScan data with multi-function displays on your Ethernet
network.
¼¼ Note: We do not recommend operating different brands of multi-
function displays on the same network.
ForwardScan | User Guide | 1
Operation
ForwardScan™ forward-looking sonar is a navigational aid that
helps you monitor the depth in front of your vessel.
ForwardScan features are available in the latest software update
for your multi-function display. Refer to your display’s brand
website to download the latest update.
¼¼ Note: Screen captures in this document are from a NSS evo 2 unit.
The look of your unit may differ slightly, but it will operate in a
similar manner.
1
6
2
4
3
5
Key Description
1 Transducer location shown as the origin on the screen
2 Depth range scale/Boat position
3 Point data
4 Depth history
5 Bottom
6 Forward range scale
2| ForwardScan | User Guide
Accessing ForwardScan
ForwardScan sonar can be displayed full screen or in a multi-
panel page. Refer to your operation manual for information
about setting up a multi-panel page.
ForwardScan setup
Critical forward range and Critical depth
Critical Forward Range and Critical Depth are user-selected
thresholds that define a critical zone forward of your vessel.
If you travel into water shallow enough to cross into the critical
zone, the Critical Zone alarm is activated. You can display the
critical and warning zones by activating Show zones.
Critical zone Warning zone
ForwardScan display with Show zones active
Warning Forward Range and Warning Depth values are based on
the selected Critical Forward Range and Critical Depth values.
¼¼ Note: To receive Critical Zone alerts, enable ForwardScan alarm
on the Alarm settings tab. Refer to your unit’s operation manual
for information on enabling alarms.
ForwardScan | User Guide |3
Heading extension
You can use the heading extension to monitor ForwardScan
on the chart panel. Heading extension colors are based on
ForwardScan alarm values.
Red/Critical
Yellow/Warning
Green/Safe
ForwardScan extension
Green Safe
Yellow Warning
Red Critical
Select ForwardScan in the Extension lines options dialog to view
ForwardScan heading extension on the chart panel.
4| ForwardScan | User Guide
Transducer angle
We recommend installing the transducer vertical to the waterline.
In cases where that is not possible, the Transducer Angle setting
helps offset the difference between the transducer angle and the
waterline.
If the transducer is angled toward the front of the vessel, a
positive value (0 to +15°) is entered in the Transducer angle
dialog. If the transducer is angled toward the rear of the vessel,
a negative value (0 to -15°) is entered in the Transducer angle
dialog.
Warning: Adjustments to the transducer angle value should
be done with caution. Large variations in the transducer angle
value can distort depth data, increasing the risk of striking
underwater obstructions.
ForwardScan options and settings
Depth
Controls depth range. Depth range is set to auto mode by
default.
Forward range
Controls the forward looking range. Maximum Forward range is
300’ (91 m).
Noise Rejection
Filters out signal interference and reduces on-screen clutter.
Record
Used to record ForwardScan sonar logs.
Pause
Pauses ForwardScan sonar transmissions.
ForwardScan | User Guide |5
View
Palette
Several display palettes are available for a variety of water
conditions.
History ratio
Controls how much of the screen is used to show sonar history
on the ForwardScan image. The higher the ratio, the more history
will be shown.
Point data
By default, ForwardScan only shows the bottom. Access the Point
data menu to view all sonar data points, or only points (Objects)
in the water column.
Show zones
Displays warning zones (yellow) and critical zones (red) on the
screen.
Depth lines
Lines on the screen that make it easier to quickly estimate depth
and the underwater objects.
6| ForwardScan | User Guide
*988-10761-002*
www.bandg.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
1 (35)
09.06.2025
Boomeranger Boats_Features and Equipment 9-12m Boats
FOREWORD
This document includes marketing images and drawings from Boomeranger and its vendors.
All boat pictures are from existing earlier delivered Boomeranger Boats RHIBs. The images are
included for illustrative purposes only and do not necessarily reflect the actual, offered
product in all aspects. In case of any conflict between the written specification and included
images/pictures/drawings, the written text prevails.
Picture: C-1200 OB
Boomeranger Boats Oy Tel. +358 19 515 805
[email protected]
Troolitie 12, FIN-07910 Valko, Finland www.boomeranger.fi
2 (35)
INTRODUCTION
The Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are based on Boomeranger’s proprietary hull
platforms and solutions which are customized according to customer requirements by
Boomeranger’s in-house design department.
Boats are built by experienced craftsmen, in a purpose-built factory in Finland. There is no
significant outsourced manufacturing involved, the quality controlling mechanisms are
entirely within the company and the highest quality level in all manufacturing stages is
guaranteed.
Picture: C-1200 OB
Drawing: General arrangement C-950
3 (35)
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 2
1. REGULATIONS AND RULES .............................................................................................................. 5
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 5
3. EXPORT LICENCE .............................................................................................................................. 6
4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................................... 7
5. HULL AND DECK ................................................................................................................................. 8
5.1 Hull, bilge system and hull equipment .................................................................................................. 8
5.2 Deck .................................................................................................................................................... 10
6. COLLAR ............................................................................................................................................. 11
6.1 Inflatable tube ..................................................................................................................................... 11
7. CONSOLE .......................................................................................................................................... 13
7.1 Console structure................................................................................................................................ 13
7.2 Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................... 14
7.3 Bimini arc ............................................................................................................................................ 15
7.4 Console other equipment ................................................................................................................... 17
8. SEATS ................................................................................................................................................ 18
9. FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 19
9.1 Fuel tank ............................................................................................................................................. 19
9.2 Self-Sealing and non-explosive tank .................................................................................................. 19
10. PROPULSION AND STEERING SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 20
10.1 Engines........................................................................................................................................... 20
10.2 Steering system .............................................................................................................................. 21
10.3 Emergency shut-off switch ............................................................................................................. 21
11. ELECTRIC SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 21
11.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 21
11.2 Batteries ......................................................................................................................................... 21
11.3 Cable conduits ................................................................................................................................ 22
11.4 Shore power system....................................................................................................................... 22
11.5 Marking of cables ........................................................................................................................... 23
11.6 Navigation lights ............................................................................................................................. 23
11.7 Console and deck lights ................................................................................................................. 23
11.8 Black-out switch ............................................................................................................................. 23
11.9 Search light .................................................................................................................................... 23
11.10 Work lights ...................................................................................................................................... 23
12. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................... 24
12.1 VHF radio and intercom ................................................................................................................. 24
12.2 Tactical radios Installation .............................................................................................................. 24
12.3 Antennas ........................................................................................................................................ 24
4 (35)
12.4 Antenna arch or mast ..................................................................................................................... 24
13. NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 26
13.1 Navigation System ......................................................................................................................... 26
14. LIFTING SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 27
14.1 4- point lifting .................................................................................................................................. 27
15. PAINTS AND COLOUR ...................................................................................................................... 27
16. PLATES AND TAGS........................................................................................................................... 28
17. ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................. 28
17.1 ProBoatGear .................................................................................................................................. 28
17.2 Boarding equipment ....................................................................................................................... 29
17.3 Console weather protection ........................................................................................................... 31
17.4 Storage solutions ............................................................................................................................ 31
17.5 Safety Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 33
17.6 Other equipment and accessories ................................................................................................. 33
18. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 34
18.1 Road and slipway trailer ................................................................................................................. 34
18.2 Storage cover ................................................................................................................................. 34
5 (35)
1. REGULATIONS AND RULES
The boat shall be built according to Eurofins Scientific Expert Services Guidelines for
Commercial Craft version 2021, Category C (significant wave height up to 2m, wind force and
Beaufort wind force 6), length less than 24 m. For the hull dimensioning according to Category
B (significant wave height up to 4m, wind force and Beaufort wind force 8). Stability and loading
are according to the ISO 6185-4 standard. With maximum crew of 14 pers. the design category
is C.
Project-specific rules and certificates may apply.
The company holds valid ISO9001 and ISO14001 quality management system certificates.
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION
Warranty period
Hull 60 months
Tube 12 months
Propulsion system 24 months or 1000 operating hours*
Communication & navigation equipment 12 months
Seats 12 months
Other equipment 12 months
Construction work 24 months
Spare part installation 12 months
*whichever comes first and depending of the engine model
Warranty is subject to maintenance of all the components as per manuals and instructions
during the warranty period.
Warranty period starts from accepted delivery of the boat.
6 (35)
3. EXPORT LICENCE
The product is categorized as a military product due to the equipment installed. Delivery of this
product requires an export license from respective authorities. For the licensing process, end-
user certificates are required to be delivered prior or during the contract signing process.
7 (35)
4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Main Dimensions
Length over all 9 – 11,99 m
Beam over all 3,0 - 3,60 m
Beam in transport with deflated tubes 2,3 - 2,75 m
Hull draft* c. 0,8 – 0,9 m
Height max (antennas folded)* c. 4,0 m
Light weight* TBD
Performance
Performance at light weight in SeaState c. 35 - 55 knots
0
Range c. 90 - 250 Nm
Fuel tank size TBD
Propulsion
Engines Mercury Outboard engines
Power TBD
Propeller type TBD
Environmental conditions for operation and storage
Ambient temperature -10°C to +45°C
Sea water temperature 0°C to +35°C
The OEMs instructions for use and maintenance must be followed to ensure the proper functioning
of the equipment. Temperature-related instructions are compiled in the boat's user manual.
8 (35)
5. HULL AND DECK
5.1 Hull, bilge system and hull equipment
The hull is a conventional deep-V mono hull with spray rails with 22- 24 degrees dead rise at
the transom to minimize physical impacts on the personnel and for logical behaviour in rough
weather conditions and different loading conditions. Deep V-shape hull combined with a
robust structure translates to a softer ride with lower peak accelerations in waves, and the
ability to travel at a higher speed in rough conditions.
9 (35)
Bilge System
The boat is equipped with electric and manual bilge pumps.
Electric bilge pumps can be operated in three modes:
i. On automatic mode there is a level switch which turns on the pump whenever the
water level in the compartment rises above the set threshold. It automatically turns
the pump off when the water level has dropped below the pre-set level and indicates
visual and audible alarm.
ii. The manual override mode in user operated from a switch in the dashboard.
iii. The system can also be turned off for covert and tactical reasons.
The pumps can be running dry without damage on the pumps.
Hull equipment
Integrated casted PU-keel flush with
hull.
Heavy duty bow ring for trailering,
mooring or towing. The bow ring is
recessed to avoid getting stuck to
protruding objects.
D-rubber profiles to protect the edges
and nose of the hull.
Transport tie-downs points
Two Heavy duty D-rings in the aft for
towing or trailer lashing.
10 (35)
Deck
The deck is manufactured from glass fibre using vinyl ester resin, the core material being high
density PVC foam. The deck is bonded into the hull beams to form a solid structure.
The deck is positioned above
water level and has two draining
outlets that allow it to self-drain
through the transom. The
outlets are equipped with heavy-
duty sleeves to prevent
backflush.
The deck is equipped with a
deck track system. The deck
track system allows the seats,
wind-up boarding poles and
rigging, cargo tie-downs and
other equipment to be easily
replaced for re-configuration of
the deck area (front and aft of
the console) without any
special tools. Lashing points
can be attached on the track
where needed.
11 (35)
Lashing points on the sides of
the deck.
The deck will have anti-slip
protection.
6. COLLAR
6.1 Inflatable tube
The RHIB is provided with a round air-filled tube. Additional foam cover can be added in the
tube or only in bow section.
Main characteristics
Rules The inflatable tube material, volume and
compartmentation fulfil requirements of EN
ISO 6185-4. RIB tube collar material,
production and testing fulfil requirements of
ISO 6185-4:2018.
Material and density The inflatable tube is manufactured from Orca
866 fabric (equivalent to Hypalon*) which is
designed for heavy duty applications. The density
of the fabric is 1500 g/m2 (1670 dtex).
12 (35)
Chambers The tube consists of 7 separate circular buoyancy
chambers, each equipped with filling and over
pressure valves.
Equipment
Heavy duty EPDM rubbing strakes on the
whole length to protect the tube from
side impacts. The material is non-
staining. The rubbing strake is
adhesively installed, and it is easily
replaceable if damaged or worn out.
Flush or profiled.
Tube is fitted with non-slip surface on the
upper side in all walking areas.
Lifeline as per customer requirement.
13 (35)
Pouches and handles
7. CONSOLE
7.1 Console structure
The boat has a steering and navigation console manufactured of advanced laminate sandwich
structure with PVC-core. Inside the console are two watertight electric equipment
compartments, each with a watertight hatch on the front side of the console.
14 (35)
7.2 Instrumentation
Steering wheel and engine controls are ergonomically located to the reach of the driver.
Navigation electronics are located to the reach of driver and/or navigator. The console has
provisions for Government Furnished Equipment and a mock-up of the console will be created
to determine the final equipment layout configuration in collaboration with the customer.
The console has the alarm switch panel for critical systems. The panel has visual and audible
signal for each function which can be turned off for covert operations. Equipment indicators
lights are mainly dimmable and lights which can´t be dimmed, are covered.
The console has 2 or 3 screens.
15 (35)
7.3 Bimini arc
The console is equipped with a bimini arc for navigation and communication equipment. The
arc is robust design and dimensioned for the specified operation conditions and loading. The
arc has hinges, gas springs, and quick locks to easily configure the boat for transport.
The final layout of the equipment will be decided after the EMC evaluation.
16 (35)
17 (35)
7.4 Console other equipment
Grabrails
Air conditioning Console air intakes and outlets are positioned and
protected to prevent any water or spray to enter inside
the console. The ventilation system has air blower for
forced circulation which can be operated when the
boat is sailing or connected to shore power. The
blowers are controlled by dual thermostat-hygrostat
with manual override function.
The console has an electrical heater with thermostat-
hygrostat to keep the compartment heated in low
temperatures or high humidity conditions.
The console has transparent
polycarbonate wind screen to
deflect wind and rain efficiently. The
wind screen can be tilted down for
transportation.
18 (35)
8. SEATS
The boat is primarily equipped with shock-mitigating seats from Ullman Dynamics, Shoxs, or
Shockwave. All models used are constructed from non-corrosive materials and are designed to
withstand the harsh marine environment. Each seat can be fitted with a protective cover that
guards against heavy wear and tear.
Seats are mounted on cargo tracks, allowing for flexible layout configurations. The quick track
mount system enables longitudinal adjustment without the need for special tools, making seat
repositioning fast and efficient.
19 (35)
9. FUEL SYSTEM
9.1 Fuel tank
The fuel tank is one unit which is divided longitudinally in two separate volumes and
manufactured of aluminium, carefully cleaned and pressure tested before installation. The
tanks are located below deck and waterline, under a full-size deck hatch which can be
removed for maintenance, inspection and repair. The tanks have hatches for inspection and
cleaning and can be removed for repair.
Both tanks can supply fuel to the engines together, or only one side can be in use. Tanks have
internal splash walls.
The engine instrumentation in the dashboard includes an analogue fuel level gauge with a simple,
easy-to-read scale. The fuel level sensor/gauge is calibrated according to the real (non-
rectangular) shape of the fuel tank.
9.2 Self-Sealing and non-explosive tank
The boat’s fuel tanks can be equipped with a self-sealing system. These tanks are surrounded by
multi-layered materials, including rubber compounds that swell upon contact with fuel. When
20 (35)
penetrated by a 7.62 mm round, the material expands to seal the bullet hole, effectively
preventing fuel leakage.
Additionally, the tanks can be fitted with non-
explosive filler material. This filler reduces the risk of
explosion by preventing fuel vapor buildup and
suppressing ignition in the event of a projectile
impact.
10. PROPULSION AND STEERING SYSTEM
10.1 Engines
Propulsion
Engines 2 or 3 Mercury outboard engines
Power TBD
Fuel Gasoline
Propeller Counter rotating
Redundancy Engines can be used independently, allowing
driving even if one fails.
21 (35)
10.2 Steering system
The engine steering system is either electro-hydraulic or electric, operated via a tilting steering
wheel. The system is power assisted, ensuring smooth and responsive control under all
operating conditions.
10.3 Emergency shut-off switch
An emergency shut-off switch (the “dead man’s switch”) is located to proximity of the driver.
On release, the engine will automatically shut down. Wireless system can be used.
11. ELECTRIC SYSTEM
11.1 General
The boat has a two pole 12 VDC electricity system. 12 V consumers get their power through
two pole automatic circuit breakers, which are located inside the steering console.
Consumers are controlled via water tight (IP65 or higher in open deck areas), heavy duty two
pole switches.
All electronic equipment and connectors exposed to elements are waterproof to at least IP66
to withstand condensation and corrosion.
11.2 Batteries
Start and consumption batteries are located in the technical storage in a protected casing,
charged by the engine generators and are equipped with two pole main switches.
22 (35)
i. 50 Ah Optima Red Top high power, vibration-resistant sealed lead acid batteries for
starting the engines.
ii. 55 Ah Optima Yellow Top high power, vibration-resistant deep cycle sealed lead acid
battery for general consumption.
iii. Switch to connect batteries parallel in emergency situation.
11.3 Cable conduits
Power cables run in a separate conduit from the signal cables on either side of the boat to
minimize the interference.
11.4 Shore power system
Shore cable connection with automatic circuit breaker and battery charger (230VAC / 12VDC)
for charging the starting and consumption batteries. The power connection is for 1-phase
110/220V 50/60Hz 16 amp supply and equipped with galvanic isolator to separate boat and
shore sides. While connected to shore power, it is possible to charge the batteries and
heat/cool the console.
23 (35)
11.5 Marking of cables
Cables are marked on both end for easy identification and maintenance.
11.6 Navigation lights
The boat is fitted with Consolite NVIS-compatible navigation lights (according to COLREG) and
a mast light.
11.7 Console and deck lights
The console, deck and console technical compartment have LED light. And the console switch
board has dimmable backlights. NVIS-compatible lights can be use.
11.8 Black-out switch
All lights, where possible, are equipped with a blackout switch. If this is not feasible, the light
will be provided with protection, such as from Hypalon. (Some manufacturers' devices may
have lights that cannot be bypassed or are not permitted to be bypassed.)
11.9 Search light
Handheld search lights will be provided. The console had a power output socket for the light.
11.10 Work lights
Powerful LED-lights on the console and aft mast/arch to illuminate the surroundings.
24 (35)
12. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
12.1 VHF radio and intercom
The boat is fitted with marine VHF radio and loudhailer (if necessary compatible with
customers intercom system (GFE)).
12.2 Tactical radios Installation
The radio compartment is located inside the console. The installation includes cabling and
installation of antennas. Actual radios and vehicle adapters to be supplied as Government
Furnished Equipment (GFE).
The grounding of the radios is integrated into the hull of the boat.
12.3 Antennas
A more detailed antenna specification requires a refined equipment list including GFE
equipment.
An EMC assessment will be conducted on the vessels before the final placement of the
antennas.
12.4 Antenna arch or mast
The boat has an antenna arch in front of the engines for navigation and communication
equipment. The arc includes also the flagpole. The arc is of robust design and dimensioned for
the specified operation conditions and loading.
25 (35)
The arch is hinged and can be lowered to deck level, with secure quick locks for easy
configuration of the boat for lifting and transportation purposes.
Optionally the arch can be replaced with a mast which is attached to the front of the engine
and is hinged forward in the same way.
26 (35)
13. NAVIGATION SYSTEM
13.1 Navigation System
The boat’s main navigation system is based on multifunction displays controlled by separate
control panels. The control panels are installed easy on reach so that there’s no need to bend
and reach towards the displays while driving. Every display is an independent unit and
connected to system sensors directly to ensure redundancy in case of display malfunction.
The system is integrated (but not limited) to;
• GPS antenna
• broad band navigation radar
• AIS
• forward looking sonar and water temperature sensor
• wind speed and air temperature sensor
• compass
27 (35)
14. LIFTING SYSTEM
14.1 4- point lifting
The boat is fitted with heavy duty 4-point lifting eyes and delivered with certified lifting sling set.
The equipment is dimensioned and intended for lifting the boat with delivered items and a full
fuel tank.
The lifting points are located well off the work deck area so that they don’t disturb operation on
open deck when they are not in use.
Sling lengths will be minimized allowing the operation in confined spaces, TBD with the
Customer.
15. PAINTS AND COLOUR
High quality, commercial paint system will be applied to all boat parts and structures. Paint
systems comply with environmental legislation.
Colour of the boat is black or grey. Small parts will be black, grey or mutually agreed colour.
Hull, deck and console To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
28 (35)
Collar To be defined with the customer (available Hypalon
fabrics)
Anti-slip hypalon for the collar To be defined with the customer (available Hypalon
fabrics)
Anti-slip area of the deck To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
Seats Black or grey.
Metal parts (visible from 50m To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
distance)
Boat cover(s) To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
16. PLATES AND TAGS
The boat has a permanently affixed builder's plate according to relevant ISO standard and
customer requirements. Also, robust and durable tags and tally plates are fitted in appropriate
places. Text, language, colours and positions and language to be mutually agreed with the
customer.
Switches, valves and hazards are marked with nameplates.
17. ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
17.1 ProBoatGear
Over the years Boomeranger has developed a range of tactical equipment required in Special
Operations Boats operations, which are not available on the market. This product range is, named
29 (35)
as the ProBoatGear™ product range. Several applications are presented below. Additionally,
equipment from trusted partners like REBS boarding equipment are available.
17.2 Boarding equipment
ProBoatGear™ Boarding pole
support on bimini arc and
console and
bow boarding pole man back
rest on console
Boarding pole support on aft
targa arc or mast
REBS 20 m Skypole system
(quoted on request)
30 (35)
Boarding pole transport straps
on collar
ProBoatGear™ Boarding pole
transport bracket for rails.
ProBoatGear™ Boarding pole
support bracket for rails.
31 (35)
17.3 Console weather protection
The boat is fitted with a removable canvas
weather protection that covers coxswain and
navigator and next row of seats behind them.
The cover has large transparent screen on
both sides and aft for good visibility. The cover
is supported by the bimini arch and separate
telescopic vertical aft and longitudinal poles.
The cover is designed to be erected/removed
within few minutes, and it comes with a bag
for stowing.
Alternatively, or additionally a weather protection cover like below can be provided (quoted on
request).
17.4 Storage solutions
Following ProBoatGear™ equipment are quoted on request.
Pelicases with ProBoatGear™
deck rail attachments.
32 (35)
ProBoatGear™ ammo and
storage boxes (small and
large).
ProBoatGear™ diving tank
rack.
ProBoatGear™ deck rail tie-
downs.
ProBoatGear™ dighny engine
rack.
33 (35)
17.5 Safety Equipment
Liferafts
Pneumatic line thrower
Jason’s cradle
17.6 Other equipment and accessories
The boat will be delivered with following equipment, tools and accessories:
i. Basic tool set
ii. Anchors and chain
iii. Mooring ropes
iv. Towing line with reel
v. Fenders
vi. Drift anchor
34 (35)
18. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
18.1 Road and slipway trailer
A road trailer capable of slipway launch is quoted separately on request.
18.2 Storage cover
The cover, made of lightweight, water-repellent Tempotest-material, is breathable and easily
fits onto the boat with two people. The cover has several adjustable tie-down straps to firmly
secure and adjust the cover over the boat and to prevent sagging. The cover has hatches for
storage maintenance access.
Separate console covers are also available (quoted on request).
35 (35)
END OF DOCUMENT
Marine Safety &
Security System
FOR MERCURY® SMARTCRAFT® ENGINES
Confidence
at hand
The 1st Mate Marine Safety and Security
System for Mercury® SmartCraft® Engines puts
confidence in the palm of your hand with man
overboard alerts, distress messaging and
theft-deterrent functionality. Utilizing wearable
fobs and your mobile device, 1st Mate combines
boat safety with convenience.
Man overboard monitoring
Theft Deterrent functionality
Distress Message capability
2
Man Overboard
Monitoring
1st Mate utilizes wearable fobs for boat captain
and up to seven passengers. These wearables
connect to a mobile device and ensure that if
Man Overboard
the captain falls overboard, the engines will
Monitoring
stop, an alarm will sound and alerts will be sent
via the 1st Mate mobile app.
1stSimilarly,
Mate utilizes wearable falls
if a passenger fobs overboard,
for boat captain
andthe
upcaptain
to seven passengers. These wearables
will be alerted and given the
connect to a mobile device and ensure that if
passenger’s GPS location via the app.
the captain falls overboard, the engine(s) will
stop, an alarm will sound and alerts will be sent
via the 1st Mate mobile app, thanks to direct
integration with the vessel’s propulsion system.
Similarly, if a passenger falls overboard,
the captain will be alerted and given the
passenger’s GPS location via the app.
4
How 1st Mate Works
If the CAPTAIN If a PASSENGER
wearing a fob wearing a fob
falls overboard: falls overboard:
• Engine(s) stop when fob is
submerged in water • Audible alarm from boat hub
and mobile device app
• Audible alarm from boat hub
and mobile device app
• Location marked via GPS on
• Location marked via GPS on app and vessel multifunction
app and vessel multifunction displays (if equipped)
displays (if equipped)
• Alerts sent to mobile app • Alerts sent to mobile app
and wearables of connected and wearables of connected
passenger(s) captain and other passenger(s)
• Instructions provided on mobile
• Directions provided on
app of connected passenger(s)
mobile app to location where
on how to return to location
passenger went overboard
where captain went overboard
6
Theft Deterrent
System (TDS)
TDS locks your engine(s) to prevent unauthorized use.
Once you’re ready to get back behind the wheel, your
engine(s) can easily be unlocked via the proximity of the
captain’s wearable or by using the 1st Mate mobile app.
Distress
Message
If a boat captain (driver wearing
the captain’s fob) falls overboard
and can’t get back onboard, or
passengers can’t return the boat
to the captain, 1st Mate will
send a distress message to your
emergency contact(s).
Distress message is sent after
a countdown timer expires or a
request for help is made. Message
includes location, heading, date and
time of the “man overboard” event.
8
1st Mate Marine Safety and Security
System for Mercury® SmartCraft®
Engines is compatible with Mercury
SmartCraft engines 40hp and higher.
Captain Passenger
Wearables Wearables Vessel Hub
Passenger Carabiner Clip
Captain Carabiner Clip
Passenger Wristband
Additional Features
Captain Wristband
Passenger Fob
Captain Fob
Harness
Disable in Neutral
Hub
A setting that users can configure that
turns off alerts if engine(s) is in neutral. Single Engine Kit
∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007933
TDS Functionality Dual Engine Kit
∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
High-idle operation for service access 8M6007934
to the vessel without unlocking it. If
Triple Engine Kit
compatible Mercury SmartCraft engines ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007937
are removed from a boat, they are
rendered nonfunctional without the 4, 5 or 6 Engine Kit
∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007938
unlocking “handshake” from the 1st
Mate hub. Captain
Wearable Fob Kit ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007943
Over the Air Updates
1st Mate is capable of updating (software
Passenger
updates or add new features) Hub Wearable Fob Kit ∙ ∙ ∙
software and wearables via mobile app. 8M6007944
Normal data rates apply, per individual mobile
service provider plan. Captain Wristband
& Carabiner Clip ∙ ∙
8M6007945
Mobile Device App Interface
App is the primary interface to set up/ Passenger Wristband
& Carabiner Clip ∙ ∙
configure and view status of the system.
8M6007946
10
For additional information
and engine compatibility visit 1stMate.net
1st Mate is not a replacement
for safety lanyards or personal flotation devices.
© 2020 Brunswick Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 90-8M0173779 5/2020
5.7L V10
350-
400HP
Verado ®
THE EVOLUTION OF PREMIUM PERFORMANCE
With the strength of the outboard segment’s first V10
naturally aspirated powerhead, 350 and 400hp Verado
outboards deliver extraordinary power and capabilities so you
can confidently explore beyond the horizon. Take command
of the water with innovative SmartCraft® technologies and
advanced digital controls that make boating effortless.
Exceptionally smooth, quiet and refined, V10 Verado
outboards transform your boating experience.
MORE INNOVATIONS AND OPTIONS
• High-displacement 5.7-liter powerhead makes tackling tough
conditions and moving heavy loads a breeze
• Performance-inspired quad-cam design propels boats ahead with
exceptional speed and acceleration
• Rugged, engine-specific gearcase optimizes handling and control
• Class-leading 150-amp alternator swiftly charges battery systems
to support onboard electronics
• Large-diameter Revolution X™ prop enhances steering authority,
efficiency and acceleration
LEARN MORE AT MERCURYMARINE.COM/V10
MERCURY VERADO:
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE
AND HANDLING
Agile, quiet and strong, Mercury V10 Verado® outboards shift
your expectations of what high-horsepower performance feels
like. They come to life with impressively responsive power,
propelling you forward with faster acceleration than any other
outboards in their class. Handling is effortless thanks to intuitive
Digital Throttle & Shift controls and an advanced steering system
that react instantly to your commands. It’s an unrivaled driving
experience that only Verado outboards can provide.
WEIGHT (IN POUNDS)
SENSATIONAL POWER IN V10 Verado
A COMPACT PACKAGE
These outboards were meticulously sculpted and refined
so they can mount as close as 26 inches apart, perfect for 350hp Competitor A
multi-engine configurations or repowering your favorite boat.
A durable aluminum engine block and weight-saving cowl
425hp Competitor B
materials further enhance performance by minimizing weight
on the transom.
200 400 600 800 1000
Weight comparison based on XL model outboards.
SMOOTH, QUIET, REFINED COMPETITOR A COMPETITOR B MERCURY V10 VERADO
Industry-leading technologies that minimize
noise, vibration and harshness ensure that 56% quieter than Competitor A
V10 Verado outboards deliver an unsurpassed
boating experience that delights the senses
without overpowering them. At idle, cruise and 45% quieter than
wide-open throttle, they’re quieter than all Competitor A
other outboards in their class.
Amplitude
EFFICIENT ALL-AROUND
PERFORMANCE
42% quieter
V10 Verado outboards are calibrated to than
Competitor B
deliver full performance on 87-octane 25% quieter than
Competitor B
fuel, with a host of efficiency-enhancing
features such as a hydrodynamic gearcase,
engine-specific Revolution X™ prop, closed-
600 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400
loop fuel system and Advanced Range
Engine RPM
Optimization (ARO) that optimize fuel
economy to extend your range on the water. Test conducted in Mercury Noise, Vibration, Harshness Technical Center.
INTUITIVE, INNOVATIVE FEATURES
The Adaptive Speed Control A class-leading 150-amp When needed, the idle charge
feature lets you maintain engine alternator swiftly charges onboard battery management system
rpm despite changes in load or batteries and intelligently supports works for you by monitoring
conditions. Climbing large swells the boat’s electrical system to battery voltage and adjusting
is easier. Cruising at low speeds is help ensure that no matter what engine rpm at idle to boost
smoother. Carving out tight turns amenities you bring on board, you’ll alternator output.
is effortless. You just point the always have the power you need.
bow toward your destination, and
Verado takes it from there.
JOYSTICK PILOTING ADVANCED SOUND
FOR OUTBOARDS CONTROL
(JPO)
Choose the sound that
Available for multi-engine moves you by toggling
boats, the JPO system between a whisper-quiet
provides fingertip control to exhaust tone or a throatier
move forward, sideways or growl at startup and idle.
even rotate in place for easy,
confident docking.
ADVANCED RUGGED GEARCASE
MIDSECTION (AMS)
An engine-specific
hydrodynamic gearcase
The rugged, refined AMS
optimizes efficiency, while
mounting system cradles
allowing the use of large-
the engine, minimizing
diameter props that enhance
vibration and providing
low-speed control and provide
comfort in a class all its own.
exceptional hole shots when
it’s time to move.
PREMIUM PERFORMANCE,
PREMIUM STYLING
Four sleek color options let you decide
what performance looks like. You can
further personalize your engine with
Color Accent Panels in five colors or a
customizable paint-ready option.
Pearl Fusion Cold Fusion Warm Fusion Phantom Black
LEGENDARY DURABILITY
Heavy-duty components built to tackle the toughest conditions. Advanced corrosion-
preventive finishes to withstand the rigors of saltwater. And the intelligent Mercury Engine
Guardian system, which monitors engine functions to help make sure you get home.
Verado outboards deliver performance you can trust.
EASY MAINTENANCE
• An electronic oil sensor notifies you of the oil level on a
connected multi-function display.
• Industry-exclusive top-cowl access door eliminates hassle,
allowing you to top off oil without removing the cowl.
• Color-coded touch points speed up routine checks to get
you underway faster.
HORSEPOWER 350 400
WOT RPM 5800-6400 5800-6400
Engine Type V10 V10
Displacement 5.7L (349 CID) 5.7L (349 CID)
Induction Naturally aspirated, performance-tuned intake manifold Naturally aspirated, performance-tuned intake manifold
Starting Electric start with SmartStart protection Electric start with SmartStart protection
Gear Ratio 2.08:1 2.08:1
Alternator 150 amp (1890 watt) 150 amp (1890 watt)
Trim System Power trim and tilt Power trim and tilt
Dry Weight* 695lbs (316kg) 695lbs (316kg)
Electro-hydraulic power steering Electro-hydraulic power steering
Steering
JPO (optional) JPO (optional)
20 in (508mm) 20 in (508mm)
25 in (635mm) 25 in (635mm)
Shaft Length
30 in (762mm) 30 in (762mm)
35 in (889mm) 35 in (889mm)
*Dry weight: Lightest-version model, excludes engine oil, rigging, hardware.
WARRANTY | Mercury Verado outboards come with a standard three-year limited warranty
and industry-leading three-year corrosion warranty.
©2024 MERCURY MARINE. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT PERMISSION IS PROHIBITED. MER-5804 3/24
ENGLISH
Owner’s Guide & Installation Instructions
Ultrasonic: Smart Sensor ™
WeatherStation Instrument ®
Land Models:
110WX
110WXS
120WXH
150WX
150WXRS
150WXS
200WX
220WXH
Marine Models:
120WX
120WXH
220WX
220WXH
Patent http://www.airmar.com/patent.html
Off-shore Model:
200WX-IPX7
Record the serial number found on the underside of the WeatherStation® Instrument.
Serial No._____________________Date of Purchase_________________________
D-17-461-01-rev.16 07/09/24
Copyright © 2008 - 2024 Airmar Technology Corp. All rights reserved.
All Rights Reserved. Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be
reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded, or stored in any storage
medium, for any purpose without prior written consent of Airmar. Airmar hereby grants
permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision of this manual onto
a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to print one copy of this
manual or any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual
or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that
any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly
prohibited.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Airmar reserves the right to
change or improve its products and to make changes in the content without obligation to
notify any person or organization of such changes. Visit the Airmar website at
www.airmar.com for current updates and supplemental information concerning the use and
operation of this and other Airmar products.
Table of Contents
Introduction & Features...................................................................4
Functions & Outputs........................................................................5
Safety Instructions...........................................................................6
Understanding Apparent & Theoretical Wind................................7
Adding External Sensors.................................................................7
Choosing Cables & Hardware.........................................................8
Where to Purchase Parts..................................................................9
Tools & Materials..........................................................................10
Choosing the Mounting Location..................................................11
Installing........................................................................................12
Cable Routing & Connecting Guidelines......................................15
Connecting to a Data Converter, Combiner, or Splitter................16
Connecting to an NMEA 0183 Display.........................................16
Connecting to an NMEA 2000® Network......................................19
Calibrating the Compass................................................................20
Operation........................................................................................21
Maintenance...................................................................................22
Software........................................................................................ 23
Troubleshooting.............................................................................24
Technical Information....................................................................25
Abbreviations, Acronyms, Glossary, Trademarks.........................26
IMPORTANT
Please read the Owner’s Guide completely
before proceeding.
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing Airmar’s ultrasonic, WeatherStation Instrument. This
exciting product has multiple sensors in a single unit—without any moving parts.
The compact housing is waterproof with a single removable cable. Functions and
features vary by model.
Features
• Waterproof housing and cable system
• Fast response time and update rate
• Stable and accurate theoretical wind and heading data in dynamic conditions
• Can be programed to compensate for an installation that is not aligned to the
front of a boat/vehicle and/or level
• Can be calibrated to compensate for magnetic deviation caused by ferrous
metals and other electro-magnetic fields
• GPS with WAAS and EGNOS
4
Table 1: Functions & Outputs
150WXRS
120WXH
220WXH
150WXS
110WXS
200WX-
120WX
150WX
200WX
220WX
110WX
IPX7
Apparent wind speed & angle
Theoretical wind speed &
direction
Heater
(Keeps wind channel free of ice)
Air temperature
Wind chill temperature
Barometric pressure
Relative humidity Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Dew point temperature Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Heat index temperature Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Rain intensitya
Rain accumulationa
Rain event durationa
Peak time of rain intensitya
3D Magnetic compass heading
2D Magnetic compass heading
Heading relative to true north
Rate of Turn
Angle of pitch and roll
Rate of pitch & roll
v v
Global Positioning System (GPS)
NMEA 0183: RS-232 Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
NMEA 0183: RS-422 Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
NMEA 2000® : CAN
Agriculture compatible: CAN Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
a. The rain sensor must be stationary to produce readings.
Key
When the Heater is ON, the Air Temperature and the Wind Chill Temperature functions
are OFF. When the Heater is turned OFF, the Air Temperature and the Wind Chill
Temperature functions resume automatically.
Opt. is an abbreviation for optional.
5
WARNING
Navigation Aid Only—The WeatherStation Instrument is
an aid to navigation only and should never be solely relied
upon. It is not a replacement for traditional navigation aids
and techniques. Only official government charts contain all
the information needed for safe navigation.
Follow the safety precautions below to reduce the risk of poor product
performance, property damage, personal injury, and/or death.
WARNING: Correct Installation Important
The WeatherStation Instrument must be installed and operated according to the
instructions in this owners guide.
WARNING: Installation Safety
Always wear safety glasses, a dust mask, and ear protection when installing.
WARNING: Do Not Install Near Artificial Magnetic Field
The WeatherStation Instrument must be a minimum of 1m (3') from ferrous metals
and anything that can create a magnetic field to prevent interference to the
magnetic compass.
WARNING: Compass-safe Distance
The WeatherStation Instrument must be a minimum of 0.3m (1') from other
standard and steering compasses.
WARNING: Electrical Safety
The power supply must be OFF before making electrical connections.
WARNING: Voltage
The power supply voltage must be that specified for the model.
• Heater models 24VDC only
• Land and off-shore models 9 - 40 VDC
• Marine models 9 - 24 VDC
WARNING: Fuse or Circuit Breaker
A safe installation requires a 0.5 amp fast-blow fuse or circuit breaker.
Heater models require a 3 amp fast-blow fuse or circuit breaker.
WARNING: Battery
Make power connections to a power source that is isolated from the engine start
battery(s). Voltage drops may cause the WeatherStation instrument to lose
information and/or change operating mode.
WARNING: Calibrating the Compass
The internal compass may need to be calibrated after the WeatherStation
Instrument is installed. Perform the pretest to determine if calibration is necessary.
WARNING: 150WX
These models incorporate a two-axis compass. Significant errors can occur in the
heading when a vehicle/boat is pitching and rolling. If there is an error in the
heading, there also will be a corresponding error in the theoretical wind direction.
Errors can be minimized or eliminated by using data from an external compass.
6
Understanding Apparent & Theoretical Wind
Virtually all mechanical and ultrasonic anemometers report apparent wind speed
and direction. The Airmar WX Series is unique because it calculates both
theoretical wind speed and direction relative to ground, and the apparent wind
speed and direction. These wind readings are the same if the unit is mounted in a
fixed location. However, if the WX Series is mounted on a moving vehicle/boat,
the apparent wind is the wind you would feel on your hand if you held it out the
window of a moving car. Since the WX Series has a built in GPS and compass, it
calculates the theoretical wind based upon the apparent wind, speed of the
vehicle, and compass heading.
Adding External Sensors
The WeatherStation Instrument can receive data from an external sensor(s). If
provided, this data will be used in the theoretical wind-speed calculations.
The following NMEA 0183 sentences can be used to provide heading data:
• $HCHDT—Heading is used for wind calculations.
• $HCHDG—Heading is used for wind calculations.
When these are seen as input, the output of these sentences is stopped.
Water-speed values can be transmitted to the WeatherStation Instrument. This
will modify the theoretical wind speed calculation to provide wind speed relative to
water, instead of wind speed relative to ground.
• NMEA 0183—VHW is used for wind speed relative to water calculation.
• NMEA 2000—PGN 128259 (water speed) is used for wind speed relative to
water calculations.
The WeatherStation Instrument will automatically detect whether a sensor(s) is
internal, external, or not available at all.
• NMEA 0183—Simply connect the external sensor(s) to a Combiner or other
NMEA 0183 repeater hardware.
• NMEA 2000—Connect the external sensor(s) to the NMEA 2000 network.
NOTE: When an external speed sensor is connected to both an NMEA 0183
device and an NMEA 2000 network, the WeatherStation Instrument will use
NMEA 2000 data.
Speed-through-water Sensor—An external speed sensor can be installed, such
as an Airmar Smart™ Sensor. Airmar recommends installing the DST800 to
receive water depth, boat speed, and water temperature data.
7
Choosing Cables & Hardware
The WeatherStation Instrument can be connected to a device and/or network in
several ways. You must have the correct cable(s) and any needed
converting/connecting hardware before beginning the installation.
WeatherStation Cables (NO heater) Length Part No.
• NMEA 0183 cable 10m 33-862-02
• NMEA 2000 cable 6m 33-1029-02
• NMEA 2000 cable 10m 33-1104-01
NOTE: Additional cable lengths are available.
Connecting/Converting Hardware (NO heater) Length Part No.
• Data Converter: NMEA 0183 to USB 33-801-01
• Combiner: NMEA 0183 to USB NDC-4-AIR
• U200 Gateway: NMEA 2000 CAN to USB 33-727-01
• Splitter: NMEA 0183 & NMEA 2000 15m 33-632-01
• Splitter: NMEA 0183 & NMEA 2000 30m 33-632-02
Heater Models: Cables & Connecting Hardware
The power to the heater is greatly affected by the total length of the cable run. If
the WeatherStation Instrument will be connected to an NMEA 0183 display or a
PC and the total length of the cable run will be greater than 20m, additional steps
must be taken. To ensure there will be enough power for the heater to function
properly, the table below specifies the materials needed for each installation.
Device & Junction Cable: J-box Cable: Cable:14AW
WeatherStation Data
Total length to NMEA J-box to Data G J-box to
Cable Converter Box
of cable run display Converter power supply
NMEA display 33-1167-XX — — — — —
< 20m
06-228
NMEA display 33-1167-01 9 Length as
— terminals Length as —
>20m required
required
PC < 20m 33-1282-XX 33-1081-01 — — — —
33-862-XX
9 Length as
PC > 20m 33-1167-01 33-801-01 terminals — Length as required
required
Length Part No.
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422) 10m 33-1282-01
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422) 20m 33-1282-02
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422, no connector) 10m 33-1167-01
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422, no connector) 20m 33-1167-02
• Data Converter: NMEA 0183 to USB (RS-422 < 20m cable run) 33-1081-01
• Data Converter: NMEA 0183 to USB (RS-422 > 20 m cable run) 33-801-01
• Combiner: NMEA 0183 to USB NDC-4-AIR
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 Sold by the meter 06-228
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 1m 33-862-06
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 10m 33-862-02
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 15m 33-862-01
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 25m 33-862-03
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 35m 33-862-04
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 45m 33-862-05
8
Mounts
CAUTION: Vehicles/boats traveling above 30MPH—Do not use the plastic
Cable Side-exit Adapter (part D) supplied. Purchase a stainless steel part. At high
speeds, the plastic adapter may break, causing the WeatherStation Instrument to
fall off.
CAUTION: 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS—Do not use a ratchet mount.
Lowering the WeatherStation Instrument may damage the solar-radiation shield.
NOTE: The WeatherStation nut has standard 1"-14 UNS or 3/4" NPT threads.
Antenna mount with standard marine 1" -14 threads and pass-through for cable
(Figure 1)
Hardware to install antenna mount
Extension tube (some installations)
deck mount deck mount ratchet mount
center pass-through side pass-through with extension tube
extension
with cable
pass-through
cable cable
passes pass-
through through
center
of mount
Figure 1. Antenna mounts (not supplied)
Copyright © 2007 Airmar Technology Corp.
Parts
Humidity Sensor: 110WX, 150WX, 200WX 33-627-01
Humidity Sensor: 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS 33-760-01
Where to Purchase Parts
Obtain parts from your instrument manufacturer or marine dealer.
Gemeco USA
Tel: 803-693-0777
email:
[email protected]
Airmar EMEA Europe, Middle East, Africa
Tel: +33.(0)2.23.52.06.48
email:
[email protected]
9
Tools & Materials
Safety glasses
Dust mask
Ear protection
Pencil
Level
Electric drill
Drill bits
Phillips screwdrivers
Teflon pipe-thread tape (optional)
Deck gland (some installations)
Grommets (some installations)
Cutting pliers (some installations)
Wire strippers (some installations)
Heat-shrink tubing (some installations)
Heat gun (some installations)
Multimeter (some installations)
Cable ties (some installations)
10
Choosing the Mounting Location
For accurate readings and a reliable GPS signal, selecting the best location for
the WeatherStation Instrument is very important. Easy access and appearance
should be secondary considerations. Since each installation is unique, the best
separation distances will vary depending on the surroundings and the particular
equipment and how it is configured. Choose a location that balances the
requirements below:
• The WeatherStation Instrument must be mounted in “clear air”, away from
obstructions in any direction that will interfere with air flowing through the unit. If
there is an obstruction, be sure to mount the WeatherStation Instrument at least
2m (6') away. On land, avoid obstructions such as roofs, chimneys, trees, etc.
• If possible, mount the WeatherStation Instrument higher than any other object.
Mount it a minimum of 500mm (20") above the surrounding surfaces.
NOTE: The higher the WeatherStation Instrument is mounted, the less accurate
the pitch and roll readings will be.
• To prevent interference to the internal magnetic compass:
- Mount a minimum of 0.3m (1') from other standard and steering compasses.
- Mount a minimum of 1m (3') from any structures or equipment that contains
ferrous metals.
- Mount a minimum of 1m (3') from anything that may create a magnetic field
such as magnetized materials, electric motors, electronic equipment,
engines, generators, power/ignition cables, and batteries. For distances,
follow the respective manufacturer’s recommendations.
• To prevent interference to the internal GPS (Figure 2):
- It must have a clear view of the sky to receive satellite signals. A 120° view is
optimal. Check for any obstructions such as other boats or buildings.
- Mount it as far as possible from high-powered transmitting antennas to avoid
mutual interference.
- Mount it lower than any Inmarsat communications antenna.
- Mount above or below any radar beam. Do not mount within a radar beam.
WeatherStation
Min.
Min. 2m 1.5m
Min. 2m
metal surface
antenna insulator
Figure 2. Antennas
11
12
Installing (Figure 3)
CAUTION: The reflector plate and the waterproof film found in the wind channel of
the WeatherStation Instrument are essential to its operation. Be careful not to
scratch the plate, puncture the film, or damage them in any way.
CAUTION: The WeatherStation Instrument must be installed upright and vertical,
not tilted to one side. It must be level and plumb. If the WeatherStation Instrument
is tilted from the horizontal plane, it may introduce errors in the compass and wind
readings.
CAUTION: To accurately measure the wind direction and heading, the alignment
notch on the WeatherStation Instrument must be pointed correctly.
• Moving vehicle/boat—The alignment notch must point forward and be
parallel to the centerline of the vehicle/boat.
• Stationary surface—It is recommended that the alignment notch point toward
true north.
CAUTION: Tighten or align the WeatherStation Instrument by grasping the lower
housing below the reflector plate. Hand tighten only.
• Do not rotate the cap. Turning it may sever internal connections and void the
warranty.
• 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS—Do not grasp the solar-radiation shield. The
louvers may break.
CAUTION: If you use a thread lock, use Teflon pipe-thread tape. Do not use a
liquid thread lock as it may weaken the plastic, causing it to swell and crack.
side view bottom view
humidity sensor
cap
heater
waterproof film
wind channel
(where air travels
through the unit)
reflector plate
(heated)
lower housing
alignment
notch
Figure 3. WeatherStation Instrument with heater (120/220WXH shown)
Copyright © 2008 - 2018 Airmar Technology Corp.
13
Permanent Mounting
1. Place the mounting hardware at the selected location. Orient any cable exit in the
direction that you want the cable to travel (Figure 4).
2. Position the mounting hardware at a 90° angle to the mounting surface. If
necessary, use shims to make the mounting surface level.
3. Mark the holes for the mounting screws. If the cable will pass through the
center of the mount, also mark that hole.
NOTE: If you are using a ratchet mount, be sure you have purchased an
extension with a cable pass-through. Do not use a ratchet mount with the
110WXS, 150WXRS or 150WXS that has a solar-radiation shield.
4. Drill the holes for the mounting screws and the cable exit if necessary. If the
cable is to be fed through a deck, install a high quality deck gland.
5. Using purchased screws, fasten the mount in place.
6. Screw an extension tube onto the antenna mount if desired.
lower housing
alignment
notch
nut assembly
extension tube
(most installations)
cable exit
(some installations)
antenna mount
(some installations)
Figure 4. Installation (150WX shown)
Copyright © 2007 - 2018 Airmar Technology Corp.
14
Attaching the Cable to the WeatherStation Instrument
1. With the nut assembly on the cable near the WeatherStation connector, thread
the cable through the extension tube (if used), antenna mount, and the cable
exit. Be sure to leave several inches of cable extending beyond the nut assembly
(Figure 5).
2. Screw the nut assembly onto the top of the antenna mount /extension tube.
Hand tighten only. Do not over-tighten.
NOTE: If you use a thread lock, use teflon pipe thread tape only.
3. Remove the protective cover from the connector. (Save the cap to protect the
connector, when the WeatherStation Instrument is removed.) Plug the
connector into the WeatherStation Instrument. The alignment key on the
connector fits into a notch in the base of the WeatherStation Instrument.
4. To accurately measure the wind direction, be sure to orient the alignment notch
correctly. Grasp the lower housing of the WeatherStation Instrument below the
reflector plate and hold it in the proper position (Figure 3).
• Moving vehicle/boat—The alignment notch must point forward and be
parallel to the centerline of the vehicle/boat.
• Stationary—It is recommended that the alignment notch point toward true
north.
5. Slide the captive nut upward and screw it onto the lower housing of the
WeatherStation Instrument (Figures 4 and 5). Hand tighten only. Do not over-
tighten. Be careful not to rotate the WeatherStation Instrument, changing the
alignment or loosen the nut assembly from the antenna mount/extension tube.
WeatherStation
connector
alignment
key
captive
nut
nut assembly
antenna mount
or extension tube
Figure 5. Attaching the cable to the WeatherStation Instrument
Copyright © 2007 - 2011 Airmar Technology Corp.
15
Cable Routing & Connecting
Depending on the equipment you will be using, route the WeatherStation cable to
a Converter, Combiner, Splitter, an NMEA 0183 display, or an NMEA 2000
network. After reading the cautions below, go to the appropriate instructions.
CAUTION: Do not remove the waterproof connector(s) to ease cable routing.
Buy a cable without a connector. Instructions for wiring are supplied.
CAUTION: To reduce electrical interference from other electrical wiring and any
on-board equipment with strong magnetic fields such as: radar equipment, radio
transmitters, engines, generators, etc., separate the cables by at least 1 m (3').
Ensure that all the cable shields are appropriately grounded.
CAUTION: Be careful not to tear the cable jackets when passing them through
compartments, bulkheads, or walls. Use grommets to prevent chaffing.
CAUTION: Use a multimeter to check the polarity and the connections to the
power supply before applying power to the WeatherStation Instrument.
CAUTION: Coil any excess cable(s) and secure it with cable ties to prevent
damage.
CAUTION: Heater model with cable run greater than 20m (60')—The power to
the heater is affected by the total length of the cable run. If the cable run is greater
than 20m (60'), additional hardware is needed to ensure that enough power will
reach the heater to function properly.
• PC—Connect through a Data Converter or Combiner. Follow the instructions
that are supplied with the hardware.
• NMEA 0183 display—Follow the instruction, “Connecting to an NMEA 0183
Display.”
16
Connecting to a Data Converter, Combiner, or Splitter
IMPORTANT: To connect to a PC it is necessary to install a Data Converter or
Combiner. Follow the installation instructions that are supplied with the unit.
Connecting to an NMEA 0183 Display
Cable Routing
Route the WeatherStation cable to the display. Do not fasten the cable in place at
this time.
Heater model with cable run greater than 20m (60')—Route the WeatherStation
cable to a junction box (Figure 6). Route a separate cable from the junction box to
the NMEA display. Route red and black 14AWG wires from the junction box to a
24VDC power supply. Do not fasten the cables and wires in place at this time.
red wire
junction box (14AWG)
1 1
power
2 2
supply
WeatherStation 3 3 (24VDC)
Instrument 4 4 black wire
5 5 (14AWG)
6 6
7 7
06-228
NMEA 0183
8 8
display
9 9
33-1167-01
[10 m (30')]
Figure 6. Wiring the junction box (not to scale)
Copyright © 2016 Airmar Technology Corp.
Wire the junction box using the wiring diagram below (Figure 7) To prepare the
cables, follow “Preparing the Wires”.
Figure 7. Heater models with a cable run greater than 20m (60')
Copyright © 2016 Airmar Technology Corp.
17
Connector on Display End
If the WeatherStation cable has a connector on the display end, and it can be
plugged into the port on the NMEA 0183 display; do so now. Coil any excess
cable and secure it with cable ties to prevent damage. Fasten the cable in place.
No Connector on Display End: Wiring
CAUTION: The WeatherStation Instrument has either an RS-422 or RS-232
standard. Follow the wiring diagram that matches the WeatherStation Instrument.
If it is wired for the wrong standard, it will not transmit and receive data properly.
CAUTION: The display power may be wired directly to the WeatherStation cable,
or it may be wired separately.
Heater models MUST be wired separately.
CAUTION: Heater models—It is recommended to use the same 24VDC power
supply for both the WeatherStation Instrument and the heater. If using separate
power sources, ensure that the supply grounds are common.
Preparing the Wires
NOTE: If the display does not have NMEA 0183 output connections, the yellow
and orange wires are not needed. Apply heat-shrink tubing to each unused wire.
Alternatively, the yellow and orange wires can be connected to an external sensor.
1. Allowing an extra 25 cm (10") for wiring ease, cut the cable to length.
2. Strip 60mm (2-1/2") of the outer jacket and foil shielding from the cut end of the
cable (Figure 8 or 9).
3. Strip 10 mm (3/8") of conductor insulation from the end of each colored wire.
4. Protect the cable’s foil shielding from causing a short by using heat-shrink tubing
around the jacket where the wires emerge from the cable. The tubing must
overlap the wires a minimum of 6mm (1/4"). Shrink the tubing using a heat gun.
5. Being sure the power supply is OFF, connect the wires to the display.
6. Fasten the cable in place.
7. The installation is complete. To begin receiving data, refer to the owner’s
manual that came with the display.
18
Connecting
Refer to the appropriate wiring diagram and the owner’s manual that came with
the display to connect the colored wires.
NO heater—(Figure 8).
Heater models—(Figure 9)
locator
10
WeatherStation
connector optional or optional
RS422 RS232
V+ V+
V- V-
A / + OUT TX OUT
x BARE
A/+ IN RX IN
B/- IN NO CONNECTION
B/- OUT NO CONNECTION
10 SHIELD SHIELD
Figure 8. NMEA 0183 WeatherStation Cable—no heater
Copyright © 2007 - 2014 Airmar Technology Corp.
locator
10
WeatherStation
connector optional or optional
RS422 RS232
V+ V+ V+
V- V- V-
A /+ OUT A /+ OUT TX OUT
B /- OUT B /- OUT No Connection
HEATER V + HEATERV + (24 VDC) HEATERV + (24 VDC)
HEATER V - (GND) HEATER V - (GND)
A / + IN A / + IN RX IN
B /- IN B /- IN No Connection
HEATER V - GREY
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
Figure 9. NMEA 0183 WeatherStation Cable—for heater models
Copyright © 2011 - 2019 Airmar Technology Corp.
19
Connecting to an NMEA 2000® Network
CAUTION: Models with a heater cannot be used with an NMEA 2000 network.
CAUTION: Only two termination resistors are required on an NMEA 2000
network. More than two will degrade the bus performance.
Route the WeatherStation cable to the NMEA 2000 network. Plug the NMEA 2000
connector into the network node (Figure 10). Coil any excess cable and secure
with cable ties to prevent damage.
locator
10
WeatherStation NMEA 2000
connector network
connector
10
Figure 10. NMEA 2000 WeatherStation Cable [6m (20') shown]
Copyright © 2008 - 2011 Airmar Technology Corp.
NOTE: WeatherStation cables greater than 6m (20') have a termination resistor
built into the WeatherStation connector (Figure 11).
termination resistor in connector
locator
10
120Ω
WeatherStation NMEA 2000
connector network
connector
10
Figure 11. NMEA 2000 WeatherStation Cable [10 m (33') shown]
Copyright © 2009 - 2011 Airmar Technology Corp.
20
Calibrating the Compass
WARNING: The internal compass may need to be calibrated after the
WeatherStation Instrument is installed for maximum accuracy. Perform the pretest
below to determine if calibration is necessary.
CAUTION: Boat—The Pretest and AutoCalibration Procedure must be done in
calm seas in a 0.8 km (0.5 mile) open area away from other boats and ferrous
objects such as structures and aids to navigation. Avoid congested areas and
waters with strong currents as calibration will be difficult and possibly hazardous.
Pretest
Go to an appropriate site.
• Vehicle—Drive to an open parking lot or field, away from other vehicles and
ferrous objects.
• Boat—In calm seas, navigate to an open area of water, 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of
open space away from other boats and ferrous objects.
While making a full circle, compare the WeatherStation heading data to another
compass. Check all headings. If the data agrees, there is no magnetic influence
on the WeatherStation Instrument. The compass does NOT need to be calibrated.
If the data does not agree, continue with the calibration instructions below.
How to Calibrate
Calibration can be done in one of two ways.
• Calibrate the compass using the WeatherCaster™ software and a PC.
• Follow the AutoCalibration Procedure below.
AutoCalibration Procedure
IMPORTANT: Calibration requires the vehicle/boat to complete 2 to 3 circles.
IMPORTANT: In the event of a calibration failure, repeat the procedure.
1. At the site where the pretest was performed, select the display page on the
NMEA Instrument that shows Heading.
2. Shut OFF and then turn ON the DC power that is connected to the
WeatherStation Instrument.
3. Within 2 minutes of cycling power to the WeatherStation Instrument, start the
vehicle/boat in a slow [4.5 to 7 MPH (4 to 6 knots)] circular turn that takes about
2 to 3 minutes to complete.*
If the vehicle/boat completes 1.5 circles within 3 to 4.5 minutes, AutoCalibration
will begin. Heading will stop being reported on any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000
display until the calibration is finished.
4. Keep turning in the same circle for 1 to 2 more complete circles.
Do not change the speed or rate of turn through the circle.
5. When calibration is completed successfully, Heading will return to the display.
If calibration fails, the display will flash Heading ON and OFF in 10 second
intervals for 60 seconds. (Display times may vary by manufacturer.)
* The optimum rate of turn is 180°/ minute: 3°/second, 30°/10 seconds, 45°/15 seconds,
and 90°/30 seconds.
21
Operation
Heater: 120WXH, 220WXH
NOTE: When the Heater is ON, the Air Temperature and the Wind Chill
Temperature functions are OFF. When the Heater is OFF, the Air Temperature and
the Wind Chill Temperature functions resume automatically.
The heater can operate in three different modes.
• OFF—The heater is always off.
• Automatic—The heater switches ON when the housing temperature falls
below 1°C. It switches OFF when the housing reaches >5°C.
NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted between 2°C and 20°C.
• User Control—This mode can be accessed by serial command or a physical
switch on the power supply.
Rain Sensor: 150WXRS
The WeatherStation Instrument must be stationary to make accurate rain
readings.
22
Maintenance
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the WeatherStation Instrument. There are no
user-serviceable parts inside. Removing the three screws holding the lower
housing will damage the waterproof seal, voiding the warranty.
CAUTION: Do not immerse in water or pressure wash. Doing so may allow water
to infiltrate the WeatherStation Instrument, voiding the warranty.
CAUTION: The reflector plate and the waterproof film found in the wind channel of
the WeatherStation Instrument are essential to its operation. The waterproof film
protects the transducers, so be careful to keep it intact. Do not to scratch the
reflector plate or damage it in any way.
CAUTION: Keep the wind channel and any louvers or rain sensor free of spider
webs, insects, dirt, and other debris.
Cleaning
Since the WeatherStation Instrument has no moving parts, it requires minimal
maintenance. Clean the exterior with a damp cloth and mild household detergent.
Gently thread an alcohol wipe through the wind channel and under any rain sensor to
remove spider webs and any debris (Figure 12).
110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS—Gently clean under the louvers with a duster.
rain sensor
umbrella
waterproof film
wind channel
reflector plate
lower housing
solar-radiation shield
(7 louvers)
screw (3)
temperature sensor
serial number
Figure 12. Maintenance (150WXRS shown)
Copyright © 2008 - 2019 Airmar Technology Corp.
23
Software
Revisions
Airmar may release updated versions of both the WeatherStation firmware and the
WeatherCaster™ software. Periodically check Airmar’s website at www.airmar.com
to down-load the latest revision.
Installing WeatherCaster™ Software
Follow the instructions in the WeatherCaster Software Guide.
24
Troubleshooting
No Readings or Inaccurate Readings
• Is there power to the WeatherStation Instrument?
• Are all the connections tight?
• Is the cable-run free of kinks or damage?
• Is the wiring correct?
• Are there any obstructions in the wind channel, solar-radiation shield, or rain sensor?
Keep it free of spider webs, insects, dirt, and other debris.
Be careful not to puncture the waterproof film or scratch the reflector plate.
• Are the temperature and humidity sensors clean?
• Is there ice on the WeatherStation Instrument?
No GPS Fix
• Does the WeatherStation Instrument have a clear view of the sky?
Wind Readings Are Too Low on Moving Platform
• Is the WeatherStation Instrument mounted forward and low on the boat/vehicle’s
hardtop in dead air?
Move the WeatherStation Instrument farther back and higher (Figure 13).
Figure 13. Boat/vehicle mounting location (boat shown)
Copyright © 2007 Airmar Technology Corp .
Heater Not Working
• Is there 24VDC supply voltage to the heater?
NOTE: The heater does not cycle ON until the air temperature reaches 1°C.
Rain Readings Inaccurate
• Is the sensor stationary?
Humidity Readings are Inaccurate: 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS
• Are there any obstructions in the solar-radiation shield?
Keep the louvers free of spider webs, insects, dirt, and other debris.
25
Technical Information
Additional Data Available from the WeatherStation Instrument
There are parameters that the WeatherStation Instrument can make available to
the user. Usually, more data is available from the WeatherStation Instrument than
can be displayed in a reasonable format on a screen. Also, if all the data was
continuously transmitted to the display, the update rate would be too slow and
could not keep up with WeatherStation measurements. Consequently, some
parameters are transmitted while others are not, based on a preselected list. Note
that those parameters not transmitted are, nevertheless, retained in the
WeatherStation Instrument. For more detailed information, visit www.airmar.com
and go to Installation Instructions and Owner’s Guides > WeatherStation
Instruments > Technical Manual or see the “Technical Manual” on the
WeatherCaster CD.
NMEA 2000: Load Equivalency Number
LEN is the amount of current a devise draws from an NMEA 2000 network.
(1 LEN = 50 mA)
NMEA 2000 Load Equivalency Number (LEN)
120WX.................... 2
220WX.................... 4
Specifications
Product specifications are measured under laboratory conditions. The installation
and surrounding environment can impact the product’s performance. Airmar
recommends that best installation practices as defined by the World
Meteorological Organization (WMO) are followed in your installation.
26
Abbreviations & Acronyms
CD Compact Disk
CAN Controller Area Network
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
GPS Global Positioning System
LEN Load Equivalency Number
NPT National Pipe Thread
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association
Opt. Optional
PC Personal Computer
UNS Unified National Standard
USB Universal Serial Bus
VDC Volts of Direct Current
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
Glossary
Firmware The software within the WeatherStation hardware
WeatherCaster™ software The PC application program
Trademarks
Airmar® is a registered trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
NMEA 2000® is a registered trademark of the National Marine Electronics Assoc.
Smart™ Sensor is a trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
WeatherCaster™ is a trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
WeatherStation® is a trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
27
35 Meadowbrook Drive, Milford, New Hampshire 03055-4613, USA
www.airmar.com
28
NAIS-500 Class B
AIS Transceiver
NAIS-500 unit User Manual
ENGLISH
www.bandg.com | www.simrad-yachting.com | www.lowrance.com
Preface
As Navico is continuously improving this product, we retain the
right to make changes to the product at any time which may not be
reflected in this version of the manual. Please contact your nearest
distributor if you require any further assistance.
It is the owner’s sole responsibility to install and use the NAIS-500
AIS Class B Transceiver in a manner that will not cause accidents,
personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is
solely responsible for observing safe boating practices.
NAVICO HOLDING AS AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, BRANCHES AND AF-
FILIATES DISCLAIM ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT
IN A WAY THAT MAY CAUSE ACCIDENTS, DAMAGE OR THAT MAY
VIOLATE THE LAW.
Governing Language: This statement, any instruction manuals, user
guides and other information relating to the product (Documenta-
tion) may be translated to, or has been translated from, another
language (Translation). In the event of any conflict between any
Translation of the Documentation, the English language version will
be the official version of the Documentation.
This manual represents the product as at the time of printing.
Navico Holding AS and its subsidiaries, branches and affiliates re-
serve the right to make changes to specifications without notice.
Copyright
Copyright © 2017 Navico Holding AS.
Warranty
The warranty card is supplied as a separate document.
About this manual
Important text that requires special attention from the reader is
emphasized as follows:
¼¼ Note: Used to draw the reader’s attention to a comment or some
important information.
Warning: Used when it is necessary to warn personnel that
they should proceed carefully to prevent risk of injury and/or
damage to equipment/personnel.
Preface | NAIS-500 User Manual |1
Contents
1 Preface
4 Notices
4 Safety warnings
4 General notices
8 About your AIS class B transceiver
8 About AIS
9 Static and dynamic vessel data
9 Important information for US customers
10 What’s in the box?
13 Installation
13 Preparing for installation
15 Installation procedures
23 Configuring your AIS transceiver
23 Switching on your AIS transceiver for the first time
23 Configuring your AIS transceiver
24 Introduction to NAIS System Configurator
26 Operation
26 Using the AIS transceiver
26 Switch functions
26 Using NAIS System Configurator with your AIS transceiver
27 Indicator functions
28 Troubleshooting
29 Specifications
2| Contents | NAIS-500 User Manual
Table of figures
10 Figure 1 Items included with the product
11 Figure 2 AIS transceiver overview
12 Figure 3 Electrical connections to the AIS transceiver
13 Figure 4 Typical installation configuration
16 Figure 5 AIS transceiver dimensions
16 Figure 6 AIS transceiver mounting
17 Figure 7 GPS antenna mounting
17 Figure 8 Position of the GPS antenna connector
18 Figure 9 Position of the VHF antenna connector
20 Figure 10 Connecting an external switch
21 Figure 11 Connecting to the NMEA 0183 data port
22 Figure 12 Connecting the power supply
27 Figure 13 Indicator location on the AIS transceiver unit
Contents | NAIS-500 User Manual |3
1
Notices
When reading this manual, please pay particular attention to warn-
ings marked with the warning triangle. These are important mes-
sages for safety, installation and usage of the product.
Safety warnings
Warning: This equipment must be installed in accordance
with the instructions provided in this manual.
Warning: This AIS transceiver is an aid to navigation and
must not be relied upon to provide accurate navigation informa-
tion. AIS is not a replacement for vigilant human lookouts and
other navigation aids such as RADAR. Also, take note that not all
vessels will have an AIS transceiver turned on, or installed. The
performance of the transceiver may be seriously impaired if not
installed as instructed in the user manual, or due to other factors
such as weather and or nearby transmitting devices. Compatibil-
ity with other systems may vary and is reliant on the third party
systems recognizing the standard outputs from the transceiver.
The manufacturer reserves the right to update and change these
specifications at any time and without notice.
Warning: Do not install this equipment in a flammable
atmosphere such as in an engine room or near to fuel tanks.
General notices
Position source
All marine Automatic Identification System (AIS) transceivers utilize a
satellite-based location system such as the Global Positioning Satel-
lite (GPS) network. The accuracy of a GPS position fix is variable and
is affected by factors such as the antenna positioning, the number
of satellites used to determine the position and for how long satel-
lite information has been received.
Compass safe distance
The compass safe distance of this unit is 0.55 m or greater for 0.3°
deviation.
4| Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual
RF emissions notice
¼¼ Note: The AIS transceiver generates and radiates radio frequency elec-
tromagnetic energy. This equipment must be installed and operated
according to the instructions contained in this manual. Failure to do so
can result in malfunctioning of the receiver or personal injury.
¼¼ Note: Never operate the AIS transceiver unless it is connected to a
VHF antenna.
To maximize performance and minimize human exposure to radio
frequency electromagnetic energy you must make sure that the an-
tenna is mounted at least 1.5 meters away from the AIS transceiver
and is connected to the AIS transceiver before power is applied.
The system has a Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) radius of
0.6 m. This has been determined assuming the maximum power of
the AIS transceiver and using antennas with a maximum gain of 3 db.
The antenna should be mounted 3.5 m above the deck in order to
meet RF exposure requirements. Higher gain antennas will require a
greater MPE radius. Do not operate the unit when anyone is within
the MPE radius of the antenna (unless they are shielded from the an-
tenna field by a grounded metallic barrier). The antenna should not
be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other transmit-
ting antenna. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
Warranty
This product is supplied with standard warranty as defined in the
accompanying warranty information.
Warning: Any attempt to tamper with or damage the
product will invalidate the warranty.
Disposal of this product and packaging
Please dispose of the AIS transceiver in accordance with the
European WEEE Directive or with the applicable local regulations for
disposal of electrical equipment.
Every effort has been made to ensure the packaging for this product
is recyclable. Please dispose of the packaging in an environmentally
friendly manner.
Accuracy of this manual
The AIS transceiver may be upgraded from time to time and future
versions of the AIS transceiver may therefore not correspond exactly
Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual |5
with this manual. Information contained in this manual is liable to
change without notice. The manufacturer of this product disclaims
any liability for consequences arising from omissions or inaccura-
cies in this manual and any other documentation provided with this
product.
Declaration of conformity
The manufacturer of this product declares that this product is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other provisions of
the 2014/53/EU Directive. The declaration of conformity is provided
with the product document pack. The product carries the CE mark,
notified body number and alert symbol as required by the 2014/53/
EU Directive. The product is intended for sale in the countries listed
under Specifications.
FCC notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the lim-
its for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. This device complies
with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Warning: It is a violation of the rules of the Federal Communi-
cations Commission to input an MMSI that has not been properly
assigned to the end user, or to otherwise input any inaccurate
data in this device.
6| Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual
Industry Canada notice
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le Fonctionne-
ment.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual |7
2
About your AIS class B transceiver
About AIS
The marine Automatic Identification System (AIS) is a location and
vessel information reporting system. It allows vessels equipped with
AIS to automatically and dynamically share and regularly update
their position, speed, course and other information such as vessel
identity with similarly equipped vessels. Position is derived from the
Global Positioning System (GPS) and communication between ves-
sels is by Very High Frequency (VHF) digital transmissions.
There are a number of types of AIS device as follows:
• Class A transceivers. These are similar to class B transceivers, but
they are designed to be fitted on large vessels such as cargo ships
and large passenger vessels. Class A transceivers transmit at a higher
VHF signal power than class B transceivers and therefore can be
received by more distant vessels, and also transmit more frequently.
Class A transceivers are mandatory on all vessels over 300 gross
tonnes on international voyages and certain types of passenger ves-
sels under the SOLAS regulations.
• Class B transceivers. Similar to class A transceivers in many ways,
but are normally lower cost due to the less stringent performance
requirements. Class B transceivers transmit at a lower power and at a
lower reporting rate than class A transceivers.
• AIS base stations. AIS base stations are used by Vessel Traffic Sys-
tems to monitor and control the transmissions of AIS transceivers.
• Aids to Navigation (AtoN) transceivers. AtoNs are transceivers
mounted on buoys or other hazards to shipping which transmit
details of their location to the surrounding vessels.
• AIS receivers. AIS receivers will generally receive transmissions
from class ANAIS-500
transceivers,
unit
class B transceivers, AtoNs and AIS base sta-
tions but do not transmit any information about the vessel on which
they are installed.
• This NAIS-500 product is an AIS Class B transceiver.
NAIS-500
8| About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
Static and dynamic vessel data
There are two categories of information transmitted by an AIS trans-
ceiver: static and dynamic data.
The vessel’s dynamic data, which includes location, speed over
ground (SOG) and course over ground (COG), is calculated auto-
matically using the installed AIS antenna.
Static data is information about the vessel which must be pro-
grammed into the AIS transceiver. This includes:
• Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI)
• Vessel name
• Vessel call sign (if available)
• Vessel type
• Vessel dimensions
In most countries the operation of an AIS transceiver is included
under the vessel’s marine VHF license provisions. The vessel on to
which the AIS unit is to be installed must therefore possess a current
VHF radiotelephone license which lists the AIS system, vessel Call
Sign and MMSI number.
Warning: An MMSI number is required in order for the AIS
transceiver to operate. Please contact the relevant authority in
your country for more information.
Important information for US customers
There are specific laws in the USA regarding the configuration of AIS
class B transceivers. If you are a US resident and intend to use your
AIS class B transceiver in US waters, you should make sure that your
retailer has configured your product prior to supplying it to you. If
your AIS transceiver has not been pre-configured, please contact
your dealer for details of how to have it configured.
Warning: In the United States of America, the MMSI and
static data must only be entered by a competent installer. The
end user of the equipment is not authorized to enter their own
vessel data.
About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual |9
What’s in the box?
Figure 1 shows the items included with your AIS transceiver pur-
chase. The following sections will give a brief overview of each item.
Please
Fig. 1 ensure allboxitems are present. If any of the items are missing,
What’s in the
please contact your dealer.
¼¼ Note: Optional items are included only in NAIS-500 kit: 000-13609-001.
NAIS-500 Quick
start guide
Product manual
Product CD
Warranty
information
Screws T-Connector
(packet of 4) (Optional)
Power and data cable USB configuration cable GPS antenna (Optional) N2k cable (Optional)
Figure 1 Items included with the product
Support tools CD
The CD supplied with the package contains the following:
• NAIS System Configurator software tool necessary to configure the
AIS transceiver. Please refer to section 4 for details of the configura-
tion process and how to use the NAIS System Configurator tool.
• USB drivers required to connect to the AIS transceiver via USB.
• Alternative language versions of this manual.
Quick start guide
The quick start guide gives a handy one-page reference for the
installation process.
Product manual
This document is the product manual and should be read thor-
oughly prior to any attempt to install or use the AIS transceiver.
10 | About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
Fixing screws
Four fixing screws are provided with the product for mounting of
the AIS transceiver. Please refer to the Installation procedures, chap-
ter 3 for details of how to mount the AIS transceiver.
AIS transceiver unit
Figure 2 shows an overview of the AIS transceiver unit.
The AIS transceiver has a number of indicators which provide in-
formation to the user about the status of the AIS transceiver. Please
refer to Indicator functions, chapter 5 for more details.
The AIS transceiver has an external GPS antenna. You should ensure
that the GPS antenna is mounted where it has a clear view of the
sky.
Power and data cable
The power and data cable connects to the AIS transceiver and en-
ables connection
Fig. 2 Overview to power, NMEA 0183 and an external silent mode
switch.
Indicator lights VHF Antenna GPS Antenna
Orange/
Green Red Green
Green
Mounting holes Mounting holes
USB Power and data
NMEA 2000
Figure 2 AIS transceiver overview
About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual | 11
Electrical connections
ctric connections The AIS transceiver has the following electrical connections:
• Power supply
• Two independent NMEA 0183 data ports for connection to chart-
plotters and other NMEA 0183 compatible equipment
• USB port for connection to a PC or Mac
• External switch input for silent mode control
• NMEA 2000 port for connection to NMEA 2000 compatible equip-
ment.
In addition, there are two other connections for the VHF antenna
and the external GPS antenna. Figure 3 shows an overview of the
electrical connections to the AIS transceiver.
NAIS-500
Chartplotter
NMEA0183
device
USB Switch
Power in
NMEA 2000
Figure 3 Electrical connections to the AIS transceiver
12 | About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
3
Installation
Preparing
Fig. 4 Installation config. for installation
Figure 4 shows a typical installation configuration for the AIS trans-
ceiver. Please take the time to familiarize yourself with the system
elements and their connections prior to attempting installation.
VHF antenna
GPS antenna
NAIS-500
Chartplotter
NMEA 0183
device
Switch
PC (optional)
Power in
NMEA 2000
Figure 4 Typical installation configuration
In addition to the items provided with your AIS transceiver the fol-
lowing items will be required for installation:
VHF antenna
Connection to a suitable VHF antenna will be required for the AIS
transceiver to operate. A standard marine band VHF antenna such as
that used with VHF voice radios will be sufficient. Please take note of
the warnings in section 1 regarding the use of antennas.
Alternatively, if you wish to use an existing VHF antenna, install a
Navico NSPL-500 VHF Antenna Splitter, which allow the existing an-
tenna to be used with two radio devices, such as a VHF voice radio
and the NAIS-500 transceiver.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 13
Warning: If using a VHF Antenna Splitter, you must use the
NSPL-500 as it is specifically designed to work with the NAIS-500
transceiver. The use of third party antenna splitters may result in
malfunction or permanent damage to the NAIS-500 transceiver.
Optional Silent Mode switch
A switch can be connected to the transceiver to enable and disable
‘silent mode’ (see Step 4 and 5 in Installation procedures, chapter 3).
A latching toggle switch is required to use this feature.
VHF antenna cable
Please check that the VHF antenna you intend to use has sufficient
cable to reach between the VHF antenna and the AIS transceiver
unit. If it is not sufficient, you will need an extension cable. Please
contact your dealer for details of suitable products. For reference,
the VHF antenna connector type on the AIS transceiver unit is
SO 239, and is intended to mate with a PL 259 connector. The re-
quired cable impedance is 50 ohms.
Power and data cable
The AIS transceiver unit is supplied with a 2-meter-long power and
data cable as an accessory. If you require longer cables to reach your
power supply, please ensure the cables are capable of carrying cur-
rents of up to 2A peak and 200mA on average. Please contact your
local qualified marine installer.
Chartplotters
To display received AIS messages from other vessels on your chart-
plotter, you will need to connect your AIS transceiver to your chart-
plotter. Please refer to the user manual supplied with your chartplot-
ter for details of how to connect and configure your chartplotter for
use with AIS devices. For general guidance, your chartplotter should
be configured to accept NMEA 0183 data at 38400 baud (sometimes
referred to as ‘NMEA HS’ in the plotter configuration menu).
Alternatively, if you use an NMEA 2000 network on your vessel, you
can connect the AIS transceiver to your NMEA 2000 network via the
supplied cable. Refer to your chartplotter manual for making NMEA
2000 connection. You may also need to enable the display of AIS
targets in the chart options.
14 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Connection to a PC or Mac
If you choose to use a PC or Mac with suitable charting software
to display received AIS messages from other vessels, this can be
accomplished by connecting to the USB connector on the AIS
transceiver.
Installation procedures
Before beginning the installation of your AIS transceiver, please en-
sure you have the necessary additional items as detailed in the previ-
ous section Preparing for installation. It is strongly recommended that
you read all of the instructions in this manual prior to installation.
If, after reading this manual, you are unsure about any element of
the installation process, please contact your dealer for advice.
The following sections explain the installation process step by step
for each of the main elements of the system.
Step 1 - Installing the NAIS-500 AIS transceiver
Please note the following guidelines when selecting a location for
your AIS transceiver:
• The compass safe distance of this unit is 0.55 m or greater for 0.3°
deviation.
• There should be adequate space around the AIS transceiver for rout-
ing of cables. See Figure 5 for details of the AIS transceiver dimen-
sions.
• The ambient temperature around the AIS transceiver should be
maintained between -15°C and +55°C.
• The AIS transceiver should not be located in a flammable or hazard-
ous atmosphere such as an engine room or near fuel tanks.
• The AIS transceiver is fully waterproof to ingress protection rating
IPx7. However, it is recommended that the AIS transceiver not be
subjected to extended periods of exposure to spray or submersion.
• It is acceptable to mount the AIS transceiver either vertically or
horizontally.
• It is recommended that the AIS transceiver is installed in a ‘below
deck’ environment.
• The product is supplied with four selftapping screws for attachment
of the AIS transceiver to a suitable surface. Please refer to Figure 6 for
guidance.
• The AIS transceiver should be mounted in a location where the
indicators are readily visible as these provide important information
on the status of the AIS transceiver.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 15
Fig. 5 Dimensions
132.5mm 53mm
47mm
98mm
151.5mm
Fig. 6 Mounting
Figure 5 AIS transceiver dimensions
Figure 6 AIS transceiver mounting
Step 2 - Installing the external GPS antenna
It is not recommended that the GPS antenna is mounted up a mast
where the motion of the vessel will cause the antenna to swing and
potentially reduce the accuracy of the GPS position. Also, do not
mount the antenna in the direct path of a radar transmitter.
To pole mount the external GPS antenna, you will require a 1-inch
14 TPI thread pole.
• Feed the cable attached to the GPS antenna through the pole.
• Mount the pole into position as shown in Figure 7.
• Fit the GPS antenna to the pole adapter using the 2 small screws.
16 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Figure 7 GPS antenna mounting
To surface mount the external GPS antenna, select a flat clean sur-
face area that has a clear view of the sky. Mount the antenna using
the supplied gasket and the 2 small screws.
• Mark and drill the 2 mounting holes and a further hole if necessary
for the GPS cable.
• Install the gasket by firstly threading the attached cable through the
center of the gasket.
• Screw the GPS antenna to the mounting surface.
• Route the cable to your AIS transceiver unit, adding any necessary
extension cables.
• Connect the cable from the GPS antenna to the GPS connector on
the AIS transceiver as shown in Figure 8.
Fig. 8 Location - GPS
¼¼ Note: Ensure the surface mounting area is clean with no dirt, old
paint or debris.
VHF Antenna GPS Antenna
Figure 8 Position of the GPS antenna connector
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 17
Step 3 - Connecting the VHF antenna
Route the cable from the VHF antenna to the AIS transceiver and
connect to the VHF connector on the AIS transceiver as shown in
Figure 9. Fig. 9 Location - VHF
VHF Antenna GPS Antenna
Figure 9 Position of the VHF antenna connector
A standard marine band VHF antenna or AIS antenna should be used
with the AIS transceiver. The connector type on the AIS transceiver
is SO239. Your chosen VHF antenna requires a PL259 connector to
mate with this. If your VHF antenna does not use this type of connec-
tor, please contact your dealer for details of available adaptors.
18 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Step 4 - Connecting the accessory cable
An accessory cable is supplied with the product to provide connec-
tions to power, the external switch and the NMEA 0183 data ports.
The cable has a pre-moulded connector at one end which should
be connected to the connector on the unit marked ‘PWR/0183’. The
other end of the cable has eight color-coded bare wires ready for
connection. The table below lists the function of each color-coded
wire for reference.
Pin
Wire color Description Function
no.
Red 8 Power in + Power supply
Power in - connections
Black 9 12 V to 24 V DC
Light green 12 Switch input- External switch
connection for silent
Orange 10 Switch input+ mode
NMEA 0183 port 1
Brown 1
TX+ (Transmit +)
NMEA 0183 port 1 High speed NMEA 0183
Blue 2
TX- (Transmit -) - Port 1: (38,400 baud)
NMEA 0183 port 1 intended for connection
White 3 to chartplotters
RX+ (Receive +)
NMEA 0183 port 1
Green 4
RX- (Receive -)
NMEA 0183 port 2
Purple 11
TX+ (Transmit +)
NMEA 0183 port 2 Low speed NMEA 0183
Pink 7 - Port 2: (4,800 baud)
TX- (Transmit -)
intended for connection
NMEA 0183 port 2 to other NMEA 0183
Grey 6
RX+ (Receive +) compatible devices
NMEA 0183 port 2
Yellow 5
RX- (Receive -)
Color-coding of wires in the accessory cable
Warning: Please check your wiring very carefully before ap-
plying power to the product. Failure to wire the product correctly
could result in permanent damage.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 19
Step 5 - Connecting an external switch for Silent Mode operation
A toggle switch can be connected to the AIS transceiver to provide
remote control of silent mode. Connect the toggle switch between
the light green and orange wires as shown in Figure 10. Connection
of an external switch to toggle silent mode is optional and not es-
sential for normal operation of the product.
Warning:
Fig. 10 External switch
Do not connect a voltage source across the switch
inputs, as this may damage the transceiver.
Red
Power in +
Black
Power in –
Light green
Switch input +
Orange
Switch input –
Brown
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Blue
Port 1 Transmit –
38,400baud White
Receive +
(chart plotter) Green
Receive –
Purple
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Pink
Port 2 Transmit –
Grey
4,800baud Receive +
(other NMEA0183 device) Yellow
Receive –
Figure 10 Connecting an external switch
Step 6 - Connecting to NMEA 0183 compatible equipment
The two independent NMEA 0183 data ports provide connection
to your chartplotter and other NMEA 0183 compatible equipment.
Each port consists of four color-coded wires, as shown in the table
(Step 4) and in the diagram in Figure 11. Connect the wires to the
appropriate connections on your NMEA 0183 compatible equip-
ment. Please refer to your equipment manual for more information.
The AIS transceiver has a high speed bi-directional port, which
operates at 38,400 baud and a low speed bi-directional port, which
operates at 4,800 baud. The high speed port is intended primarily
to connect to a chartplotter, while the low speed port is intended
to connect to other NMEA 0183 devices. A multiplexing feature is
provided, which means any messages received via the low speed
port are automatically transmitted via the high speed port and vice-
20 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
versa. This is particularly useful when using a chartplotter having
only a single NMEA 0183 port. An additional sensor, such as a gyro-
compass, can be connected to the AIS transceiver via the low speed
port and the AIS transceiver can be connected via the high speed
port to the chartplotter resulting in the chartplotter receiving both
AIS information and heading information simultaneously. Please
Fig. 11 NMEA0183 data
ensure your equipment is configured to use the correct baud rate
for the port it is connected to.
Red
Power in +
Black
Power in –
Light green
Switch input +
Orange
Switch input –
Brown
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Blue
Port 1 Transmit –
38,400baud White
Receive +
(chart plotter) Green
Receive –
Purple
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Pink
Port 2 Transmit –
Grey
4,800baud Receive +
(other NMEA0183 device) Yellow
Receive –
Figure 11 Connecting to the NMEA 0183 data port
Step 7 - Connection to an NMEA 2000 network (optional)
The AIS transceiver can be connected to an NMEA 2000 network
by a suitable Navico NMEA 2000 network cable. If your vessel has
a NMEA 2000 network, please refer to the relevant documentation
for your NMEA 2000 equipment. Once connected, and with your
chartplotter also connected to your NMEA 2000 network, you will
be able to receive AIS targets on your chartplotter.
Step 8 - USB Connection (optional)
The AIS transceiver is supplied with a USB port for connection to
a PC or Mac. The USB connector can be connected directly to the
USB port on the PC or Mac via the supplied USB cable. To enable
connection of the AIS transceiver to a PC, the USB drivers must be
installed first.
Please install NAIS System Configurator as described in section 4
before attempting to connect the USB port to a PC.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 21
Once installed the AIS unit can be connected to the PC. The USB
device will be automatically detected and will appear as a new COM
port device. Select this COM port and a baud rate of 38,400 in PC
based navigation software to make use of the AIS data.
Warning: If the USB connection is removed from the PC or
Mac during use, you must reset the connection before further
use. To reset the connection: disconnect, then re-apply power to
the AIS before closing and re-launching any PC or Mac applica-
tions using the USB connection. Finally, re-connect the USB cable
between the PC or Mac and the AIS transceiver.
Step 9 - Connection to a power supply
The AIS transceiver requires a 12V or 24V power supply, typically
provided by the vessel’s battery. It is recommended that crimped
and soldered lugs are used to connect the AIS transceiver to the
power source. It is recommended that the power supply is con-
nected via a suitable circuit breaker and/or 3A fuse block.
1. Connect the red wire to a 12V or 24V power supply positive terminal.
2. Fig.
Connect
12 Powerthe black wire to the supply negative terminal.
supply
Red
Power in +
Black
Power in –
Light green
Switch input +
Orange
Switch input –
Brown
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Blue
Port 1 Transmit –
38,400baud White
Receive +
(chart plotter) Green
Receive –
Purple
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Pink
Port 2 Transmit –
Grey
4,800baud Receive +
(other NMEA0183 device) Yellow
Receive –
Figure 12 Connecting the power supply
22 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
4
Configuring your AIS transceiver
Until correctly configured, your AIS class B transceiver will only
receive AIS messages and will not transmit AIS messages.
Switching on your AIS transceiver for the
first time
A few seconds after applying power to the AIS transceiver, the
indicators on the unit will illuminate in a pattern dependent on the
configuration state of the unit. The function of the four LED indica-
tors are:
Indicator Light Function
PWR Green Unit is powered up and operating normally
ERR Red Unit has experienced an error or invalid
MMSI*
Rx Green Unit is receiving AIS data when flashing
Tx Orange Silent mode is activated
*) See table in section 5 for details.
If the AIS transceiver has been pre-configured, the orange (Tx) indi-
cator will illuminate until a transmission has been sent by the unit.
This may take several minutes, as the transceiver must acquire a GPS
position fix prior to transmitting its first message.
If the transceiver has not been pre-configured, the orange and red
indicators will be illuminated until the configuration process has
been completed.
Configuring your AIS transceiver
There are two potential ways in which your AIS transceiver can be
configured:
1. Configuration in advance by your dealer or installer. If your AIS transceiver
has been configured for you by your dealer or installer, you can proceed to
chapter 5.
2. Configuration using NAIS System Configurator.
Providing it is acceptable to do so under your local legislation, it is
possible to configure your AIS transceiver yourself using the NAIS
System Configurator software provided with the product.
Configuring your AIS transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual | 23
Warning: US Customers only: It is a violation of the rules of
the Federal Communications Commission for the end user to
program the vessel data. The vessel data must only be pro-
grammed by a competent installer. If your AIS transceiver has
not been pre-configured for you, please contact your dealer
for advice on how to have the AIS transceiver configured by a
competent installer.
Introduction to NAIS System Configurator
Included in the CD supplied with your product is a software tool
called ‘NAIS System Configurator’. NAIS System Configurator provides
the facility to configure, monitor and diagnose issues with your AIS
transceiver. NAIS System Configurator can provide assistance when
ensuring that a satisfactory GPS signal is being received.
See the sections immediately below for how to install NAIS System
Configurator and how to configure the AIS transceiver using NAIS
System Configurator. Further help on how to use the features of NAIS
System Configurator can be found in the ‘Help’ menu within the NAIS
System Configurator tool. NAIS System Configurator is designed to be in-
stalled and used with a PC or Mac connected to the AIS transceiver
via USB using the supplied USB cable.
Installing NAIS System Configurator - PC
1. Insert the CD into your PC, navigate to the “NAIS System Configurator”, then
the “Windows” folder and run the setup.exe file. Now follow the on-screen
prompts.
2. If a security warning appears, click ‘Run’ to continue with the installation.
3. Once the installation is complete, NAIS System Configurator will launch au-
tomatically and a start menu folder and shortcut will be created for future
use.
Installing NAIS System Configurator - Mac
1. Insert the CD into your Mac, then navigate to the ‘NAIS System Configura-
tor’ then the ‘OSX’ folder.
2. Double click the NAIS System Configurator.dmg file and then follow the on-
screen instructions to complete the installation.
24 | Configuring your AIS transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
Configuration using NAIS System Configurator
For configuration purposes only, it is possible to power the AIS
transceiver via its USB connection. This is useful if you wish to con-
figure your AIS transceiver away from the vessel power supply. The
AIS transceiver will not transmit any data or acquire a GPS position
fix whilst powered by USB.
You will require the following information in order to configure your
AIS transceiver:
• MMSI
• Vessel name
• Vessel type
• Call sign
Vessel dimensions and position of your GPS antenna installation.
For further assistance in configuring your AIS transceiver, please
refer to the Help menu within NAIS System Configurator.
Warning: Please ensure that you enter all vessel data ac-
curately. Failure to do so could result in other vessels failing
to identify your vessel correctly. The vessel MMSI can only be
programmed once using NAIS System Configurator, please take
care to program your MMSI correctly. If you need to change the
MMSI for any reason, please contact your dealer who will arrange
to have the MMSI reset.
Configuring your AIS transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual | 25
5
Operation
Using the AIS transceiver
Once the unit has been configured, it is ready for use. Providing that
other vessels with AIS transceivers installed are within radio range of
your vessel, you should see their details appear on your chartplotter
or PC. These vessels will also be able to see your vessel on their
chartplotter or PC. It may take up to six minutes for your full vessel
details to be visible to others.
Specific details of how to configure your chartplotter to make use
of the AIS transceiver features will be given in your chartplotter
manual. If you are using charting software running on a PC, please
refer to the instructions provided with your chartplotting software
for details of how to configure it to display AIS information.
Switch functions
When connected to the AIS transceiver and by following the in-
structions in Step 4 and 5 under Installation procedures, chapter 3,
an external switch provides the ability to set the AIS transceiver into
‘silent mode’. In silent mode, the transmission of your own vessel
position ceases, whilst the reception of other vessels’ AIS position
continues. You should use silent mode if you do not wish your ves-
sel data to be received by other AIS devices. When silent mode is
active, the orange light on Tx indicator will be illuminated.
Warning: When silent mode is active, other vessels will not be
able to receive your vessel information on their AIS devices. Your
navigational safety may be compromised as a result.
Using NAIS System Configurator with your
AIS transceiver
The NAIS System Configurator tool has a range of features to help
monitor the performance of your AIS transceiver. To use the full
range of features, your AIS transceiver must be installed as described
in chapter 3 and connected to a PC, running the NAIS System Con-
figurator application. Follow the instructions provided in the help
menu within NAIS System Configurator.
26 | Operation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Indicator functions
The AIS transceiver includes four LED indicators, as shown in Figure
Fig. 13 Indicator lights
13. The state of the indicators provides information regarding the
status of the AIS transceiver.
Indicator lights
Green Amber Red Blue
Figure 13 Indicator location on the AIS transceiver unit
The meaning of typical indicator configurations is shown in the table
below and Figure 13 shows the orientation of the AIS transceiver.
Indicator Light Description
PWR Green, steady The transceiver has been powered up correctly.
ERR Red, steady MMSI is not properly programmed.
Red, flashing The transceiver has detected a system error. Also the state when
connected to USB only for initial programming.
Rx Green, flashing The transceiver is receiving AIS data.
Tx Orange, The transceiver is acquiring a GPS fix, no AIS transmission during
flashing this time period.
This can be the following situation:
The device is just newly powered on and is acquiring a GPS
position fix prior to transmitting its first vessel information
report. This process may take several minutes.
The GPS position fix has been lost. The device is attempting
to re-acquire position fix for 30 minutes before entering a BIIT
system error state.
Orange, steady The transceiver is in silent mode, no AIS transmission at all.
Green, flashing The transceiver is transmitting AIS data.
The flash interval is 3 minutes when vessel speed under 2 knots.
The flash interval is 30 seconds when vessel speed above 2
knots.
Operation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 27
6
Troubleshooting
Issue Possible cause and remedy
No data is being • Check that the power supply is connected
received by the correctly.
chartplotter • Check that the power supply is a 12 V or 24 V
supply.
• Check that the connections to the chartplotter
are correct.
No indicators are • Check that the power supply is connected
illuminated correctly.
• Check that the power supply is a 12 V or 24 V
supply.
The Red 'error' • The unit may not have a valid MMSI. Check that
indicator is the AIS transceiver is correctly configured with a
illuminated valid MMSI.
• The VHF antenna may be faulty. Check the
connection to the VHF antenna and that the
VHF antenna is not damaged. The red indicator
may illuminate briefly if the power supply is
interrupted or the VHF antenna characteristics
are briefly affected.
• No GPS position fix can be obtained. Check that
the external GPS antenna is properly connected
and installed. Review the GPS signal strength
graph available in NAIS System Configurator.
• The power supply is outside the allowable
range. Check that the power supply is within the
range 9.6 V to 31.2 V.
• If none of the above will correct the error
condition, please contact your dealer for advice.
My MMSI is being Some older AIS devices and chartplotters do not
received by other process the specific class B AIS message, which
vessels, but my provides the vessel name (message 24). This
vessel name is not is not a fault of your AIS transceiver. Software
shown on their upgrades are available for many older chart-
chartplotter or PC plotters which will correct this issue. The other
vessel should update its AIS unit and/or chart-
plotting software to receive AIS message 24.
If the guidance given in the table above does not rectify the prob-
lem you are experiencing, please contact your dealer for further
assistance.
28 | Troubleshooting | NAIS-500 User Manual
7
Specifications
Parameter Value
Dimensions 152 x 98 x 52 mm (L x W x H)
Weight 260 g
Power DC (9.6 V - 31.2 V)
Average power consumption 180 mA at 12
VDC
Peak current rating 2 A at 12 VDC
GPS receiver 50 channel IEC 61108-1 compliant
(AIS internal)
Electrical USB
interfaces NMEA 0183, default 38,400 baud (bi-
directional)
NMEA 0183, default 4,800 baud (bi-
directional)
NMEA 2000 LEN=1
Connections VHF antenna connector (SO-239)
External GPS antenna connector (SMA)
USB type mini-B
NMEA 2000 standard connector
12 way power input/NMEA 0183/external
switch
VHF transceiver AIS transmitter x 1
AIS receiver x 2 (one receiver time shared
between AIS and DSC)
Frequency: 156.025 to 162.025 MHz in 25 kHz
steps
Output power 33 dBm ± 1.5 dB
Channel 25 kHz
bandwidth
Channel step 25 kHz
Modulation 25 kHz GMSK (AIS, Tx and Rx)
modes 25 kHz AFSK (DSC, Rx only)
Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual | 29
Bit rate 9600 b/s ± 50 ppm (GMSK)
1200 b/s ± 30 ppm (FSK)
RX sensitivity Less than -107 dBm at 20% PER
Co-channel 10 dB
Adjacent channel 70 dB
IMD 65 dB
Blocking 84 dB
Parameter Value
Environmental Water resistant to IP67
Operating temperature: -15ºC to +55ºC
Tested to IEC 60945 'Protected' category
Indicators Power, Error, Rx, Tx (silent mode)
Countries of intended use in the EU
AT - Austria HU - Hungary PL - Poland
BE - Belgium IS - Iceland PT - Portugal
BG - Bulgaria IE - Ireland RO - Romania
CY - Cyprus IT - Italy SK - Slovakia
CZ - Czech Republic LI - Liechtenstein SL - Slovenia
DK - Denmark LV - Latvia ES - Spain
EE - Estonia LT - Lithuania SE - Sweden
FI - Finland LU - Luxembourg CH - Switzerland
FR - France MT - Malta TR - Turkey
DE - Germany NL - Netherlands UK - United
Kingdom
GR - Greece NO - Norway
30 | Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual
NOTES:
Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual | 31
NOTES:
32 | Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual
*988-11240-001*
www.bandg.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.lowrance.com
201-0320:2 NAIS-500 Product Manual
REFERENCES 1 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
BOOMERANGER RIB BOATS
Please find below a selection of references of past projects. This information is confidential and it may not be copied or
shown to third parties.
Introduction
Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are especially designed for heavy duty maritime authority use such as patrolling,
interception, boarding and search and rescue. Boomeranger Boats have been designing and manufacturing Special
Operation boats since 2006 they are widely used by Navies, Marines, Special Forces and other professional users around
the world. Our reference customers include, for example: Norwegian Navy and Maritime Special Forces (MJK), German
Navy, Seebatallion, Special Forces and GSG9, Swedish Navy, Special Forces and Coast Guard Special Forces, Indian
Navy Special Forces (MARCOS have the air-droppable variant in use), Lithuanian, Latvian and Estonian Special Forces and
Border Guards, United Arab Emirates Special Forces, Marines and Coast Guard, Royal Brunei Special Forces and Navy
and The Finnish Navy, Special Forces and Coast Guard.
The Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are built by skilled craftsmen, in our purpose-built factory in Finland. As there
are no significant outsourced manufacturing involved, the quality controlling mechanisms are entirely within the company
and the highest quality level in all manufacturing stages is guaranteed.
As a rule, our customer don’t tend to make public announcements of the contracts. Only the Australian Navy contracts got
publicity as the contract was signed at PACIFIC 2019 show. Therefore, the links presented are mainly to present the boat
model at our internet pages.
2 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Royal Australian Navy
Type C-850 Military Fast Rescue Boats and C-1100 Special Operations Boats
https://boomeranger.fi/products/fast-rescue/fast-rescue-c-850-wj-frb/
Website & https://www.australiandefence.com.au/defence/sea/boomeranger-wins-navy-rhib-contract
links
https://www.anao.gov.au/sites/default/files/Auditor-General_Report_2020-
2021_19_PDSS_Offshore_Patrol_Vessel.pdf
Quantity 28 x C-850
13 x C-1100
3 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Quick specs For the C850: For the C-1100:
2x Yanmar 440 hp diesel engines
Engines: 1xYanmar 8LV 350hp + ZT370 Rolls-Royce FF270 waterjets
sterndrive Lenght: 10,2 m
Length: 8,5m Top speed: ~45 kts
Payload: 1450 kg Fuel/range: 750 ltr / ~200 NM
Payload: 2000 kg
Scope Design, Project Management, Production, Delivery, Spare Parts, Documentation, Training
Description C-850: Davit launched fast rescue boat with inboard diesel, stern drive. Equipped with single point lifting
system. The boat is designed to carry a crew of two plus eight passengers.
C-1100: Multi-role Special Operations Boat designed to be launched and recovered from the stern ramp of
Lürssen’s Arafura class offshore patrol vessels. The boat is designed to carry a crew of two plus eight
passengers and it’s equipped with a weapon mount in the front deck.
Project 2020 – 2029
Schedule
Location Osborne Naval Shipyard, Australia
Contact Steve O’Hearn CSC
SEA 1180-1 Offshore Patrol Vessel
Offshore Patrol Vessels Branch
Patrol Boats & Specialist Ships Division
Department of Defence | Naval Shipbuilding and Sustainment Group
Russell Offices, R2-3-C016 | PO Box 7904 | CANBERRA BC ACT 2610
M: + 61 (0)408 657 871 | E:
[email protected]
4 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Swedish Coast Guard
Website & links https://boomeranger.fi/products/special-operations/special-operations-c-1200-ob/
Quantity, Contract date / classified
Project schedule
2019 - 2020
5 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Contract Boomeranger C-1200 Special Operations Boat
Value of the Contract around 2.000.000,00 €
Quick specs 3 x Mercury 400 hp outboard engines
Lenght: 12,0 m Top speed: >55 kn light weight
Range: > 250 nm @ most economical speed Speed: >45 kn fully laden
Scope Design, project management, manufacturing boats, road-trailers, cradles, spare parts packages,
documentation, turn-key delivery and training.
Description Visit, board, search, and seizure (VBSS) Special Operations Boat for high sea states at night with
night vision googles in freezing conditions.
Contact Fredrik Köster,
[email protected]; Mobil / Cell +46(0)708 – 80 26 65
6 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Ministry of National Defence Bucharest, Romania
Type C-750 Tactical Counter Terrorusm Intervention Boat
Quantity 1 boat : 2024
Quick specs Engine: 2 x Mercury Fourstroke V6 200hp
Length: 7,7 m
Max speed, full load: > 40 kts
7 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Prime contractor Boomeranger Boats Oy
Scope Design, Project Management, , Production, Delivery, Spare Parts, Trailer, Documentation, Training.
Description The C-750 Tactical Counter Terrorism Intervention Boat is specifically designed for boarding operations.
The boat is equipped with two outboard engines and can accommodate a crew of 2 + 8 people
Contact Gabriel Bosinceanu
Director general | CEO
CESS Plus Solutions S.R.L. | Str. Ciobanului nr. 77-79, Tarla 65, Parcela 605
077135-Mogosoaia, Ilfov | Romania
Tel: +40 372957987 | Fax: +40 372874318 | Mobil: +40 724516985
8 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer German Navy
Type C-650 Military Fast Rescue Boats
9 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Website & links https://boomeranger.fi/products/fast-rescue/fast-rescue-c-650-wj-frb/
Quantity 6 x C-650
Quick specs Engine: Steyr MO164M40
Propulsion: Alamarin AJ 245 waterjet
Length: 6,5 m
Max speed, full load: 18 kts
Prime contractor Boomeranger Boats Oy
Scope Design, Project Management, SOLAS-certification, Production, Delivery, Spare Parts, IETD Documentation
(S1000D and S2000M), Training.
Description Military Fast Rescue boats for warships, equipped with single point lifting system. Seats for 2 plus 6
passengers.
This is a subsequent order for 34 Boomeranger C-650 boats delivered between 2007-2012.
10 (12
)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Finnish Navy
Quantity, Contract date /
2022 -
Project schedule
Quantity 8 boats
Quick specs Diesel Engine Steyer SE266E40 + Waterjet Kongsberg FF270
Single point lifting system
Length: 7,5m Lightweight: ca 2515kg
Width: 2,75 Max. persons: 8
Scope Design, project management, manufacturing, shock cradles + test, spare parts packages,
documentation, turn-key delivery, training and maintenance contract.
Description C-850 IB: Davit launched fast rescue boat with inboard diesel, stern drive. Equipped with single
point lifting system. The boat is designed to carry a crew of two plus eight passengers
11 (12
)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project: New Demostration Boat 2025
Customer Boomeranger Boats
Quantity, Contract date / 2025
Project schedule
Model Boomeranger C-1200 Special Operations Boat
Quick specs 2 x Mercury 600 hp outboard engines
Lenght: 12,0 m Top speed: >55 kn light weight
Range: > 250 nm @ most economical speed Speed: >45 kn fully laden
Scope Design, project management, manufacturing boats, documentation, turn-key delivery
Purpose i. Visit, board, search, and seizure (VBSS) Special Operations Boat for high sea states at
night with night vision googles in freezing or tropical conditions.
ii. 360 Fire Support with 3 weapon stations, fire of two stations into any direction
iii. Combat diver insertion / pick-up
iv. Military SAR
Transport:
i. Road, rail and see transportable on cradle or trailer
ii. Slipway trailable
iii. Helicopter underslung CH-47
iv. Air-transportable
v. Air-droppable A400M, C-130, C-17
12 (12
)
CONFIDENTIAL
REFERENCES 1 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
BOOMERANGER RIB BOATS
Please find below a selection of references of past projects. This information is confidential and it may not be copied or
shown to third parties.
Introduction
Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are especially designed for heavy duty maritime authority use such as patrolling,
interception, boarding and search and rescue. Boomeranger Boats have been designing and manufacturing Special
Operation boats since 2006 they are widely used by Navies, Marines, Special Forces and other professional users around
the world. Our reference customers include, for example: Norwegian Navy and Maritime Special Forces (MJK), German
Navy, Seebatallion, Special Forces and GSG9, Swedish Navy, Special Forces and Coast Guard Special Forces, Indian
Navy Special Forces (MARCOS have the air-droppable variant in use), Lithuanian, Latvian and Estonian Special Forces and
Border Guards, United Arab Emirates Special Forces, Marines and Coast Guard, Royal Brunei Special Forces and Navy
and The Finnish Navy, Special Forces and Coast Guard.
The Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are built by skilled craftsmen, in our purpose-built factory in Finland. As there
are no significant outsourced manufacturing involved, the quality controlling mechanisms are entirely within the company
and the highest quality level in all manufacturing stages is guaranteed.
As a rule, our customer don’t tend to make public announcements of the contracts. Only the Australian Navy contracts got
publicity as the contract was signed at PACIFIC 2019 show. Therefore, the links presented are mainly to present the boat
model at our internet pages.
2 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Royal Australian Navy
Type C-850 Military Fast Rescue Boats and C-1100 Special Operations Boats
https://boomeranger.fi/products/fast-rescue/fast-rescue-c-850-wj-frb/
Website & https://www.australiandefence.com.au/defence/sea/boomeranger-wins-navy-rhib-contract
links
https://www.anao.gov.au/sites/default/files/Auditor-General_Report_2020-
2021_19_PDSS_Offshore_Patrol_Vessel.pdf
Quantity 28 x C-850
13 x C-1100
3 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Quick specs For the C850: For the C-1100:
2x Yanmar 440 hp diesel engines
Engines: 1xYanmar 8LV 350hp + ZT370 Rolls-Royce FF270 waterjets
sterndrive Lenght: 10,2 m
Length: 8,5m Top speed: ~45 kts
Payload: 1450 kg Fuel/range: 750 ltr / ~200 NM
Payload: 2000 kg
Scope Design, Project Management, Production, Delivery, Spare Parts, Documentation, Training
Description C-850: Davit launched fast rescue boat with inboard diesel, stern drive. Equipped with single point lifting
system. The boat is designed to carry a crew of two plus eight passengers.
C-1100: Multi-role Special Operations Boat designed to be launched and recovered from the stern ramp of
Lürssen’s Arafura class offshore patrol vessels. The boat is designed to carry a crew of two plus eight
passengers and it’s equipped with a weapon mount in the front deck.
Project 2020 – 2029
Schedule
Location Osborne Naval Shipyard, Australia
Contact Steve O’Hearn CSC
SEA 1180-1 Offshore Patrol Vessel
Offshore Patrol Vessels Branch
Patrol Boats & Specialist Ships Division
Department of Defence | Naval Shipbuilding and Sustainment Group
Russell Offices, R2-3-C016 | PO Box 7904 | CANBERRA BC ACT 2610
M: + 61 (0)408 657 871 | E:
[email protected]
4 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Swedish Coast Guard
Website & links https://boomeranger.fi/products/special-operations/special-operations-c-1200-ob/
Quantity, Contract date / classified
Project schedule
2019 - 2020
5 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Contract Boomeranger C-1200 Special Operations Boat
Value of the Contract around 2.000.000,00 €
Quick specs 3 x Mercury 400 hp outboard engines
Lenght: 12,0 m Top speed: >55 kn light weight
Range: > 250 nm @ most economical speed Speed: >45 kn fully laden
Scope Design, project management, manufacturing boats, road-trailers, cradles, spare parts packages,
documentation, turn-key delivery and training.
Description Visit, board, search, and seizure (VBSS) Special Operations Boat for high sea states at night with
night vision googles in freezing conditions.
Contact Fredrik Köster,
[email protected]; Mobil / Cell +46(0)708 – 80 26 65
6 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Ministry of National Defence Bucharest, Romania
Type C-750 Tactical Counter Terrorusm Intervention Boat
Quantity 1 boat : 2024
Quick specs Engine: 2 x Mercury Fourstroke V6 200hp
Length: 7,7 m
Max speed, full load: > 40 kts
7 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Prime contractor Boomeranger Boats Oy
Scope Design, Project Management, , Production, Delivery, Spare Parts, Trailer, Documentation, Training.
Description The C-750 Tactical Counter Terrorism Intervention Boat is specifically designed for boarding operations.
The boat is equipped with two outboard engines and can accommodate a crew of 2 + 8 people
Contact Gabriel Bosinceanu
Director general | CEO
CESS Plus Solutions S.R.L. | Str. Ciobanului nr. 77-79, Tarla 65, Parcela 605
077135-Mogosoaia, Ilfov | Romania
Tel: +40 372957987 | Fax: +40 372874318 | Mobil: +40 724516985
8 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer German Navy
Type C-650 Military Fast Rescue Boats
9 (12)
CONFIDENTIAL
Website & links https://boomeranger.fi/products/fast-rescue/fast-rescue-c-650-wj-frb/
Quantity 6 x C-650
Quick specs Engine: Steyr MO164M40
Propulsion: Alamarin AJ 245 waterjet
Length: 6,5 m
Max speed, full load: 18 kts
Prime contractor Boomeranger Boats Oy
Scope Design, Project Management, SOLAS-certification, Production, Delivery, Spare Parts, IETD Documentation
(S1000D and S2000M), Training.
Description Military Fast Rescue boats for warships, equipped with single point lifting system. Seats for 2 plus 6
passengers.
This is a subsequent order for 34 Boomeranger C-650 boats delivered between 2007-2012.
10 (12
)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project
Customer Finnish Navy
Quantity, Contract date /
2022 -
Project schedule
Quantity 8 boats
Quick specs Diesel Engine Steyer SE266E40 + Waterjet Kongsberg FF270
Single point lifting system
Length: 7,5m Lightweight: ca 2515kg
Width: 2,75 Max. persons: 8
Scope Design, project management, manufacturing, shock cradles + test, spare parts packages,
documentation, turn-key delivery, training and maintenance contract.
Description C-850 IB: Davit launched fast rescue boat with inboard diesel, stern drive. Equipped with single
point lifting system. The boat is designed to carry a crew of two plus eight passengers
11 (12
)
CONFIDENTIAL
Reference project: New Demostration Boat 2025
Customer Boomeranger Boats
Quantity, Contract date / 2025
Project schedule
Model Boomeranger C-1200 Special Operations Boat
Quick specs 2 x Mercury 600 hp outboard engines
Lenght: 12,0 m Top speed: >55 kn light weight
Range: > 250 nm @ most economical speed Speed: >45 kn fully laden
Scope Design, project management, manufacturing boats, documentation, turn-key delivery
Purpose i. Visit, board, search, and seizure (VBSS) Special Operations Boat for high sea states at
night with night vision googles in freezing or tropical conditions.
ii. 360 Fire Support with 3 weapon stations, fire of two stations into any direction
iii. Combat diver insertion / pick-up
iv. Military SAR
Transport:
i. Road, rail and see transportable on cradle or trailer
ii. Slipway trailable
iii. Helicopter underslung CH-47
iv. Air-transportable
v. Air-droppable A400M, C-130, C-17
12 (12
)
CONFIDENTIAL
1/3
PAKKUMUS
KÕRVALDAMISE ALUSED JA
KVALIFITSEERIMISTINGIMUSED
Viitenumber: 288186
Hankija: Riigi Kaitseinvesteeringute Keskus
(70009764)
Hange: Veesõidukite soetamine
Pakkumus: 543385
Ettevõtja: Boomeranger Boats Oy (0860699-8), roll: peapakkuja
KÕRVALDAMISE ALUSED
RIIGIHANGETE SEADUSE § 95 LG 1 P 1, 4 JA 5
Hankija ei sõlmi raamlepingut ja kõrvaldab hankemenetlusest taotleja, kellel esineb riigihangete
seaduse § 95 lg 1 punktis 1, 4 või 5 kirjeldatud asjaolu.
Kehtib: Kogu hanke kohta
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas taotleja kinnitab, et tal ei esine RHS § 95 lg 1 punktis 1, 4 või 5 nimetatud asjaolu?
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on välisriigis registreeritud ettevõttega, kas on lisatud tõendusmaterjal vastavalt
dokumendis "Explanations exclusion criteria" kirjeldatule?
Vastus: 1_2_Boomeranger Boats Oy-DUNS539711812_21022025_0860699-8.pdf,
1_2_Certificate of paid taxes 02_2025_0860699-8.pdf, 1_2_Criminal
Records_Boomeranger_Jani Leskinen_0860699-8.pdf, 1_2_Statement - referred to §95_1_1 4
or 5 PPA_0860699-8.pdf
RIIGIHANGETE SEADUSE § 95 LG 4 P 3-4 JA § 177 LG 2 P 1-2
Hankija võib kõrvaldada hankemenetlusest taotleja, kellel esineb riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 4 p
3 ja 4 või § 177 lg 2 p 1 ja 2 nimetatud kõrvaldamise alus.
Kehtib: Kogu hanke kohta
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas taotleja kinnitab, et tal ei esine RHS § 95 lg 4 p 3 ja 4 või § 177 lg 2 p 1 ja 2 nimetatud
asjaolu?
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on välisriigis registreeritud ettevõttega, kas on lisatud tõendusmaterjal vastavalt
dokumendis "Explanations exclusion criteria" kirjeldatule?
Vastus: 2_2_Criminal Records Act BB 02_2025_0860699-8.pdf, 2_2_Statement - referred to
§95(4)(3-4) or § 177(2)(1-2) of the Public Procurement Act_0860699-8.pdf
RIIGIHANGETE SEADUSE § 95 LG 4 P 12
Hankija võib kõrvaldada hankemenetlusest taotleja, kellel esineb riigihangete seaduse § 95 lg 4 p
Koostatud 03.03.2025 07:25:21
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
2/3
12 nimetatud kõrvaldamise alus.
Kehtib: Kogu hanke kohta
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas taotleja kinnitab, et tal ei esine RHS § 95 lg 4 p 12 nimetatud asjaolu?
Vastus: Ei
2. Kui tegemist on välisriigis registreeritud ettevõttega, kas on lisatud tõendusmaterjal vastavalt
dokumendis "Explanations exclusion criteria" kirjeldatule?
Vastus: 3_2_Statement - referred to § 95 lg 4 p 12_0860699-8.pdf
KVALIFITSEERIMISTINGIMUSED
C: Tehniline ja kutsealane suutlikkus
LEPINGUTE/TELLIMUSTE NIMEKIRI
Pakkuja peab omama eelnevat kogemust B- ja/või C-kategooria paatide tootmise ja/või
vahendamise ja/või müügi valdkonnas. Piisavaks kogemuseks loetakse, kui pakkuja on
riigihanke algamisele eelneva 60 kuu jooksul nõuetekohaselt täitnud vähemalt ühe vastava
lepingu või tellimuse. Pakkuja PEAB ESITAMA täidetud lepingute/tellimuste andmed, kus ta
PEAB nimetama kõiki lepinguid/tellimusi ERALDI ja MÄRKIMA kõikide täidetud lepingute/
tellimuste kohta vähemalt kirjeldus/liik/nimetus, vastutusala, summa, ajavahemik, tellija nimi,
kontaktisiku nimi, e-post ja telefon. Hankijal on õigus pöörduda lepingute nimekirjas toodud
kontaktisikute poole nõuetekohase täitmise kohta kinnituse saamiseks ning võtta nimetatud
isikutelt lepingute täitmise kohta saadud infot aluseks käesolevas hankemenetluses otsuste
tegemisel. Eduka pakkumuse esitanud pakkuja peab esitama hankija nõudmisel vähemalt 5
tööpäeva pikkuse tähtaja jooksul teise lepingupoole (tellija) kirjaliku kinnituse, et lepingud/
tellimused on pakkuja poolt esitatud andmetele vastavalt teostatud ja et need on täidetud
nõuetekohaselt. Ühispakkujad võivad oma tehnilise ja kutsealase pädevuse tõendamiseks
tugineda teiste ühispakkujate eelnevale kogemusele. Kui pakkuja tugineb teise isiku kogemusele,
tuleb esitada andmed ka teise isiku kohta, et hankija saaks kontrollida RHS § 95 lg 1 sätestatud
teise isiku kõrvaldamise aluseid (RHS § 103 lg 1 ja 5). Pakkuja peab selgelt välja tooma, millist
osa eduka pakkumuse korral hakkab täitma tuginetav isik ning nimetatud isikud peavad
vastutama solidaarselt sõlmitava lepingu täitmise eest.
Kehtib: Ainult järgmiste osade kohta:
Osa 1 - Veesõidukid kogupikkusega 9-12 m
Osa 2 - Veesõidukid kogupikkusega 6-9 m
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas taotleja on täitnud vähemalt ühe tingimustele vastava lepingu? Kas on lisatud tõendav
dokumentatsioon? Has the applicant completed at least one contracts that meet the conditions? Is
supporting documentation attached?
Vastus: 1_1_Boomeranger Boats References 02_2025_CONFIDENTIAL_0860699-8.pdf
LEPINGUTE/TELLIMUSTE NIMEKIRI
Pakkuja peab omama eelnevat kogemust C- ja/või D-kategooria paatide tootmise ja/või
vahendamise ja/või müügi valdkonnas. Piisavaks kogemuseks loetakse, kui pakkuja on
riigihanke algamisele eelneva 60 kuu jooksul nõuetekohaselt täitnud vähemalt ühe vastava
lepingu või tellimuse. Pakkuja PEAB ESITAMA täidetud lepingute/tellimuste andmed, kus ta
PEAB nimetama kõiki lepinguid/tellimusi ERALDI ja MÄRKIMA kõikide täidetud lepingute/
tellimuste kohta vähemalt kirjeldus/liik/nimetus, vastutusala, summa, ajavahemik, tellija nimi,
kontaktisiku nimi, e-post ja telefon. Hankijal on õigus pöörduda lepingute nimekirjas toodud
Koostatud 03.03.2025 07:25:21
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
3/3
kontaktisikute poole nõuetekohase täitmise kohta kinnituse saamiseks ning võtta nimetatud
isikutelt lepingute täitmise kohta saadud infot aluseks käesolevas hankemenetluses otsuste
tegemisel. Eduka pakkumuse esitanud pakkuja peab esitama hankija nõudmisel vähemalt 5
tööpäeva pikkuse tähtaja jooksul teise lepingupoole (tellija) kirjaliku kinnituse, et lepingud/
tellimused on pakkuja poolt esitatud andmetele vastavalt teostatud ja et need on täidetud
nõuetekohaselt. Ühispakkujad võivad oma tehnilise ja kutsealase pädevuse tõendamiseks
tugineda teiste ühispakkujate eelnevale kogemusele. Kui pakkuja tugineb teise isiku kogemusele,
tuleb esitada andmed ka teise isiku kohta, et hankija saaks kontrollida RHS § 95 lg 1 sätestatud
teise isiku kõrvaldamise aluseid (RHS § 103 lg 1 ja 5). Pakkuja peab selgelt välja tooma, millist
osa eduka pakkumuse korral hakkab täitma tuginetav isik ning nimetatud isikud peavad
vastutama solidaarselt sõlmitava lepingu täitmise eest.
Kehtib: Ainult järgmiste osade kohta:
Osa 3 - Veesõidukid kogupikkusega kuni 6 m
Osa 4 - Vesiskuutrid
Ettevõtjalt oodatavad vastused:
1. Kas taotleja on täitnud vähemalt ühe tingimustele vastava lepingu? Kas on lisatud tõendav
dokumentatsioon? Has the applicant completed at least one contracts that meet the conditions? Is
supporting documentation attached?
Vastus: 2_1_Boomeranger Boats References 02_2025_CONFIDENTIAL_0860699-8.pdf
Kokkuvõtlikud kinnitused
Ettevõtja kinnitab, et esitatud teave on täpne ja õige ning et ta on teadlik valeandmete esitamise tagajärgedest.
Ettevõtja kinnitab, et tal on võimalik vajaduse korral viivitamata tema kinnitustele vastavad dokumendid
hankijale esitada.
Ettevõtja kinnitab, et ta on nõus oma kinnitustele vastavate andmete väljastamisega hankijale, kui need andmed
on avalike andmete põhjal hankijale oluliste kulutusteta elektroonilisest andmekogust kättesaadavad.
Kinnituse andja nimi: Jani Leskinen
Koostatud 03.03.2025 07:25:21
https://riigihanked.riik.ee/rhr-web/#/procurement/8178924/general-info
1 (35)
09.06.2025
Boomeranger Boats_Features and Equipment 6-9m Boats
FOREWORD
This document includes marketing images and drawings from Boomeranger and its vendors.
All boat pictures are from existing earlier delivered Boomeranger Boats RHIBs. The images are
included for illustrative purposes only and do not necessarily reflect the actual, offered
product in all aspects. In case of any conflict between the written specification and included
images/pictures/drawings, the written text prevails.
Picture: C-850 WJ
Boomeranger Boats Oy Tel. +358 19 515 805
[email protected]
Troolitie 12, FIN-07910 Valko, Finland www.boomeranger.fi
2 (35)
INTRODUCTION
The Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are based on Boomeranger’s proprietary hull
platforms and solutions which are customized according to customer requirements by
Boomeranger’s in-house design department.
Boats are built by experienced craftsmen, in a purpose-built factory in Finland. There is no
significant outsourced manufacturing involved, the quality controlling mechanisms are
entirely within the company and the highest quality level in all manufacturing stages is
guaranteed.
Picture: C-950 OB
Picture: C-740 OB
3 (35)
Drawing: General arrangement C-750 OB
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 2
1. REGULATIONS AND RULES .............................................................................................................. 5
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 5
3. EXPORT LICENCE .............................................................................................................................. 6
4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................................... 7
5. HULL AND DECK ................................................................................................................................. 8
5.1 Hull, bilge system and hull equipment .................................................................................................. 8
Deck ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
6. COLLAR ............................................................................................................................................. 11
6.1 Inflatable tube ..................................................................................................................................... 11
7. CONSOLE .......................................................................................................................................... 13
7.1 Console structure................................................................................................................................ 13
7.2 Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................... 14
7.3 Bimini arc ............................................................................................................................................ 15
7.4 Console other equipment ................................................................................................................... 17
4 (35)
8. SEATS ................................................................................................................................................ 18
9. FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 19
9.1 Fuel tank ............................................................................................................................................. 19
9.2 Self-Sealing and non-explosive tank .................................................................................................. 19
10. PROPULSION AND STEERING SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 20
10.1 Engines........................................................................................................................................... 20
10.2 Steering system .............................................................................................................................. 21
10.3 Emergency shut-off switch ............................................................................................................. 21
11. ELECTRIC SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 21
11.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 21
11.2 Batteries ......................................................................................................................................... 21
11.3 Cable conduits ................................................................................................................................ 22
11.4 Shore power system....................................................................................................................... 22
11.5 Marking of cables ........................................................................................................................... 23
11.6 Navigation lights ............................................................................................................................. 23
11.7 Console and deck lights ................................................................................................................. 23
11.8 Black-out switch ............................................................................................................................. 23
11.9 Search light .................................................................................................................................... 23
11.10 Work lights ...................................................................................................................................... 23
12. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................... 24
12.1 VHF radio and intercom ................................................................................................................. 24
12.2 Tactical radios Installation .............................................................................................................. 24
12.3 Antennas ........................................................................................................................................ 24
12.4 Antenna arch or mast ..................................................................................................................... 24
13. NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 26
13.1 Navigation System ......................................................................................................................... 26
14. LIFTING SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 27
14.1 4- point lifting .................................................................................................................................. 27
15. PAINTS AND COLOUR ...................................................................................................................... 27
16. PLATES AND TAGS........................................................................................................................... 28
17. ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................. 28
17.1 ProBoatGear .................................................................................................................................. 28
17.2 Boarding equipment ....................................................................................................................... 29
17.3 Console weather protection ........................................................................................................... 31
17.4 Storage solutions ............................................................................................................................ 31
17.5 Safety Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 33
17.6 Other equipment and accessories ................................................................................................. 33
18. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 34
18.1 Road and slipway trailer ................................................................................................................. 34
18.2 Storage cover ................................................................................................................................. 34
5 (35)
1. REGULATIONS AND RULES
The boat shall be built according to Eurofins Scientific Expert Services Guidelines for
Commercial Craft version 2021, Category C (significant wave height up to 2m, wind force and
Beaufort wind force 6), length less than 24 m. For the hull dimensioning according to Category
B (significant wave height up to 4m, wind force and Beaufort wind force 8). Stability and loading
are according to the ISO 6185-3 or 4 standard. With maximum crew of 14 pers. the design
category is C.
Project-specific rules and certificates may apply.
The company holds valid ISO9001 and ISO14001 quality management system certificates.
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION
Warranty period
Hull 60 months
Tube 12 months
Propulsion system 24 months or 1000 operating hours*
Communication & navigation equipment 12 months
Seats 12 months
Other equipment 12 months
Construction work 24 months
Spare part installation 12 months
*whichever comes first and depending of the engine model
Warranty is subject to maintenance of all the components as per manuals and instructions
during the warranty period.
Warranty period starts from accepted delivery of the boat.
6 (35)
3. EXPORT LICENCE
The product is categorized as a military product due to the equipment installed. Delivery of this
product requires an export license from respective authorities. For the licensing process, end-
user certificates are required to be delivered prior or during the contract signing process.
7 (35)
4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Main Dimensions
Length over all 6 – 8,99 m
Beam over all c.2,6 – 3,1 m
Beam in transport with deflated tubes c.1,8 – 2,4 m
Hull draft* c. 0,8 m
Height max (antennas folded)* c. 4,0 m
Light weight* TBD
Performance
Performance at light weight in SeaState c. 3 - 45 knots
0
Range c. 90 - 160 Nm
Fuel tank size TBD
Propulsion
Engines Mercury Outboard engines
Power TBD
Propeller type TBD
Environmental conditions for operation and storage
Ambient temperature -10°C to +45°C
Sea water temperature 0°C to +35°C
The OEMs instructions for use and maintenance must be followed to ensure the proper functioning
of the equipment. Temperature-related instructions are compiled in the boat's user manual.
8 (35)
5. HULL AND DECK
5.1 Hull, bilge system and hull equipment
The hull is a conventional deep-V mono hull with spray rails with a 22-24 degrees dead rise at
the transom to minimize physical impacts on the personnel and for logical behaviour in rough
weather conditions and different loading conditions. Deep V-shape hull combined with a
robust structure translates to a softer ride with lower peak accelerations in waves, and the
ability to travel at a higher speed in rough conditions.
9 (35)
Bilge System
The boat is equipped with electric and manual bilge pumps.
Electric bilge pumps can be operated in three modes:
i. On automatic mode there is a level switch which turns on the pump whenever the
water level in the compartment rises above the set threshold. It automatically turns
the pump off when the water level has dropped below the pre-set level and indicates
visual and audible alarm.
ii. The manual override mode in user operated from a switch in the dashboard.
iii. The system can also be turned off for covert and tactical reasons.
The pumps can be running dry without damage on the pumps.
Hull equipment
Keel can be protected with metal keel
guard. Another option is integrated
casted PU-keel flush with hull.
Heavy duty bow ring for trailering,
mooring or towing. The bow ring is
recessed to avoid getting stuck to
protruding objects.
D-rubber profiles to protect the edges
and nose of the hull.
Transport tie-downs points
Two Heavy duty D-rings in the aft for
towing or trailer lashing.
10 (35)
Deck
The deck is manufactured from glass fibre using vinyl ester resin, the core material being high
density PVC foam. The deck is bonded into the hull beams to form a solid structure.
The deck is positioned above
water level and has two draining
outlets that allow it to self-drain
through the transom. The
outlets are equipped with heavy-
duty sleeves to prevent
backflush.
The deck is equipped with a
deck track system. The deck
track system allows the seats,
wind-up boarding poles and
rigging, cargo tie-downs and
other equipment to be easily
replaced for re-configuration of
the deck area (front and aft of
the console) without any
special tools. Lashing points
can be attached on the track
where needed.
11 (35)
Lashing points on the sides of
the deck.
The deck will have anti-slip
protection.
6. COLLAR
6.1 Inflatable tube
The RHIB is provided with a round air-filled tube. Additional foam cover can be added in the
tube or only in bow section.
Main characteristics
Rules The inflatable tube material, volume and
compartmentation fulfil requirements of EN
ISO 6185-3 or 4. RIB tube collar material,
production and testing fulfil requirements of
ISO 6185-3 or 4.
Material and density The inflatable tube is manufactured from Orca
866 fabric (equivalent to Hypalon*) which is
designed for heavy duty applications. The density
of the fabric is 1500 g/m2 (1670 dtex).
12 (35)
Chambers The tube consists of separate circular buoyancy
chambers, each equipped with filling and over
pressure valves.
Equipment
Heavy duty EPDM rubbing strakes on the
whole length to protect the tube from
side impacts. The material is non-
staining. The rubbing strake is
adhesively installed, and it is easily
replaceable if damaged or worn out.
Flush or profiled.
Tube is fitted with non-slip surface on the
upper side in all walking areas.
Lifeline as per customer requirement.
Pouches and handles
13 (35)
7. CONSOLE
7.1 Console structure
The boat has a steering and navigation console manufactured of advanced laminate sandwich
structure with PVC-core. Inside the console are two watertight electric equipment
compartments, each with a watertight hatch on the front side of the console.
14 (35)
7.2 Instrumentation
Steering wheel and engine controls are ergonomically located to the reach of the driver.
Navigation electronics are located to the reach of driver and/or navigator. The console has
provisions for Government Furnished Equipment and a mock-up of the console will be created
to determine the final equipment layout configuration in collaboration with the customer.
The console has the alarm switch panel for critical systems. The panel has visual and audible
signal for each function which can be turned off for covert operations. Equipment indicators
lights are mainly dimmable and lights which can´t be dimmed, are covered.
The console has 2 or 3 screens.
15 (35)
7.3 Bimini arc
The console is equipped with a bimini arc for navigation and communication equipment. The
arc is robust design and dimensioned for the specified operation conditions and loading. The
arc has hinges, gas springs, and quick locks to easily configure the boat for transport.
The final layout of the equipment will be decided after the EMC evaluation.
16 (35)
17 (35)
7.4 Console other equipment
Grabrails
Air conditioning Console air intakes and outlets are positioned and
protected to prevent any water or spray to enter inside
the console. The ventilation system has air blower for
forced circulation which can be operated when the
boat is sailing or connected to shore power. The
blowers are controlled by dual thermostat-hygrostat
with manual override function.
The console has an electrical heater with thermostat-
hygrostat to keep the compartment heated in low
temperatures or high humidity conditions.
The console has transparent
polycarbonate wind screen to
deflect wind and rain efficiently. The
wind screen can be tilted down for
transportation.
18 (35)
8. SEATS
The boat is primarily equipped with shock-mitigating seats from Ullman Dynamics, Shoxs, or
Shockwave. All models used are constructed from non-corrosive materials and are designed to
withstand the harsh marine environment. Each seat can be fitted with a protective cover that
guards against heavy wear and tear.
Seats are mounted on cargo tracks, allowing for flexible layout configurations. The quick track
mount system enables longitudinal adjustment without the need for special tools, making seat
repositioning fast and efficient.
19 (35)
9. FUEL SYSTEM
9.1 Fuel tank
The fuel tank is one unit which is divided longitudinally in two separate volumes and
manufactured of aluminium, carefully cleaned and pressure tested before installation. The
tanks are located below deck and waterline, under a full-size deck hatch which can be
removed for maintenance, inspection and repair. The tanks have hatches for inspection and
cleaning and can be removed for repair.
Both tanks can supply fuel to the engines together, or only one side can be in use. Tanks have
internal splash walls.
The engine instrumentation in the dashboard includes an analogue fuel level gauge with a simple,
easy-to-read scale. The fuel level sensor/gauge is calibrated according to the real (non-
rectangular) shape of the fuel tank.
9.2 Self-Sealing and non-explosive tank
The boat’s fuel tanks can be equipped with a self-sealing system. These tanks are surrounded by
multi-layered materials, including rubber compounds that swell upon contact with fuel. When
20 (35)
penetrated by a 7.62 mm round, the material expands to seal the bullet hole, effectively
preventing fuel leakage.
Additionally, the tanks can be fitted with non-
explosive filler material. This filler reduces the risk of
explosion by preventing fuel vapor buildup and
suppressing ignition in the event of a projectile
impact.
10. PROPULSION AND STEERING SYSTEM
10.1 Engines
Propulsion
Engines 2 x Mercury Outboard engines
Power TBD
Fuel Gasoline
Propeller Counter rotating
Redundancy Engines can be used independently, allowing
driving even if one fails.
21 (35)
10.2 Steering system
The engine steering system is either electro-hydraulic or electric, operated via a tilting steering
wheel. The system is power assisted, ensuring smooth and responsive control under all
operating conditions.
10.3 Emergency shut-off switch
An emergency shut-off switch (the “dead man’s switch”) is located to proximity of the driver.
On release, the engine will automatically shut down. Wireless system can be used.
11. ELECTRIC SYSTEM
11.1 General
The boat has a two pole 12 VDC electricity system. 12 V consumers get their power through
two pole automatic circuit breakers, which are located inside the steering console.
Consumers are controlled via water tight (IP65 or higher in open deck areas), heavy duty two
pole switches.
All electronic equipment and connectors exposed to elements are waterproof to at least IP66
to withstand condensation and corrosion.
11.2 Batteries
Start and consumption batteries are located in the technical storage in a protected casing,
charged by the engine generators and are equipped with two pole main switches.
22 (35)
i. 50 Ah Optima Red Top high power, vibration-resistant sealed lead acid batteries for
starting the engines.
ii. 55 Ah Optima Yellow Top high power, vibration-resistant deep cycle sealed lead acid
battery for general consumption.
iii. Switch to connect batteries parallel in emergency situation.
11.3 Cable conduits
Power cables run in a separate conduit from the signal cables on either side of the boat to
minimize the interference.
11.4 Shore power system
Shore cable connection with automatic circuit breaker and battery charger (230VAC / 12VDC)
for charging the starting and consumption batteries. The power connection is for 1-phase
110/220V 50/60Hz 16 amp supply and equipped with galvanic isolator to separate boat and
shore sides. While connected to shore power, it is possible to charge the batteries and
heat/cool the console.
23 (35)
11.5 Marking of cables
Cables are marked on both end for easy identification and maintenance.
11.6 Navigation lights
The boat is fitted with Consolite NVIS-compatible navigation lights (according to COLREG) and
a mast light.
11.7 Console and deck lights
The console, deck and console technical compartment have LED light. And the console switch
board has dimmable backlights. NVIS-compatible lights can be use.
11.8 Black-out switch
All lights, where possible, are equipped with a blackout switch. If this is not feasible, the light
will be provided with protection, such as from Hypalon. (Some manufacturers' devices may
have lights that cannot be bypassed or are not permitted to be bypassed.)
11.9 Search light
Handheld search lights will be provided. The console had a power output socket for the light.
11.10 Work lights
Powerful LED-lights on the console and aft mast/arch to illuminate the surroundings.
24 (35)
12. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
12.1 VHF radio and intercom
The boat is fitted with marine VHF radio and loudhailer (if necessary compatible with
customers intercom system (GFE)).
12.2 Tactical radios Installation
The radio compartment is located inside the console. The installation includes cabling and
installation of antennas. Actual radios and vehicle adapters to be supplied as Government
Furnished Equipment (GFE).
The grounding of the radios is integrated into the hull of the boat.
12.3 Antennas
A more detailed antenna specification requires a refined equipment list including GFE
equipment.
An EMC assessment will be conducted on the vessels before the final placement of the
antennas.
12.4 Antenna arch or mast
The boat has an antenna arch in front of the engines for navigation and communication
equipment. The arc includes also the flagpole. The arc is of robust design and dimensioned for
the specified operation conditions and loading.
25 (35)
The arch is hinged and can be lowered to deck level, with secure quick locks for easy
configuration of the boat for lifting, transportation purposes or airdrop roles.
Optionally the arch can be replaced with a mast which is attached to the front of the engine
and is hinged forward in the same way.
26 (35)
13. NAVIGATION SYSTEM
13.1 Navigation System
The boat’s main navigation system is based on multifunction displays controlled by separate
control panels. The control panels are installed easy on reach so that there’s no need to bend
and reach towards the displays while driving. Every display is an independent unit and
connected to system sensors directly to ensure redundancy in case of display malfunction.
The system is integrated (but not limited) to;
• GPS antenna
• broad band navigation radar
• AIS
• forward looking sonar and water temperature sensor
• wind speed and air temperature sensor
• compass
27 (35)
14. LIFTING SYSTEM
14.1 4- point lifting
The boat is fitted with heavy duty 4-point lifting eyes and delivered with certified lifting sling set.
The equipment is dimensioned and intended for lifting the boat with delivered items and a full
fuel tank.
The lifting points are located well off the work deck area so that they don’t disturb operation on
open deck when they are not in use.
Sling lengths will be minimized allowing the operation in confined spaces, TBD with the
Customer.
15. PAINTS AND COLOUR
High quality, commercial paint system will be applied to all boat parts and structures. Paint
systems comply with environmental legislation.
Colour of the boat is black or grey. Small parts will be black, grey or mutually agreed colour.
Hull, deck and console To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
28 (35)
Collar To be defined with the customer (available Hypalon
fabrics)
Anti-slip hypalon for the collar To be defined with the customer (available Hypalon
fabrics)
Anti-slip area of the deck To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
Seats Black or grey.
Metal parts (visible from 50m To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
distance)
Boat cover(s) To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
16. PLATES AND TAGS
The boat has a permanently affixed builder's plate according to relevant ISO standard and
customer requirements. Also, robust and durable tags and tally plates are fitted in appropriate
places. Text, language, colours and positions and language to be mutually agreed with the
customer.
Switches, valves and hazards are marked with nameplates.
17. ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
17.1 ProBoatGear
Over the years Boomeranger has developed a range of tactical equipment required in Special
Operations Boats operations, which are not available on the market. This product range is, named
29 (35)
as the ProBoatGear™ product range. Several applications are presented below. Additionally,
equipment from trusted partners like REBS boarding equipment are available.
17.2 Boarding equipment
ProBoatGear™ Boarding pole
support on bimini arc and
console and
bow boarding pole man back
rest on console
Boarding pole support on aft
targa arc or mast
REBS 20 m Skypole system
(quoted on request)
30 (35)
Boarding pole transport straps
on collar
ProBoatGear™ Boarding pole
transport bracket for rails.
ProBoatGear™ Boarding pole
support bracket for rails.
31 (35)
17.3 Console weather protection
The boat is fitted with a removable canvas
weather protection that covers coxswain and
navigator and next row of seats behind them.
The cover has large transparent screen on
both sides and aft for good visibility. The cover
is supported by the bimini arch and separate
telescopic vertical aft and longitudinal poles.
The cover is designed to be erected/removed
within few minutes, and it comes with a bag
for stowing.
Alternatively, or additionally a weather protection cover like below can be provided (quoted on
request).
17.4 Storage solutions
Following ProBoatGear™ equipment are quoted on request.
Pelicases with ProBoatGear™
deck rail attachments.
32 (35)
ProBoatGear™ ammo and
storage boxes (small and
large).
ProBoatGear™ diving tank
rack.
ProBoatGear™ deck rail tie-
downs.
ProBoatGear™ dighny engine
rack.
33 (35)
17.5 Safety Equipment
Liferafts
Pneumatic line thrower
Jason’s cradle
17.6 Other equipment and accessories
The boat will be delivered with following equipment, tools and accessories:
i. Basic tool set
ii. Anchors and chain
iii. Mooring ropes
iv. Towing line with reel
v. Fenders
vi. Drift anchor
34 (35)
18. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
18.1 Road and slipway trailer
A road trailer capable of slipway launch is quoted separately on request.
18.2 Storage cover
The cover, made of lightweight, water-repellent Tempotest-material, is breathable and easily
fits onto the boat with two people. The cover has several adjustable tie-down straps to firmly
secure and adjust the cover over the boat and to prevent sagging. The cover has hatches for
storage maintenance access.
Separate console covers are also available (quoted on request).
35 (35)
END OF DOCUMENT
Marine Safety &
Security System
FOR MERCURY® SMARTCRAFT® ENGINES
Confidence
at hand
The 1st Mate Marine Safety and Security
System for Mercury® SmartCraft® Engines puts
confidence in the palm of your hand with man
overboard alerts, distress messaging and
theft-deterrent functionality. Utilizing wearable
fobs and your mobile device, 1st Mate combines
boat safety with convenience.
Man overboard monitoring
Theft Deterrent functionality
Distress Message capability
2
Man Overboard
Monitoring
1st Mate utilizes wearable fobs for boat captain
and up to seven passengers. These wearables
connect to a mobile device and ensure that if
Man Overboard
the captain falls overboard, the engines will
Monitoring
stop, an alarm will sound and alerts will be sent
via the 1st Mate mobile app.
1stSimilarly,
Mate utilizes wearable falls
if a passenger fobs overboard,
for boat captain
andthe
upcaptain
to seven passengers. These wearables
will be alerted and given the
connect to a mobile device and ensure that if
passenger’s GPS location via the app.
the captain falls overboard, the engine(s) will
stop, an alarm will sound and alerts will be sent
via the 1st Mate mobile app, thanks to direct
integration with the vessel’s propulsion system.
Similarly, if a passenger falls overboard,
the captain will be alerted and given the
passenger’s GPS location via the app.
4
How 1st Mate Works
If the CAPTAIN If a PASSENGER
wearing a fob wearing a fob
falls overboard: falls overboard:
• Engine(s) stop when fob is
submerged in water • Audible alarm from boat hub
and mobile device app
• Audible alarm from boat hub
and mobile device app
• Location marked via GPS on
• Location marked via GPS on app and vessel multifunction
app and vessel multifunction displays (if equipped)
displays (if equipped)
• Alerts sent to mobile app • Alerts sent to mobile app
and wearables of connected and wearables of connected
passenger(s) captain and other passenger(s)
• Instructions provided on mobile
• Directions provided on
app of connected passenger(s)
mobile app to location where
on how to return to location
passenger went overboard
where captain went overboard
6
Theft Deterrent
System (TDS)
TDS locks your engine(s) to prevent unauthorized use.
Once you’re ready to get back behind the wheel, your
engine(s) can easily be unlocked via the proximity of the
captain’s wearable or by using the 1st Mate mobile app.
Distress
Message
If a boat captain (driver wearing
the captain’s fob) falls overboard
and can’t get back onboard, or
passengers can’t return the boat
to the captain, 1st Mate will
send a distress message to your
emergency contact(s).
Distress message is sent after
a countdown timer expires or a
request for help is made. Message
includes location, heading, date and
time of the “man overboard” event.
8
1st Mate Marine Safety and Security
System for Mercury® SmartCraft®
Engines is compatible with Mercury
SmartCraft engines 40hp and higher.
Captain Passenger
Wearables Wearables Vessel Hub
Passenger Carabiner Clip
Captain Carabiner Clip
Passenger Wristband
Additional Features
Captain Wristband
Passenger Fob
Captain Fob
Harness
Disable in Neutral
Hub
A setting that users can configure that
turns off alerts if engine(s) is in neutral. Single Engine Kit
∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007933
TDS Functionality Dual Engine Kit
∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
High-idle operation for service access 8M6007934
to the vessel without unlocking it. If
Triple Engine Kit
compatible Mercury SmartCraft engines ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007937
are removed from a boat, they are
rendered nonfunctional without the 4, 5 or 6 Engine Kit
∙ ∙ ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007938
unlocking “handshake” from the 1st
Mate hub. Captain
Wearable Fob Kit ∙ ∙ ∙
8M6007943
Over the Air Updates
1st Mate is capable of updating (software
Passenger
updates or add new features) Hub Wearable Fob Kit ∙ ∙ ∙
software and wearables via mobile app. 8M6007944
Normal data rates apply, per individual mobile
service provider plan. Captain Wristband
& Carabiner Clip ∙ ∙
8M6007945
Mobile Device App Interface
App is the primary interface to set up/ Passenger Wristband
& Carabiner Clip ∙ ∙
configure and view status of the system.
8M6007946
10
For additional information
and engine compatibility visit 1stMate.net
1st Mate is not a replacement
for safety lanyards or personal flotation devices.
© 2020 Brunswick Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 90-8M0173779 5/2020
5.7L V10
350-
400HP
Verado ®
THE EVOLUTION OF PREMIUM PERFORMANCE
With the strength of the outboard segment’s first V10
naturally aspirated powerhead, 350 and 400hp Verado
outboards deliver extraordinary power and capabilities so you
can confidently explore beyond the horizon. Take command
of the water with innovative SmartCraft® technologies and
advanced digital controls that make boating effortless.
Exceptionally smooth, quiet and refined, V10 Verado
outboards transform your boating experience.
MORE INNOVATIONS AND OPTIONS
• High-displacement 5.7-liter powerhead makes tackling tough
conditions and moving heavy loads a breeze
• Performance-inspired quad-cam design propels boats ahead with
exceptional speed and acceleration
• Rugged, engine-specific gearcase optimizes handling and control
• Class-leading 150-amp alternator swiftly charges battery systems
to support onboard electronics
• Large-diameter Revolution X™ prop enhances steering authority,
efficiency and acceleration
LEARN MORE AT MERCURYMARINE.COM/V10
MERCURY VERADO:
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE
AND HANDLING
Agile, quiet and strong, Mercury V10 Verado® outboards shift
your expectations of what high-horsepower performance feels
like. They come to life with impressively responsive power,
propelling you forward with faster acceleration than any other
outboards in their class. Handling is effortless thanks to intuitive
Digital Throttle & Shift controls and an advanced steering system
that react instantly to your commands. It’s an unrivaled driving
experience that only Verado outboards can provide.
WEIGHT (IN POUNDS)
SENSATIONAL POWER IN V10 Verado
A COMPACT PACKAGE
These outboards were meticulously sculpted and refined
so they can mount as close as 26 inches apart, perfect for 350hp Competitor A
multi-engine configurations or repowering your favorite boat.
A durable aluminum engine block and weight-saving cowl
425hp Competitor B
materials further enhance performance by minimizing weight
on the transom.
200 400 600 800 1000
Weight comparison based on XL model outboards.
SMOOTH, QUIET, REFINED COMPETITOR A COMPETITOR B MERCURY V10 VERADO
Industry-leading technologies that minimize
noise, vibration and harshness ensure that 56% quieter than Competitor A
V10 Verado outboards deliver an unsurpassed
boating experience that delights the senses
without overpowering them. At idle, cruise and 45% quieter than
wide-open throttle, they’re quieter than all Competitor A
other outboards in their class.
Amplitude
EFFICIENT ALL-AROUND
PERFORMANCE
42% quieter
V10 Verado outboards are calibrated to than
Competitor B
deliver full performance on 87-octane 25% quieter than
Competitor B
fuel, with a host of efficiency-enhancing
features such as a hydrodynamic gearcase,
engine-specific Revolution X™ prop, closed-
600 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400
loop fuel system and Advanced Range
Engine RPM
Optimization (ARO) that optimize fuel
economy to extend your range on the water. Test conducted in Mercury Noise, Vibration, Harshness Technical Center.
INTUITIVE, INNOVATIVE FEATURES
The Adaptive Speed Control A class-leading 150-amp When needed, the idle charge
feature lets you maintain engine alternator swiftly charges onboard battery management system
rpm despite changes in load or batteries and intelligently supports works for you by monitoring
conditions. Climbing large swells the boat’s electrical system to battery voltage and adjusting
is easier. Cruising at low speeds is help ensure that no matter what engine rpm at idle to boost
smoother. Carving out tight turns amenities you bring on board, you’ll alternator output.
is effortless. You just point the always have the power you need.
bow toward your destination, and
Verado takes it from there.
JOYSTICK PILOTING ADVANCED SOUND
FOR OUTBOARDS CONTROL
(JPO)
Choose the sound that
Available for multi-engine moves you by toggling
boats, the JPO system between a whisper-quiet
provides fingertip control to exhaust tone or a throatier
move forward, sideways or growl at startup and idle.
even rotate in place for easy,
confident docking.
ADVANCED RUGGED GEARCASE
MIDSECTION (AMS)
An engine-specific
hydrodynamic gearcase
The rugged, refined AMS
optimizes efficiency, while
mounting system cradles
allowing the use of large-
the engine, minimizing
diameter props that enhance
vibration and providing
low-speed control and provide
comfort in a class all its own.
exceptional hole shots when
it’s time to move.
PREMIUM PERFORMANCE,
PREMIUM STYLING
Four sleek color options let you decide
what performance looks like. You can
further personalize your engine with
Color Accent Panels in five colors or a
customizable paint-ready option.
Pearl Fusion Cold Fusion Warm Fusion Phantom Black
LEGENDARY DURABILITY
Heavy-duty components built to tackle the toughest conditions. Advanced corrosion-
preventive finishes to withstand the rigors of saltwater. And the intelligent Mercury Engine
Guardian system, which monitors engine functions to help make sure you get home.
Verado outboards deliver performance you can trust.
EASY MAINTENANCE
• An electronic oil sensor notifies you of the oil level on a
connected multi-function display.
• Industry-exclusive top-cowl access door eliminates hassle,
allowing you to top off oil without removing the cowl.
• Color-coded touch points speed up routine checks to get
you underway faster.
HORSEPOWER 350 400
WOT RPM 5800-6400 5800-6400
Engine Type V10 V10
Displacement 5.7L (349 CID) 5.7L (349 CID)
Induction Naturally aspirated, performance-tuned intake manifold Naturally aspirated, performance-tuned intake manifold
Starting Electric start with SmartStart protection Electric start with SmartStart protection
Gear Ratio 2.08:1 2.08:1
Alternator 150 amp (1890 watt) 150 amp (1890 watt)
Trim System Power trim and tilt Power trim and tilt
Dry Weight* 695lbs (316kg) 695lbs (316kg)
Electro-hydraulic power steering Electro-hydraulic power steering
Steering
JPO (optional) JPO (optional)
20 in (508mm) 20 in (508mm)
25 in (635mm) 25 in (635mm)
Shaft Length
30 in (762mm) 30 in (762mm)
35 in (889mm) 35 in (889mm)
*Dry weight: Lightest-version model, excludes engine oil, rigging, hardware.
WARRANTY | Mercury Verado outboards come with a standard three-year limited warranty
and industry-leading three-year corrosion warranty.
©2024 MERCURY MARINE. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT PERMISSION IS PROHIBITED. MER-5804 3/24
Halo20, 20+ and 24
Dome Radars
Installation Manual
ENGLISH
www.lowrance.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.bandg.com
Disclaimer
! Warning: Refer to important safety information in the user app guides, product
documentation and review all warnings, limitations, and disclaimers before using this
product.
This product is not a substitute for proper training and prudent seamanship. It is the owner’s
sole responsibility to install and use the equipment in a manner that will not cause accidents,
personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is solely responsible for
observing maritime safety practices.
Navigational features that appear in this guide are not a substitute for proper training and
prudent seamanship. They do not replace a human navigator and SHOULD NOT be relied on
as a sole or primary source of navigation. It is the operator’s sole responsibility to use more
than one navigational methods to ensure the route suggested by the system is safe.
BRUNSWICK CORPORATION AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, BRANCHES AND AFFILIATES DISCLAIM ALL
LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A WAY THAT MAY CAUSE ACCIDENTS, DAMAGE
OR THAT MAY VIOLATE THE LAW.
This document represents the product as at the time of publishing. Brunswick Corporation
and its subsidiaries, branches and affiliates reserve the right to make changes to the product
and/or specifications at any time without notice. Please contact your nearest distributor if you
require any further assistance.
Governing language
This statement, any instruction manuals, user guides and other information relating to
the product (Documentation) may be translated to, or has been translated from, another
language (Translation). In the event of any conflict between any Translation of the
Documentation, the English language version of the Documentation will be the official
version of the Documentation.
Copyright
© 2023 Navico Group. All Rights Reserved. Navico Group is a division of Brunswick
Corporation.
Warranty
This product’s warranty is supplied as a separate document.
Compliance
Declarations of conformity
The relevant declarations of conformity are available at: www.lowrance.com,
www.simrad-yachting.com and www.bandg.com.
Europe
This product complies with CE under the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU.
United Kingdom
This product complies with UKCA under The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
United States of America
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
! Warning: The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
| Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |3
RF emissions notice
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This device’s antenna must be installed in accordance with provided instructions, and it must
be operated with minimum 0.1 m (0.33 ft) for Halo20+ and Halo24, and 0.0 m (0.0 ft) for
Halo20 spacing between the antennas and all person’s body (excluding extremities of hands,
wrist and feet) during operation.
¼ Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that of the receiver is
connected
• Consult the dealer or an experienced technician for help
Japan
¼ Note: The following statement applies to the Halo24 Radar only.
V0N
V = Emission of pulses: Which is a combination of the foregoing or is produced by other
means
0 = No modulating signal
N = No information transmitted
Q0N
Q = Emission of pulses: In which the carrier is angle-modulated during the period of pulse
0 = No modulating signal
N = No information transmitted
Canada
This product complies with ISED (Innovation, Science and Economic Development) Canada’s
license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et.
(2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnemen.
Industry Canada Statement
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna
of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should
be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that
necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut
fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé
4| | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain
de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépassepas l’intensité
nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model number if
Category I) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed
below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each
antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the
maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son
numéro de modèle s’il fait partie du matériel de catégorie I) a été approuvé par Industrie
Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d’antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain
admissible maximal et l’impédance requise pour chaque type d’antenne. Les types d’antenne
non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont
strictement interdits pour l’exploitation de l’émetteur.
Max. permissible antenna gain
Halo Antennas Impedance
(dBi)
Halo 20 Radar
22.5 dBi
Halo20+ Radar Not applicable
Halo24 Radar 23.5 dBi
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure
System 100 W/m2 occupational safe 10 W /m2 public safe
distance distance
Halo20 Radar 0.0 m (0.0 ft)
Halo20+ Radar 0.0 m (0.0 ft) 0.1 m (0.33 ft)
Halo24 Radar 0.1 m (0.33 ft)
Safe distances as measured by an independent laboratory.
Trademarks
®Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off, and ™ common law marks.
Visit www.navico.com/intellectual-property to review the global trademark rights and
accreditations for Navico Group and other entities.
• Navico® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Lowrance® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Simrad® is a trademark of Kongsberg Maritime AS, licensed to Navico Group.
• B&G® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Halo® is a trademark of Navico Group.
• Tef-Gel® is a trademark of Ultra Safety Systems, Inc.
| Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |5
Contents
7 Introduction
7 Parts included
8 Installation
8 Wiring guidelines
9 Choose the scanner location
10 Considerations for roof mounting
13 Wiring overview
14 Scanner connection
15 Installing the scanner
16 Ethernet connection
18 Power connection
19 Power control connection
20 Setup and configuration
21 Maintenance
22 Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G Radar
22 RI-10 Radar interface box and wiring
23 Troubleshooting
23 Status LED
23 Error messages
24 Error codes
25 Dimensional drawings
25 Halo dome radar dimensions
27 Technical specifications
27 Halo20/20+ Radar
28 Halo24 Radar
29 Accessories
6| Contents | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
1
Introduction
Parts included
Inst
ENG
Installatio
LISH
ENG
Installati n M
LISH
ENG
Installatioon Maanual
LISH
ENG alla n M nua
LISH
tion an l
Ma ual
nua
l
ba
nd and and and
g.c g.c g.c g.c
om om om om
b b b
A B C
D E F G
A Halo Radar
B Mounting bolts and washers
Hex bolt (M8x30), 4x
Flat washer, 4x
Spring washer, 4x
C Documentation pack
D Interconnection cable
E Ethernet adapter RJ45 to 5-pin, 1.5m (4.9 ft)
F Waterproof cable boot for interconnection cable RJ45 plug
G Cable retainer kit
Cable retainer clip, 2x
Screw (Phillips drive), 4x
Introduction | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |7
2
Installation
¼ Note: The Halo Radar is factory sealed. Removing the cover will void the factory warranty.
¼ Note: If replacing an already installed Broadband 3G/4G Radar, refer to ”Replacing a Broadband
3G/4G Radar” on page 22.
Wiring guidelines
Safely pulling the interconnection cable
• Connect a mouse line to the outer jacket of the radar interconnection cable so that the
strain of pulling is transferred to the stronger outer jacket of the cable. Use some small
cable ties to secure the mouse line to the outer jacket as well if there is sufficient clearance.
• Tape the conductors and tape the RJ45 connector to the mouse line so that it does not
get caught and bent backwards.
B A B
A C B B
A Mouse line
B Electrical tape
C Cable tie
Do:
• make drip and service loops
• use cable-ties on all cables to keep them secure
• solder/crimp and insulate all wiring connections if extending or shortening the cables
• use the appropriate length of ready-made interconnection cable
• leave room adjacent to device to ease plugging and unplugging of connectors
Do not:
• make sharp bends in the cables
• run cables in a way that allows water to flow down into the connectors
• run the data cables adjacent to radar, transmitter, or large/high current carrying cables or
high frequency signal cables
• run cables so they interfere with mechanical systems
• run cables over sharp edges or burrs
• attach a mouse line directly to the Ethernet cable or connector
! Warning: Before starting the installation, be sure to turn electrical power off. If power
is left on or turned on during the installation, fire, electrical shock, or other serious injury
may occur.
! Warning: The positive supply wire (red) should always be connected to (+) DC with
the supplied fuse or a circuit breaker (closest available to fuse rating). Be sure that the
voltage of the power supply is compatible with the unit.
8| Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Choose the scanner location
The radar’s ability to detect targets greatly depends on the position of its scanner. The ideal
location for the scanner is high above the vessel’s keel line where there are no obstacles.
When you are deciding on the location, consider the following:
A higher installation position increases the radar ranging distance, but it also increases the
minimum range around the vessel where targets cannot be detected. Higher installation
height also reduces the ability of the radar to detect targets in sea clutter.
The length of the interconnection cable supplied with your radar is sufficient for the majority
of installations. If you think you’ll need a longer cable, consult your dealer before installation.
Optional cable lengths are 5 m (16 ft) 10 m (33 ft), 20 m (65.5 ft) and 30 m (98 ft).
If you mount the scanner on a pedestal or base, ensure that rain and sea spray can drain away
rapidly, and the breather hole (A) in the base can operate.
A
The scanner should, where possible, be installed parallel to the line of the keel.
Do not install the scanner:
• directly on to a large flat roof area. Use a pedestal to elevate the scanner so the radar beam
clears the roof line. Refer to “Considerations for roof mounting” on page 10
• too high up (eg at the top of a mast), which may cause degradation of the radar picture
over short ranges
• close to lamps or exhaust outlets. The heat emissions may damage the dome. Soot and
smoke will degrade the performance of the radar
• close to the antennas of other equipment such as direction finders, VHF antennas, GPS
equipment, as it may cause or be subject to interference
• where a large obstruction (such as an exhaust stack) is at the same level as the beam, the
obstruction is likely to generate false echoes and/or shadow zones
• where it will be subjected to strong vibrations. Vibrations could degrade the performance
or service life of the radar.
! Warning: Never store your Halo radar upside down unprotected in the rain as it
will cause water ingress. If the radar must be inverted, you should protect it by placing a
waterproof cover over the entire radar or by shielding the entire cable channel area (and
beyond) with the mounting plate or auxiliary plate.
! Warning: For dual radar installations, ensure the Halo Radar is not installed in the
beam of a pulse radar at any time.
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual |9
Compass TX
Halo Radar
(6 ft) Min.
2 m
Pulse Radar
STBY
0.7 m (2.3 ft) Min.
Minimum distance to install near the Do not install the Halo Radar on the same beam
ships compass is 0.7 m (2.3 ft). plane as a conventional pulse radar. A pulse radar
must be set to STBY or OFF any time the Halo
Radar is being operated.
If possible, ensure that the mounting If installed on power boats that have a steep
location provides the scanner with a planing angle, it is recommended to tilt the
clear view all round the vessel. scanner angle down at the front.
Considerations for roof mounting
When deciding a suitable mounting location for the Halo Radar, be aware that the vertical
radar beam extends 25° above and below horizontal for Halo20/20+ and 22° above and
below horizontal for Halo24. 50% of the power projects in a beam 12.5° above and below
horizontal for Halo 20/20+ and 11° above and below horizontal for Halo24. If the radar beam
cannot clear the roof line, this will decrease performance of the radar. Depending on the size
of the hard top of the vessel, it is recommended to elevate the antenna to allow the radar
beam to clear the roof line.
¼ Note: Where the mounting surface is constructed of any form of metal you must elevate the
radar so that the beam has complete clearance, as per Optimum performance section, else
performance will be severely impaired.
Determine scanner height
This is a guide to determine scanner height in relation to the furthest forward corner of the
hard top.
Measure the distance (A) from the Halo Radar to the furthest forward corner of the hard top.
BOW BOW BOW
A
A
A
Use the following illustrations to determine the height of the scanner in relation to distance
(A).
10 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Possible performance loss
50%
of be
am p
ower
50% of beam power
Above illustrates an installation with the Halo Radar mounted directly on to a large hard top.
This installation could suffer decreased performance as the radar energy is either reflected or
absorbed by the hard top.
¼ Note: Where the mounting surface is constructed of any form of metal you must elevate the
dome so that the beam has complete clearance, else performance will be severely impaired.
Good performance
The image above illustrates that raising the radar scanner off the hard top allows most of the
radar energy to clear the hard top.
Halo20/20+ Radar
0.55 m
1.00 m0.80 m
0 mm
60 mm
1.40 m1.20 m
100 mm
12.5°
145 mm
1.60 m 190 mm
2.00 m1.80 m
235 mm
280 mm
2.20 m 325 mm
2.40 m 370 mm
2.60 m 415 mm
2.80 m 460 mm
3.0 m 500 mm
545 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 45 mm
(1.77”).
Halo24 Radar
0.80 m 0 mm
1.00 m 40 mm
1.20 m 80 mm
1.40 m
11°
1.60 m 120 mm
1.80 m 160 mm
2.00 m 200 mm
2.20 m 240 mm
2.40 m 280 mm
2.60 m 320 mm
2.80 m 360 mm
400 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 40 mm
(1.57”).
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 11
Optimum performance
For best performance, the radar should be positioned to allow the full beam to clear the
superstructure of the boat.
Halo20/20+ Radar
0.25 m 0 mm
0.40 m 70 mm
0.80 m 250 mm
1.00 m 350 mm
1.20 m 440 mm
1.40 m 530 mm
25°
1.60 m 630 mm
1.80 m 720 mm
2.00 m 815 mm
2.20 m 905 mm
2.40 m 1000 mm
2.60 m 1095 mm
2.80 m 1190 mm
3.00 m 1280 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 90 mm
(3.54”).
Halo24 Radar
0.38 m 0 mm
0.60 m 88 mm
0.80 m 170 mm
1.00 m 250 mm
1.20 m 330 mm
22°
1.40 m 410 mm
1.60 m 490 mm
1.80 m 570 mm
2.00 m 650 mm
2.20 m 730 mm
2.40 m 810 mm
2.60 m 890 mm
2.80 m 970 mm
A B
For every increase of 200 mm (7.87”) of dimension (A), increase the height (B) by 80 mm
(3.14”).
12 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Halo light
¼ Note: Only available for Halo20+ and Halo24 Radars.
The Halo Radar has a blue accent light that can be activated from the display unit. Refer to
“Setup and configuration” on page 20.
! Warning: Halo Radar’s lighting may not be approved for use in your boating location.
Please check your local boating regulations before turning the blue accent lights ON.
Wiring overview
Run the interconnection cable between the scanner and the display unit or Ethernet switch.
A
B
F
C
D
E
A Halo Radar
B Scanner connector
C Interconnection cable
D Ethernet connector
E Power wires
F Ethernet adapter RJ45 to 5-pin (optional)
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 13
Scanner connection
¼ Note: If replacing an existing Broadband 3G/4G Radar, refer to ”Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G
Radar” on page 22.
The scanner interconnection cable connects to the scanner using an 8 pin connector.
1. Insert interconnection cable connector into the socket on the scanner, rotating locking collar
clockwise until it clicks.
2. Place the cable into the cable retention channel.
3. Install the two cable retainers (A) using the supplied screws. Tighten the screws gently.
¼ Note: If routing the interconnection cable down through a hole in the mounting surface
concealed by the radar, install only the retainer nearest the interconnection cable socket.
¼ Note: If installing the scanner in a location where the dome radar can’t be placed upside
down within reach of the scanner cable, install the retainers on one side first. After the cable
is laid into place, swivel the retainers (B) over the retention channel and gently tighten the
screws.
! Warnings:
The retainers only help hold the cable in place. They are not intended to provide strain relief.
Do not allow the cable to be pulled tight when fitted to the scanner.
Do not hang the scanner from the cable.
A
B
Scanner connection details
8 8
1 7 7 1
2 6 6 2
3 5 5 3
4 4
Scanner socket Interconnection cable plug (scanner end)
Pin-out Wire color Description
1 Black DC negative
2 Yellow Power control
3 Green Data Receive -
4 White / Green Data Receive +
5 Orange Data Transmit -
6 White / Orange Data Transmit +
14 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
7 Red +12/24 V DC
8 Drain Shield
Installing the scanner
Tape the supplied mounting template securely to the chosen location. Before drilling, check:
• you have oriented the mounting template correctly so that the front of the scanner unit
will face the front of the vessel
• clearance to other objects in all directions is >255 mm (10.0”) for Halo20/20+ and >315 mm
(12.5”) for Halo24 from the center of the product as indicated on the mounting templates
• the thickness of chosen mounting surface must be at least 3 mm (0.11“) and maximum 18
mm (0.7”). If the location is thicker, longer bolts than those supplied will be required
¼ Note: The bolts supplied are M8 x 30 mm. If you need to use longer bolts make sure they are
marine grade stainless steel and allow for minimum of 8 mm (0.3”) and maximum of 18 mm
(0.7”) of thread contact.
1. Use a 9.5 mm (3/8”) drill bit to drill the four holes where shown on the mounting template.
2. Connect the scanner interconnection cable. Refer to “Scanner connection” on page 14.
3. If mounting bolts penetrate a roof or a closed dry cavity, use a marine high-grade sealant/
adhesive compound to seal around the bolt holes. Do not fill holes directly with sealant.
4. Position the scanner carefully over the bolt holes so that they are aligned.
5. Place a lock washer and a plain washer onto each bolt.
6. Where necessary, apply a small amount of sealant to the bolt thread length that passes
through the mounting surface. Avoid applying sealant to the thread inserted into the radar.
7. Insert bolts into the scanner’s threaded mounting holes and tighten securely.
¼ Note: The torque settings for the mounting bolts are 12 Nm – 18 Nm (8.9 lb ft – 13.3 lb ft).
! Important: To prevent galling and corrosion, apply a light coating of Tef-Gel® or
other suitable nickel- or PTFE-based lubricant to the threads of the mounting bolts or the
threaded insert in the radar.
¼ Note: Any extension should be made using appropriate marine grade cable, using tinned
copper conductors.
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 15
Ethernet connection
The scanner can be connected either directly to a RJ45 Ethernet socket or to a 5-pin Ethernet
socket via the supplied Ethernet adapter.
A B
Ethernet Ethernet
C
C
D
F
E
Key Description
A Display unit or Ethernet switch with a 5-pin Ethernet socket
B Display unit or Ethernet switch with a RJ45 Ethernet socket
C Ethernet cable plug (RJ45)
D Ethernet adapter cable (RJ45 to 5-pin)
E Power and power control wires
F Interconnection cable to scanner
RJ45 Ethernet connector details
1 8 8 1
Ethernet switch socket Interconnection cable (RJ45 plug)
Pin-out Wire color Description
1 White/Orange Data transmit +
2 Orange Data transmit -
3 White/Green Data receive +
4 Blue Not used
5 White/Blue Not used
6 Green Data receive -
7 White/Brown Not used
8 Brown Not used
16 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Ethernet adapter cable
The ethernet adapter cable is used to connect the scanner to a 5-pin Ethernet connector.
Use the supplied waterproof cable boot to seal the connection between the interconnection
cable and the Ethernet adapter cable.
Waterproof cable boot
1. Slide the boot parts over the interconnection cable.
2. Connect the cables together first inserting the RJ45 socket, then turn and lock the cable boot
(A) to the adapter cable (B).
B A
3. Tighten the boot gland.
Ethernet adapter cable details
5
1 8
4 1
3 2
5-pin plug RJ45 socket
5-pin plug RJ45 socket Wire color Description
1 1 Orange / White Data transmit +
2 2 Orange Data transmit -
3 3 Blue / White Data receive +
4 6 Blue Data receive -
5 Shield -- Drain
-- 4-5 -- Not used
-- 7-8 -- Not used
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 17
Power connection
The unit is designed to be powered by a 12 or 24 V DC system. It is protected against reverse
polarity, under voltage, and over voltage (for a limited duration of time).
A fuse should be fitted to the positive supply, for recommended fuse rating refer to “Technical
specifications” on page 27.
¼ Note: Connection via a switch panel and main isolator switch is assumed. Wiring directly to a
vessels battery bank is not recommended.
The shield (bare wire) can be insulated from all other wires.
If interference is encountered from other on board electronics, the screen can be connected
to a vessel hull ground to help reduce any interference, but it is not generally required.
E
F
D
C
A B
Key Color Description
A Black DC negative
B Red +12/24 V DC
C Yellow Power control wire
D -- Shield
E -- Data cable
F -- Interconnection cable to scanner
Recommended wire gauges for extending power wire length for a 12 V system:
Extension wiring length
2m 5m 10 m 20 m 30 m
(6.56 ft) (16.40 ft) (32.80 ft) (65.61 ft) (98.42 ft)
5m
16 16 16 14
(16.40 ft)
10 m
Min. AWG
16 16 14 12
(32.80 ft)
16
Interconnection cable length
20 m
16 16 14 12
(65.61 ft)
30 m
14 12 8 6
(98.42 ft)
5m
1.00 1.00 1.00 2.50
(16.40 ft)
Min. Cross-section
10 m
1.00 1.00 2.50 4.00
(mm2)
(32.80 ft)
1.00
20 m
1.00 1.00 2.50 4.00
(65.61 ft)
30 m
2.50 4.00 10.00 16.00
(98.42 ft)
18 | Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
Power control connection
The yellow wire in the power cable is used to control how the unit is turned on and off.
Power control by supply power
The scanner will turn on/off when power is applied/removed. Connect the yellow wire to the
red wire after the fuse.
A
Key Wire color Description
A Yellow Power control wire, connected to supply power
Power on by switch
The unit will be turned on as long as the switch is closed.
A
B
Key Wire color Description
A Yellow Power control wire
B Power switch
Power controlled
The scanner can be connected to a common power control bus, and will turn on when
power is applied to the bus by a display unit.
For Lowrance displays connect the yellow wire of the power connector cable to the bus.
For Simrad and B&G displays connect the yellow wire of the power connector cable to the
bus and set all displays intended to power on/off the system to be master.
For more information, refer to the documentation supplied with your display unit.
A
B
A
Key Wire color Description
A Yellow Power control wire
B Master slave bus
Installation | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 19
3
Setup and configuration
Setup and configuration of the Halo Radar has been simplified compared to traditional pulse
radars. There is no zero range adjustment (time delay), no warm up time and no burn in
required.
Make the following settings before use. Refer to the documentation supplied with your
display unit to locate the settings to be adjusted.
Adjust bearing alignment
Aligns the heading marker on the screen with the center line of the vessel. This ensures that
MARPA targets and bearings taken with the EBL are displayed accurately.
Antenna height adjustment
The antenna height is the height of the antenna above the water line. Ensure the antenna
height is set correctly, as it affects the sea clutter function. Do not set the height to zero.
Sector blanking
Used to stop the radar transmitting in the direction of structures that could cause unwanted
reflections or interference to appear on the radar image. Four sectors can be set, the bearing
of which is measured from the bow of the vessel to the center line of the sector.
Sidelobe suppression
¼ Note: This control should only be adjusted by experienced radar users. Target loss in harbor
environments may occur if this control is not adjusted correctly.
By default this control is set to Auto. Increase the suppression if there are false targets
appearing as arcs radiating from either side of an actual target (typically large structures such
as steel ships, container wharves, and large buildings).
Halo light
¼ Note: Only available for Halo20+ and Halo24 Radars.
Determines the light level of the LED accent light.
! Warning: Halo Radar’s lighting may not be approved for use in your boating location.
Please check your local boating regulations before turning the blue accent lights ON.
20 | Setup and configuration | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
4
Maintenance
Clean the radome using soapy water and a soft cloth. Avoid using abrasive cleaning products.
Do not use solvents such as gasoline, acetone, M.E.K etc. as this will damage the dome
surface.
Maintenance | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 21
5
Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G Radar
¼ Note: Some older displays may not be compatible with Halo 20, 20+ and 24 dome radars. For
information contact Navico customer service.
An adapter cable must be used if the Halo Radar is to be connected using a pre-existing
Broadband radar interconnection cable.
Before taking scanner up mast/pedestal:
1. Insert the connector of the adapter cable (A) into the scanner socket. Turn the locking collar to
secure the connector.
2. Install the first retainer across the adapter cable using the supplied screws. Tighten gently.
3. Install the second retainer using one screw only, leaving it turned to one side so the cable
channel is left open.
At mounting location:
4. Insert the connector of the existing interconnection cable (B) into the socket on the adapter
cable. Turn the locking collar to secure the connector.
5. Swivel the second retainer over cable and gently tighten both screws.
A
B
RI-10 Radar interface box and wiring
It is recommended to remove the RI-10 Radar interface box. After removing the RI-10 Radar
interface box, reterminate the connector. Use the appropriate tools to strip the 4G cable
about 20 cm to allow the waterproof cable boot to slide over the RJ45 connector. Refer to
“Waterproof cable boot” on page 17. Connect the 4G cable wires to power as described in
“Power connection” on page 18 and “Power control connection” on page 19.
If removing the RI-10 Radar interface box and associated cables/wiring is difficult they may
remain in place when a Halo 20/20+ or Halo24 is connected via the scanner adaptor cable,
with no detriment to performance.
Check the Fuse/circuit breaker rating is as specified. Refer to “Technical specifications” on page
27.
¼ Note: Halo dome radars do not require navigation data via Simnet or NMEA 2000 for MARPA
or Velocity Track to operate.
22 | Replacing a Broadband 3G/4G Radar | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
6
Troubleshooting
Status LED
There is a status LED (A) at the back of the scanner that indicates the status of the scanner.
A
Condition Flash repeat sequence Priority
Booting-up/Upgrading Continuous ON 1 (highest)
Fault Rapidly flashing 2
Low voltage 3 quick flashes then long gap 3
No Ethernet/Physical link 2 quick flashes then long gap 4
Operating normally Slow flash 5
¼ Note: If more than one condition exists simultaneously, the condition with the highest priority
will be indicated.
Error messages
If problems persists check that the software is up to date. Check the following websites for the
latest version of the radar and display unit software:
www.lowrance.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.bandg.com
Unknown Radar
Generally seen when overlaying the radar on the chart or when current display software is too
old to support radar.
Recommendations
Ensure that the correct radar source is selected and configured in the display unit. Refer to the
display unit’s documentation.
No radar
Indicates the Display and Radar have not established a network connection.
Recommendations
• Check the Radar Status LED
• Check that the Ethernet light is blinking at the radar and at the display (where applicable) or
network expansion port
• Check/select radar in Radar Sources
• Power cycle the system
• Check all connections, ensuring plugs are seated properly and no corrosion is evident on pins
• Check voltage to the yellow power control wire
• Check supply voltage/current
• Check for faults or pinch spots on the Ethernet cable and replace it
• Try another Ethernet port on the display or switch
Troubleshooting | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 23
No scanner
Happens when Ethernet connection is established between radar and display, but an internal
error in the scanner prevents normal radar operation.
Recommendations
• Check supply voltage/current
• If persistent, power cycle the system, check the scanner cable / RJ45
• Possible internal fault with the radar, contact service
No spoke data
Happens when Ethernet connection is established between radar and display, but an internal
error in the scanner prevents normal radar operation.
Recommendations
• Check supply voltage/current
• If persistent, power cycle the system, check the scanner cable / RJ45
• Possible internal fault with the radar, contact service
Error codes
If the error code repeats, please refer to list below.
Error code Description Recommendation
0x00000001 Radar saved settings corrupted Radar will revert to factory defaults. Re-enter
your settings including installation settings
0x0001000C Scanner not detected 1. Check the pedestal interconnection cable
connections
2. Power cycle the radar
3. Check input Voltage
0x0001000D Transmitter overheat (soft) 1. Try changing to shorter ranges <6 NM
2. Switch to STBY, Allow unit cool
0x0001000E Transmitter overheat (hard) Switch to STBY, Isolate power to the radar
and contact service
0x0001000F Signal processing error Unit should revert to STBY. Select transmit
If problem persists. power cycle the radar
0x00010017 Scanner failure Contact service
Power supply
0x00010010 Power supply overheating Switch to STBY, Allow unit cool then retry
0x00010011 Power supply voltage error Check scanner cable for connections for
corrosion or damage
0x00010012 Power supply overload Contact service
0x00010013 Power supply hardware fault Contact service
0x00010014 Power supply comms fault Contact service
0x00010019 Low battery voltage (Supply 1. Recharge and check supply voltage
voltage low) 2. Restart the radar
0x00010016 LED Lighting fault Turn accent lighting off then retry
0x00010018 Radar interface box fault Check the interconnection cable for damage
Mechanical
0x00010001 Zero bearing sensor fault Contact service
0x00010002 Bearing sensor fault Contact service
0x00010015 Mechanical transmission fault Contact service
0x00010003 Motor drive fault Contact service
0x0001001A Motor or antenna has stalled Contact service
24 | Troubleshooting | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
7
Dimensional drawings
Halo dome radar dimensions
A
B
C
D
Dimensions
Key
Halo20/20+ Radar Halo24 Radar Broadband 3G/4G Radar
A 223.0 mm (8.78”) 225 mm (8.9”) 280 mm (11.02”)
B 510.0 mm (20.08”) 610 mm (24”) 488.6 mm (19.24”)
C 233.0 mm (9.17”) 233.0 mm (9.17”) 233.0 mm (9.17”)
D 141.5 mm (5.57”) 141.5 mm (5.57”) 141.5 mm (5.57”)
¼ Note: The bolt holes are located in the same position for each radar.
Dimensional drawings | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 25
Halo dome radar bottom view
C C
D D
B
C C
A
Key Description
A Cable entry area
B Cable retention channel
C Bolt hole M8 x 30 mm
D LED accent light*
* Only available for Halo20+ and Halo24 Radars.
26 | Dimensional drawings | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
8
Technical specifications
Halo20/20+ Radar
Halo20 Halo20+
Characteristics
Environmental IEC60945 : 2002
Operating Temperature: -25° to +55°C (-13° to +130°F)
Relative humidity: +35° C (95° F), 95% RH
Waterproof: IPX6
Max relative wind velocity 51 m/sec (100 Knots)
Power
DC input 10.5-31.2 V with reverse polarity protection
Power consumption Operating: 17-20 W Operating: 17-29 W
(Range/mode dependent) (Range/mode dependent)
Standby: 3.9 W (Typ.) at Standby: 3.9 W (Typ.) at
13.8 V DC 13.8 V DC
Recommended fuse rating 5A
Outside dimensions Refer to “Dimensional drawings” on page 25
Scanner weight (no cable) 5.9 kg (13.0 lbs)
Radar and Antenna parameters
Radar ranges 24 NM 36 NM
Rotation speed (mode dependent) 20 - 24 rpm (mode and 20 - 60 rpm (mode and
MFD dependent) MFD dependent)
Transmitter frequency X-band - 9.4 to 9.5 GHz
Transmitter source (warm-up time) No Magnetron – all solid state. Instant On™
Plane of polarization Horizontal Polarization
Transmitter peak power output 10 W 25 W
Minimum range 6 m (19.7 ft)
Sweep repetition frequency 700-2400 Hz (mode dependent)
Pulse length 0.04 - 64 usec +/- 10%
Sweep bandwidth 48 MHz max
Horizontal beam width (Tx and Rx 4.9° nominal (-3 dB width)
antenna)
Target Separation Control N/A OFF: 4.9°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
LOW: ~4.3°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
MED: ~3.2°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
HIGH: ~2.5°+/-10% (-3 dB
width nominal)
Vertical beam width (Tx and Rx 25° (-3 dB width nominal)
antenna)
Side lobe level (Tx and Rx antenna) Below -18 dB (within ±10°); Below -23 dB (outside
±10°)
Noise figure Less than 5 dB nominal
Communications/Cabling
Protocol Ethernet 100Base-T
Max. interconnecting cable length 30 m (98.5 ft) – available as option
Technical specifications | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 27
Halo24 Radar
Characteristics
Environmental IEC60945 : 2002
Operating Temperature: -25° to +55°C (-13° to +130°F)
Relative humidity: +35° C (95° F), 95% RH
Waterproof: IPX6
Max relative wind velocity 51 m/sec (100 Knots)
Power
DC input 10.5-31.2 V with reverse polarity protection
Power consumption Operating: 17-29 W (Range/mode dependent)
Standby: 3.9 W (Typ.) at 13.8 V DC
Recommended fuse rating 5 A
Outside dimensions Refer to “Dimensional drawings” on page 25
Scanner weight (no cable) 6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
Radar and Antenna parameters
Radar ranges 100 m (328 ft) to 89 km (48 nm) with 18 range settings
(nm/sm/km)
Rotation (mode dependent) 20 - 60 rpm (mode and MFD dependent)
Transmitter frequency X-band - 9.4 to 9.5 GHz
Transmitter source (warm-up time) No Magnetron – all solid state. Instant On™
Plane of polarization Horizontal Polarization
Transmitter peak power output 25 W
Minimum range 6 m (19.7 ft)
Sweep repetition frequency 700-2400 Hz (mode dependent)
Pulse length 0.04 - 64 usec +/- 10%
Sweep bandwidth 48 MHz max
Horizontal beam width (Tx and Rx 3.9° nominal (-3 dB width)
antenna)
Target Separation Control OFF: 3.9°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
LOW: ~3.4°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
MED: ~2.5°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
HIGH: ~2.0°+/-10% (-3 dB width nominal)
Vertical beam width (Tx and Rx 22° (-3B width nominal)
antenna)
Side lobe level (Tx and Rx antenna) Below -18 dB (within ±10°);Below -24 dB (outside ±10°)
Noise figure Less than 5 dB nominal
Communications/Cabling
Protocol Ethernet 100Base-T
Maximum interconnecting cable 30 m (98.5 ft) – available as option
length
28 | Technical specifications | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual
9
Accessories
The most up-to-date accessories list is available at:
• www.lowrance.com
• www.simrad-yachting.com
• www.bandg.com
Accessories | Halo20, 20+ and 24 Dome Radars Installation Manual | 29
*988-12307-005*
www.lowrance.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.bandg.com
ForwardScan™ Sonar
User guide
Installation
Connecting the transducer
The ForwardScan™ transducer can be connected to the
StructureScan port on the SonarHub or the NSS evo2, leaving the
sonar port open for a CHIRP transducer. Refer to the ForwardScan
installation manual for transducer installation instructions.
Warning: It is the owner’s sole responsibility to install and
use the equipment in a manner that will not cause accidents,
personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is
solely responsible for observing safe boating practices.
Warning: Do not rely on this equipment as your principle
source of navigation or hazard detection.
Sonar performance
The accuracy of the sonar depth display can be affected by many
factors, including the type and location of the transducer and
water conditions. Never use this equipment to gauge depth or
other conditions for swimming or diving.
The choice, location, and installation of transducers and other
components of the system are critical to the performance of the
system as intended. If in doubt, consult your dealer.
To reduce the risk of misusing this equipment, you must read and
understand all aspects of the supplied documentation.
Sharing ForwardScan data
ForwardScan data can be shared with NSO evo2, NSS evo2 or
Zeus2 displays by connecting the forward-looking transducer to a
SonarHub on your Ethernet network.
You can also connect the transducer to a NSS evo2 to share
ForwardScan data with multi-function displays on your Ethernet
network.
¼¼ Note: We do not recommend operating different brands of multi-
function displays on the same network.
ForwardScan | User Guide | 1
Operation
ForwardScan™ forward-looking sonar is a navigational aid that
helps you monitor the depth in front of your vessel.
ForwardScan features are available in the latest software update
for your multi-function display. Refer to your display’s brand
website to download the latest update.
¼¼ Note: Screen captures in this document are from a NSS evo 2 unit.
The look of your unit may differ slightly, but it will operate in a
similar manner.
1
6
2
4
3
5
Key Description
1 Transducer location shown as the origin on the screen
2 Depth range scale/Boat position
3 Point data
4 Depth history
5 Bottom
6 Forward range scale
2| ForwardScan | User Guide
Accessing ForwardScan
ForwardScan sonar can be displayed full screen or in a multi-
panel page. Refer to your operation manual for information
about setting up a multi-panel page.
ForwardScan setup
Critical forward range and Critical depth
Critical Forward Range and Critical Depth are user-selected
thresholds that define a critical zone forward of your vessel.
If you travel into water shallow enough to cross into the critical
zone, the Critical Zone alarm is activated. You can display the
critical and warning zones by activating Show zones.
Critical zone Warning zone
ForwardScan display with Show zones active
Warning Forward Range and Warning Depth values are based on
the selected Critical Forward Range and Critical Depth values.
¼¼ Note: To receive Critical Zone alerts, enable ForwardScan alarm
on the Alarm settings tab. Refer to your unit’s operation manual
for information on enabling alarms.
ForwardScan | User Guide |3
Heading extension
You can use the heading extension to monitor ForwardScan
on the chart panel. Heading extension colors are based on
ForwardScan alarm values.
Red/Critical
Yellow/Warning
Green/Safe
ForwardScan extension
Green Safe
Yellow Warning
Red Critical
Select ForwardScan in the Extension lines options dialog to view
ForwardScan heading extension on the chart panel.
4| ForwardScan | User Guide
Transducer angle
We recommend installing the transducer vertical to the waterline.
In cases where that is not possible, the Transducer Angle setting
helps offset the difference between the transducer angle and the
waterline.
If the transducer is angled toward the front of the vessel, a
positive value (0 to +15°) is entered in the Transducer angle
dialog. If the transducer is angled toward the rear of the vessel,
a negative value (0 to -15°) is entered in the Transducer angle
dialog.
Warning: Adjustments to the transducer angle value should
be done with caution. Large variations in the transducer angle
value can distort depth data, increasing the risk of striking
underwater obstructions.
ForwardScan options and settings
Depth
Controls depth range. Depth range is set to auto mode by
default.
Forward range
Controls the forward looking range. Maximum Forward range is
300’ (91 m).
Noise Rejection
Filters out signal interference and reduces on-screen clutter.
Record
Used to record ForwardScan sonar logs.
Pause
Pauses ForwardScan sonar transmissions.
ForwardScan | User Guide |5
View
Palette
Several display palettes are available for a variety of water
conditions.
History ratio
Controls how much of the screen is used to show sonar history
on the ForwardScan image. The higher the ratio, the more history
will be shown.
Point data
By default, ForwardScan only shows the bottom. Access the Point
data menu to view all sonar data points, or only points (Objects)
in the water column.
Show zones
Displays warning zones (yellow) and critical zones (red) on the
screen.
Depth lines
Lines on the screen that make it easier to quickly estimate depth
and the underwater objects.
6| ForwardScan | User Guide
*988-10761-002*
www.bandg.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
ENGLISH
Owner’s Guide & Installation Instructions
Ultrasonic: Smart Sensor ™
WeatherStation Instrument ®
Land Models:
110WX
110WXS
120WXH
150WX
150WXRS
150WXS
200WX
220WXH
Marine Models:
120WX
120WXH
220WX
220WXH
Patent http://www.airmar.com/patent.html
Off-shore Model:
200WX-IPX7
Record the serial number found on the underside of the WeatherStation® Instrument.
Serial No._____________________Date of Purchase_________________________
D-17-461-01-rev.16 07/09/24
Copyright © 2008 - 2024 Airmar Technology Corp. All rights reserved.
All Rights Reserved. Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be
reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded, or stored in any storage
medium, for any purpose without prior written consent of Airmar. Airmar hereby grants
permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision of this manual onto
a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to print one copy of this
manual or any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual
or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that
any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly
prohibited.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Airmar reserves the right to
change or improve its products and to make changes in the content without obligation to
notify any person or organization of such changes. Visit the Airmar website at
www.airmar.com for current updates and supplemental information concerning the use and
operation of this and other Airmar products.
Table of Contents
Introduction & Features...................................................................4
Functions & Outputs........................................................................5
Safety Instructions...........................................................................6
Understanding Apparent & Theoretical Wind................................7
Adding External Sensors.................................................................7
Choosing Cables & Hardware.........................................................8
Where to Purchase Parts..................................................................9
Tools & Materials..........................................................................10
Choosing the Mounting Location..................................................11
Installing........................................................................................12
Cable Routing & Connecting Guidelines......................................15
Connecting to a Data Converter, Combiner, or Splitter................16
Connecting to an NMEA 0183 Display.........................................16
Connecting to an NMEA 2000® Network......................................19
Calibrating the Compass................................................................20
Operation........................................................................................21
Maintenance...................................................................................22
Software........................................................................................ 23
Troubleshooting.............................................................................24
Technical Information....................................................................25
Abbreviations, Acronyms, Glossary, Trademarks.........................26
IMPORTANT
Please read the Owner’s Guide completely
before proceeding.
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing Airmar’s ultrasonic, WeatherStation Instrument. This
exciting product has multiple sensors in a single unit—without any moving parts.
The compact housing is waterproof with a single removable cable. Functions and
features vary by model.
Features
• Waterproof housing and cable system
• Fast response time and update rate
• Stable and accurate theoretical wind and heading data in dynamic conditions
• Can be programed to compensate for an installation that is not aligned to the
front of a boat/vehicle and/or level
• Can be calibrated to compensate for magnetic deviation caused by ferrous
metals and other electro-magnetic fields
• GPS with WAAS and EGNOS
4
Table 1: Functions & Outputs
150WXRS
120WXH
220WXH
150WXS
110WXS
200WX-
120WX
150WX
200WX
220WX
110WX
IPX7
Apparent wind speed & angle
Theoretical wind speed &
direction
Heater
(Keeps wind channel free of ice)
Air temperature
Wind chill temperature
Barometric pressure
Relative humidity Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Dew point temperature Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Heat index temperature Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Rain intensitya
Rain accumulationa
Rain event durationa
Peak time of rain intensitya
3D Magnetic compass heading
2D Magnetic compass heading
Heading relative to true north
Rate of Turn
Angle of pitch and roll
Rate of pitch & roll
v v
Global Positioning System (GPS)
NMEA 0183: RS-232 Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
NMEA 0183: RS-422 Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
NMEA 2000® : CAN
Agriculture compatible: CAN Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
a. The rain sensor must be stationary to produce readings.
Key
When the Heater is ON, the Air Temperature and the Wind Chill Temperature functions
are OFF. When the Heater is turned OFF, the Air Temperature and the Wind Chill
Temperature functions resume automatically.
Opt. is an abbreviation for optional.
5
WARNING
Navigation Aid Only—The WeatherStation Instrument is
an aid to navigation only and should never be solely relied
upon. It is not a replacement for traditional navigation aids
and techniques. Only official government charts contain all
the information needed for safe navigation.
Follow the safety precautions below to reduce the risk of poor product
performance, property damage, personal injury, and/or death.
WARNING: Correct Installation Important
The WeatherStation Instrument must be installed and operated according to the
instructions in this owners guide.
WARNING: Installation Safety
Always wear safety glasses, a dust mask, and ear protection when installing.
WARNING: Do Not Install Near Artificial Magnetic Field
The WeatherStation Instrument must be a minimum of 1m (3') from ferrous metals
and anything that can create a magnetic field to prevent interference to the
magnetic compass.
WARNING: Compass-safe Distance
The WeatherStation Instrument must be a minimum of 0.3m (1') from other
standard and steering compasses.
WARNING: Electrical Safety
The power supply must be OFF before making electrical connections.
WARNING: Voltage
The power supply voltage must be that specified for the model.
• Heater models 24VDC only
• Land and off-shore models 9 - 40 VDC
• Marine models 9 - 24 VDC
WARNING: Fuse or Circuit Breaker
A safe installation requires a 0.5 amp fast-blow fuse or circuit breaker.
Heater models require a 3 amp fast-blow fuse or circuit breaker.
WARNING: Battery
Make power connections to a power source that is isolated from the engine start
battery(s). Voltage drops may cause the WeatherStation instrument to lose
information and/or change operating mode.
WARNING: Calibrating the Compass
The internal compass may need to be calibrated after the WeatherStation
Instrument is installed. Perform the pretest to determine if calibration is necessary.
WARNING: 150WX
These models incorporate a two-axis compass. Significant errors can occur in the
heading when a vehicle/boat is pitching and rolling. If there is an error in the
heading, there also will be a corresponding error in the theoretical wind direction.
Errors can be minimized or eliminated by using data from an external compass.
6
Understanding Apparent & Theoretical Wind
Virtually all mechanical and ultrasonic anemometers report apparent wind speed
and direction. The Airmar WX Series is unique because it calculates both
theoretical wind speed and direction relative to ground, and the apparent wind
speed and direction. These wind readings are the same if the unit is mounted in a
fixed location. However, if the WX Series is mounted on a moving vehicle/boat,
the apparent wind is the wind you would feel on your hand if you held it out the
window of a moving car. Since the WX Series has a built in GPS and compass, it
calculates the theoretical wind based upon the apparent wind, speed of the
vehicle, and compass heading.
Adding External Sensors
The WeatherStation Instrument can receive data from an external sensor(s). If
provided, this data will be used in the theoretical wind-speed calculations.
The following NMEA 0183 sentences can be used to provide heading data:
• $HCHDT—Heading is used for wind calculations.
• $HCHDG—Heading is used for wind calculations.
When these are seen as input, the output of these sentences is stopped.
Water-speed values can be transmitted to the WeatherStation Instrument. This
will modify the theoretical wind speed calculation to provide wind speed relative to
water, instead of wind speed relative to ground.
• NMEA 0183—VHW is used for wind speed relative to water calculation.
• NMEA 2000—PGN 128259 (water speed) is used for wind speed relative to
water calculations.
The WeatherStation Instrument will automatically detect whether a sensor(s) is
internal, external, or not available at all.
• NMEA 0183—Simply connect the external sensor(s) to a Combiner or other
NMEA 0183 repeater hardware.
• NMEA 2000—Connect the external sensor(s) to the NMEA 2000 network.
NOTE: When an external speed sensor is connected to both an NMEA 0183
device and an NMEA 2000 network, the WeatherStation Instrument will use
NMEA 2000 data.
Speed-through-water Sensor—An external speed sensor can be installed, such
as an Airmar Smart™ Sensor. Airmar recommends installing the DST800 to
receive water depth, boat speed, and water temperature data.
7
Choosing Cables & Hardware
The WeatherStation Instrument can be connected to a device and/or network in
several ways. You must have the correct cable(s) and any needed
converting/connecting hardware before beginning the installation.
WeatherStation Cables (NO heater) Length Part No.
• NMEA 0183 cable 10m 33-862-02
• NMEA 2000 cable 6m 33-1029-02
• NMEA 2000 cable 10m 33-1104-01
NOTE: Additional cable lengths are available.
Connecting/Converting Hardware (NO heater) Length Part No.
• Data Converter: NMEA 0183 to USB 33-801-01
• Combiner: NMEA 0183 to USB NDC-4-AIR
• U200 Gateway: NMEA 2000 CAN to USB 33-727-01
• Splitter: NMEA 0183 & NMEA 2000 15m 33-632-01
• Splitter: NMEA 0183 & NMEA 2000 30m 33-632-02
Heater Models: Cables & Connecting Hardware
The power to the heater is greatly affected by the total length of the cable run. If
the WeatherStation Instrument will be connected to an NMEA 0183 display or a
PC and the total length of the cable run will be greater than 20m, additional steps
must be taken. To ensure there will be enough power for the heater to function
properly, the table below specifies the materials needed for each installation.
Device & Junction Cable: J-box Cable: Cable:14AW
WeatherStation Data
Total length to NMEA J-box to Data G J-box to
Cable Converter Box
of cable run display Converter power supply
NMEA display 33-1167-XX — — — — —
< 20m
06-228
NMEA display 33-1167-01 9 Length as
— terminals Length as —
>20m required
required
PC < 20m 33-1282-XX 33-1081-01 — — — —
33-862-XX
9 Length as
PC > 20m 33-1167-01 33-801-01 terminals — Length as required
required
Length Part No.
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422) 10m 33-1282-01
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422) 20m 33-1282-02
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422, no connector) 10m 33-1167-01
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 (RS-422, no connector) 20m 33-1167-02
• Data Converter: NMEA 0183 to USB (RS-422 < 20m cable run) 33-1081-01
• Data Converter: NMEA 0183 to USB (RS-422 > 20 m cable run) 33-801-01
• Combiner: NMEA 0183 to USB NDC-4-AIR
• WeatherStation cable: NMEA 0183 Sold by the meter 06-228
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 1m 33-862-06
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 10m 33-862-02
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 15m 33-862-01
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 25m 33-862-03
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 35m 33-862-04
• Cable: Junction Box to Data Converter/Combiner 45m 33-862-05
8
Mounts
CAUTION: Vehicles/boats traveling above 30MPH—Do not use the plastic
Cable Side-exit Adapter (part D) supplied. Purchase a stainless steel part. At high
speeds, the plastic adapter may break, causing the WeatherStation Instrument to
fall off.
CAUTION: 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS—Do not use a ratchet mount.
Lowering the WeatherStation Instrument may damage the solar-radiation shield.
NOTE: The WeatherStation nut has standard 1"-14 UNS or 3/4" NPT threads.
Antenna mount with standard marine 1" -14 threads and pass-through for cable
(Figure 1)
Hardware to install antenna mount
Extension tube (some installations)
deck mount deck mount ratchet mount
center pass-through side pass-through with extension tube
extension
with cable
pass-through
cable cable
passes pass-
through through
center
of mount
Figure 1. Antenna mounts (not supplied)
Copyright © 2007 Airmar Technology Corp.
Parts
Humidity Sensor: 110WX, 150WX, 200WX 33-627-01
Humidity Sensor: 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS 33-760-01
Where to Purchase Parts
Obtain parts from your instrument manufacturer or marine dealer.
Gemeco USA
Tel: 803-693-0777
email:
[email protected]
Airmar EMEA Europe, Middle East, Africa
Tel: +33.(0)2.23.52.06.48
email:
[email protected]
9
Tools & Materials
Safety glasses
Dust mask
Ear protection
Pencil
Level
Electric drill
Drill bits
Phillips screwdrivers
Teflon pipe-thread tape (optional)
Deck gland (some installations)
Grommets (some installations)
Cutting pliers (some installations)
Wire strippers (some installations)
Heat-shrink tubing (some installations)
Heat gun (some installations)
Multimeter (some installations)
Cable ties (some installations)
10
Choosing the Mounting Location
For accurate readings and a reliable GPS signal, selecting the best location for
the WeatherStation Instrument is very important. Easy access and appearance
should be secondary considerations. Since each installation is unique, the best
separation distances will vary depending on the surroundings and the particular
equipment and how it is configured. Choose a location that balances the
requirements below:
• The WeatherStation Instrument must be mounted in “clear air”, away from
obstructions in any direction that will interfere with air flowing through the unit. If
there is an obstruction, be sure to mount the WeatherStation Instrument at least
2m (6') away. On land, avoid obstructions such as roofs, chimneys, trees, etc.
• If possible, mount the WeatherStation Instrument higher than any other object.
Mount it a minimum of 500mm (20") above the surrounding surfaces.
NOTE: The higher the WeatherStation Instrument is mounted, the less accurate
the pitch and roll readings will be.
• To prevent interference to the internal magnetic compass:
- Mount a minimum of 0.3m (1') from other standard and steering compasses.
- Mount a minimum of 1m (3') from any structures or equipment that contains
ferrous metals.
- Mount a minimum of 1m (3') from anything that may create a magnetic field
such as magnetized materials, electric motors, electronic equipment,
engines, generators, power/ignition cables, and batteries. For distances,
follow the respective manufacturer’s recommendations.
• To prevent interference to the internal GPS (Figure 2):
- It must have a clear view of the sky to receive satellite signals. A 120° view is
optimal. Check for any obstructions such as other boats or buildings.
- Mount it as far as possible from high-powered transmitting antennas to avoid
mutual interference.
- Mount it lower than any Inmarsat communications antenna.
- Mount above or below any radar beam. Do not mount within a radar beam.
WeatherStation
Min.
Min. 2m 1.5m
Min. 2m
metal surface
antenna insulator
Figure 2. Antennas
11
12
Installing (Figure 3)
CAUTION: The reflector plate and the waterproof film found in the wind channel of
the WeatherStation Instrument are essential to its operation. Be careful not to
scratch the plate, puncture the film, or damage them in any way.
CAUTION: The WeatherStation Instrument must be installed upright and vertical,
not tilted to one side. It must be level and plumb. If the WeatherStation Instrument
is tilted from the horizontal plane, it may introduce errors in the compass and wind
readings.
CAUTION: To accurately measure the wind direction and heading, the alignment
notch on the WeatherStation Instrument must be pointed correctly.
• Moving vehicle/boat—The alignment notch must point forward and be
parallel to the centerline of the vehicle/boat.
• Stationary surface—It is recommended that the alignment notch point toward
true north.
CAUTION: Tighten or align the WeatherStation Instrument by grasping the lower
housing below the reflector plate. Hand tighten only.
• Do not rotate the cap. Turning it may sever internal connections and void the
warranty.
• 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS—Do not grasp the solar-radiation shield. The
louvers may break.
CAUTION: If you use a thread lock, use Teflon pipe-thread tape. Do not use a
liquid thread lock as it may weaken the plastic, causing it to swell and crack.
side view bottom view
humidity sensor
cap
heater
waterproof film
wind channel
(where air travels
through the unit)
reflector plate
(heated)
lower housing
alignment
notch
Figure 3. WeatherStation Instrument with heater (120/220WXH shown)
Copyright © 2008 - 2018 Airmar Technology Corp.
13
Permanent Mounting
1. Place the mounting hardware at the selected location. Orient any cable exit in the
direction that you want the cable to travel (Figure 4).
2. Position the mounting hardware at a 90° angle to the mounting surface. If
necessary, use shims to make the mounting surface level.
3. Mark the holes for the mounting screws. If the cable will pass through the
center of the mount, also mark that hole.
NOTE: If you are using a ratchet mount, be sure you have purchased an
extension with a cable pass-through. Do not use a ratchet mount with the
110WXS, 150WXRS or 150WXS that has a solar-radiation shield.
4. Drill the holes for the mounting screws and the cable exit if necessary. If the
cable is to be fed through a deck, install a high quality deck gland.
5. Using purchased screws, fasten the mount in place.
6. Screw an extension tube onto the antenna mount if desired.
lower housing
alignment
notch
nut assembly
extension tube
(most installations)
cable exit
(some installations)
antenna mount
(some installations)
Figure 4. Installation (150WX shown)
Copyright © 2007 - 2018 Airmar Technology Corp.
14
Attaching the Cable to the WeatherStation Instrument
1. With the nut assembly on the cable near the WeatherStation connector, thread
the cable through the extension tube (if used), antenna mount, and the cable
exit. Be sure to leave several inches of cable extending beyond the nut assembly
(Figure 5).
2. Screw the nut assembly onto the top of the antenna mount /extension tube.
Hand tighten only. Do not over-tighten.
NOTE: If you use a thread lock, use teflon pipe thread tape only.
3. Remove the protective cover from the connector. (Save the cap to protect the
connector, when the WeatherStation Instrument is removed.) Plug the
connector into the WeatherStation Instrument. The alignment key on the
connector fits into a notch in the base of the WeatherStation Instrument.
4. To accurately measure the wind direction, be sure to orient the alignment notch
correctly. Grasp the lower housing of the WeatherStation Instrument below the
reflector plate and hold it in the proper position (Figure 3).
• Moving vehicle/boat—The alignment notch must point forward and be
parallel to the centerline of the vehicle/boat.
• Stationary—It is recommended that the alignment notch point toward true
north.
5. Slide the captive nut upward and screw it onto the lower housing of the
WeatherStation Instrument (Figures 4 and 5). Hand tighten only. Do not over-
tighten. Be careful not to rotate the WeatherStation Instrument, changing the
alignment or loosen the nut assembly from the antenna mount/extension tube.
WeatherStation
connector
alignment
key
captive
nut
nut assembly
antenna mount
or extension tube
Figure 5. Attaching the cable to the WeatherStation Instrument
Copyright © 2007 - 2011 Airmar Technology Corp.
15
Cable Routing & Connecting
Depending on the equipment you will be using, route the WeatherStation cable to
a Converter, Combiner, Splitter, an NMEA 0183 display, or an NMEA 2000
network. After reading the cautions below, go to the appropriate instructions.
CAUTION: Do not remove the waterproof connector(s) to ease cable routing.
Buy a cable without a connector. Instructions for wiring are supplied.
CAUTION: To reduce electrical interference from other electrical wiring and any
on-board equipment with strong magnetic fields such as: radar equipment, radio
transmitters, engines, generators, etc., separate the cables by at least 1 m (3').
Ensure that all the cable shields are appropriately grounded.
CAUTION: Be careful not to tear the cable jackets when passing them through
compartments, bulkheads, or walls. Use grommets to prevent chaffing.
CAUTION: Use a multimeter to check the polarity and the connections to the
power supply before applying power to the WeatherStation Instrument.
CAUTION: Coil any excess cable(s) and secure it with cable ties to prevent
damage.
CAUTION: Heater model with cable run greater than 20m (60')—The power to
the heater is affected by the total length of the cable run. If the cable run is greater
than 20m (60'), additional hardware is needed to ensure that enough power will
reach the heater to function properly.
• PC—Connect through a Data Converter or Combiner. Follow the instructions
that are supplied with the hardware.
• NMEA 0183 display—Follow the instruction, “Connecting to an NMEA 0183
Display.”
16
Connecting to a Data Converter, Combiner, or Splitter
IMPORTANT: To connect to a PC it is necessary to install a Data Converter or
Combiner. Follow the installation instructions that are supplied with the unit.
Connecting to an NMEA 0183 Display
Cable Routing
Route the WeatherStation cable to the display. Do not fasten the cable in place at
this time.
Heater model with cable run greater than 20m (60')—Route the WeatherStation
cable to a junction box (Figure 6). Route a separate cable from the junction box to
the NMEA display. Route red and black 14AWG wires from the junction box to a
24VDC power supply. Do not fasten the cables and wires in place at this time.
red wire
junction box (14AWG)
1 1
power
2 2
supply
WeatherStation 3 3 (24VDC)
Instrument 4 4 black wire
5 5 (14AWG)
6 6
7 7
06-228
NMEA 0183
8 8
display
9 9
33-1167-01
[10 m (30')]
Figure 6. Wiring the junction box (not to scale)
Copyright © 2016 Airmar Technology Corp.
Wire the junction box using the wiring diagram below (Figure 7) To prepare the
cables, follow “Preparing the Wires”.
Figure 7. Heater models with a cable run greater than 20m (60')
Copyright © 2016 Airmar Technology Corp.
17
Connector on Display End
If the WeatherStation cable has a connector on the display end, and it can be
plugged into the port on the NMEA 0183 display; do so now. Coil any excess
cable and secure it with cable ties to prevent damage. Fasten the cable in place.
No Connector on Display End: Wiring
CAUTION: The WeatherStation Instrument has either an RS-422 or RS-232
standard. Follow the wiring diagram that matches the WeatherStation Instrument.
If it is wired for the wrong standard, it will not transmit and receive data properly.
CAUTION: The display power may be wired directly to the WeatherStation cable,
or it may be wired separately.
Heater models MUST be wired separately.
CAUTION: Heater models—It is recommended to use the same 24VDC power
supply for both the WeatherStation Instrument and the heater. If using separate
power sources, ensure that the supply grounds are common.
Preparing the Wires
NOTE: If the display does not have NMEA 0183 output connections, the yellow
and orange wires are not needed. Apply heat-shrink tubing to each unused wire.
Alternatively, the yellow and orange wires can be connected to an external sensor.
1. Allowing an extra 25 cm (10") for wiring ease, cut the cable to length.
2. Strip 60mm (2-1/2") of the outer jacket and foil shielding from the cut end of the
cable (Figure 8 or 9).
3. Strip 10 mm (3/8") of conductor insulation from the end of each colored wire.
4. Protect the cable’s foil shielding from causing a short by using heat-shrink tubing
around the jacket where the wires emerge from the cable. The tubing must
overlap the wires a minimum of 6mm (1/4"). Shrink the tubing using a heat gun.
5. Being sure the power supply is OFF, connect the wires to the display.
6. Fasten the cable in place.
7. The installation is complete. To begin receiving data, refer to the owner’s
manual that came with the display.
18
Connecting
Refer to the appropriate wiring diagram and the owner’s manual that came with
the display to connect the colored wires.
NO heater—(Figure 8).
Heater models—(Figure 9)
locator
10
WeatherStation
connector optional or optional
RS422 RS232
V+ V+
V- V-
A / + OUT TX OUT
x BARE
A/+ IN RX IN
B/- IN NO CONNECTION
B/- OUT NO CONNECTION
10 SHIELD SHIELD
Figure 8. NMEA 0183 WeatherStation Cable—no heater
Copyright © 2007 - 2014 Airmar Technology Corp.
locator
10
WeatherStation
connector optional or optional
RS422 RS232
V+ V+ V+
V- V- V-
A /+ OUT A /+ OUT TX OUT
B /- OUT B /- OUT No Connection
HEATER V + HEATERV + (24 VDC) HEATERV + (24 VDC)
HEATER V - (GND) HEATER V - (GND)
A / + IN A / + IN RX IN
B /- IN B /- IN No Connection
HEATER V - GREY
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
Figure 9. NMEA 0183 WeatherStation Cable—for heater models
Copyright © 2011 - 2019 Airmar Technology Corp.
19
Connecting to an NMEA 2000® Network
CAUTION: Models with a heater cannot be used with an NMEA 2000 network.
CAUTION: Only two termination resistors are required on an NMEA 2000
network. More than two will degrade the bus performance.
Route the WeatherStation cable to the NMEA 2000 network. Plug the NMEA 2000
connector into the network node (Figure 10). Coil any excess cable and secure
with cable ties to prevent damage.
locator
10
WeatherStation NMEA 2000
connector network
connector
10
Figure 10. NMEA 2000 WeatherStation Cable [6m (20') shown]
Copyright © 2008 - 2011 Airmar Technology Corp.
NOTE: WeatherStation cables greater than 6m (20') have a termination resistor
built into the WeatherStation connector (Figure 11).
termination resistor in connector
locator
10
120Ω
WeatherStation NMEA 2000
connector network
connector
10
Figure 11. NMEA 2000 WeatherStation Cable [10 m (33') shown]
Copyright © 2009 - 2011 Airmar Technology Corp.
20
Calibrating the Compass
WARNING: The internal compass may need to be calibrated after the
WeatherStation Instrument is installed for maximum accuracy. Perform the pretest
below to determine if calibration is necessary.
CAUTION: Boat—The Pretest and AutoCalibration Procedure must be done in
calm seas in a 0.8 km (0.5 mile) open area away from other boats and ferrous
objects such as structures and aids to navigation. Avoid congested areas and
waters with strong currents as calibration will be difficult and possibly hazardous.
Pretest
Go to an appropriate site.
• Vehicle—Drive to an open parking lot or field, away from other vehicles and
ferrous objects.
• Boat—In calm seas, navigate to an open area of water, 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of
open space away from other boats and ferrous objects.
While making a full circle, compare the WeatherStation heading data to another
compass. Check all headings. If the data agrees, there is no magnetic influence
on the WeatherStation Instrument. The compass does NOT need to be calibrated.
If the data does not agree, continue with the calibration instructions below.
How to Calibrate
Calibration can be done in one of two ways.
• Calibrate the compass using the WeatherCaster™ software and a PC.
• Follow the AutoCalibration Procedure below.
AutoCalibration Procedure
IMPORTANT: Calibration requires the vehicle/boat to complete 2 to 3 circles.
IMPORTANT: In the event of a calibration failure, repeat the procedure.
1. At the site where the pretest was performed, select the display page on the
NMEA Instrument that shows Heading.
2. Shut OFF and then turn ON the DC power that is connected to the
WeatherStation Instrument.
3. Within 2 minutes of cycling power to the WeatherStation Instrument, start the
vehicle/boat in a slow [4.5 to 7 MPH (4 to 6 knots)] circular turn that takes about
2 to 3 minutes to complete.*
If the vehicle/boat completes 1.5 circles within 3 to 4.5 minutes, AutoCalibration
will begin. Heading will stop being reported on any NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000
display until the calibration is finished.
4. Keep turning in the same circle for 1 to 2 more complete circles.
Do not change the speed or rate of turn through the circle.
5. When calibration is completed successfully, Heading will return to the display.
If calibration fails, the display will flash Heading ON and OFF in 10 second
intervals for 60 seconds. (Display times may vary by manufacturer.)
* The optimum rate of turn is 180°/ minute: 3°/second, 30°/10 seconds, 45°/15 seconds,
and 90°/30 seconds.
21
Operation
Heater: 120WXH, 220WXH
NOTE: When the Heater is ON, the Air Temperature and the Wind Chill
Temperature functions are OFF. When the Heater is OFF, the Air Temperature and
the Wind Chill Temperature functions resume automatically.
The heater can operate in three different modes.
• OFF—The heater is always off.
• Automatic—The heater switches ON when the housing temperature falls
below 1°C. It switches OFF when the housing reaches >5°C.
NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted between 2°C and 20°C.
• User Control—This mode can be accessed by serial command or a physical
switch on the power supply.
Rain Sensor: 150WXRS
The WeatherStation Instrument must be stationary to make accurate rain
readings.
22
Maintenance
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the WeatherStation Instrument. There are no
user-serviceable parts inside. Removing the three screws holding the lower
housing will damage the waterproof seal, voiding the warranty.
CAUTION: Do not immerse in water or pressure wash. Doing so may allow water
to infiltrate the WeatherStation Instrument, voiding the warranty.
CAUTION: The reflector plate and the waterproof film found in the wind channel of
the WeatherStation Instrument are essential to its operation. The waterproof film
protects the transducers, so be careful to keep it intact. Do not to scratch the
reflector plate or damage it in any way.
CAUTION: Keep the wind channel and any louvers or rain sensor free of spider
webs, insects, dirt, and other debris.
Cleaning
Since the WeatherStation Instrument has no moving parts, it requires minimal
maintenance. Clean the exterior with a damp cloth and mild household detergent.
Gently thread an alcohol wipe through the wind channel and under any rain sensor to
remove spider webs and any debris (Figure 12).
110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS—Gently clean under the louvers with a duster.
rain sensor
umbrella
waterproof film
wind channel
reflector plate
lower housing
solar-radiation shield
(7 louvers)
screw (3)
temperature sensor
serial number
Figure 12. Maintenance (150WXRS shown)
Copyright © 2008 - 2019 Airmar Technology Corp.
23
Software
Revisions
Airmar may release updated versions of both the WeatherStation firmware and the
WeatherCaster™ software. Periodically check Airmar’s website at www.airmar.com
to down-load the latest revision.
Installing WeatherCaster™ Software
Follow the instructions in the WeatherCaster Software Guide.
24
Troubleshooting
No Readings or Inaccurate Readings
• Is there power to the WeatherStation Instrument?
• Are all the connections tight?
• Is the cable-run free of kinks or damage?
• Is the wiring correct?
• Are there any obstructions in the wind channel, solar-radiation shield, or rain sensor?
Keep it free of spider webs, insects, dirt, and other debris.
Be careful not to puncture the waterproof film or scratch the reflector plate.
• Are the temperature and humidity sensors clean?
• Is there ice on the WeatherStation Instrument?
No GPS Fix
• Does the WeatherStation Instrument have a clear view of the sky?
Wind Readings Are Too Low on Moving Platform
• Is the WeatherStation Instrument mounted forward and low on the boat/vehicle’s
hardtop in dead air?
Move the WeatherStation Instrument farther back and higher (Figure 13).
Figure 13. Boat/vehicle mounting location (boat shown)
Copyright © 2007 Airmar Technology Corp .
Heater Not Working
• Is there 24VDC supply voltage to the heater?
NOTE: The heater does not cycle ON until the air temperature reaches 1°C.
Rain Readings Inaccurate
• Is the sensor stationary?
Humidity Readings are Inaccurate: 110WXS, 150WXRS, 150WXS
• Are there any obstructions in the solar-radiation shield?
Keep the louvers free of spider webs, insects, dirt, and other debris.
25
Technical Information
Additional Data Available from the WeatherStation Instrument
There are parameters that the WeatherStation Instrument can make available to
the user. Usually, more data is available from the WeatherStation Instrument than
can be displayed in a reasonable format on a screen. Also, if all the data was
continuously transmitted to the display, the update rate would be too slow and
could not keep up with WeatherStation measurements. Consequently, some
parameters are transmitted while others are not, based on a preselected list. Note
that those parameters not transmitted are, nevertheless, retained in the
WeatherStation Instrument. For more detailed information, visit www.airmar.com
and go to Installation Instructions and Owner’s Guides > WeatherStation
Instruments > Technical Manual or see the “Technical Manual” on the
WeatherCaster CD.
NMEA 2000: Load Equivalency Number
LEN is the amount of current a devise draws from an NMEA 2000 network.
(1 LEN = 50 mA)
NMEA 2000 Load Equivalency Number (LEN)
120WX.................... 2
220WX.................... 4
Specifications
Product specifications are measured under laboratory conditions. The installation
and surrounding environment can impact the product’s performance. Airmar
recommends that best installation practices as defined by the World
Meteorological Organization (WMO) are followed in your installation.
26
Abbreviations & Acronyms
CD Compact Disk
CAN Controller Area Network
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
GPS Global Positioning System
LEN Load Equivalency Number
NPT National Pipe Thread
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association
Opt. Optional
PC Personal Computer
UNS Unified National Standard
USB Universal Serial Bus
VDC Volts of Direct Current
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
Glossary
Firmware The software within the WeatherStation hardware
WeatherCaster™ software The PC application program
Trademarks
Airmar® is a registered trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
NMEA 2000® is a registered trademark of the National Marine Electronics Assoc.
Smart™ Sensor is a trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
WeatherCaster™ is a trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
WeatherStation® is a trademark of Airmar Technology Corporation.
27
35 Meadowbrook Drive, Milford, New Hampshire 03055-4613, USA
www.airmar.com
28
*988-10984-004*
Precision™ 9 Installation Guide Scan to save a copy
The Precision™ 9 compass outputs magnetic heading for sail and powerboats. It connects to the vessel’s NMEA 2000®
network, allowing you to set up and control it from display units on the network. The compass outputs magnetic heading
data suitable for autopilot steering as well as rate of turn, pitch, roll and heave.
¼ Note: Pitch and roll are called trim and heel for B&G® products.
Installation
The Precision™ 9 compass can be mounted on a flat, horizontal or vertical surface, athwart ship or along ship. Select a
location that provides a solid mounting place free from vibration (as much as possible), and as close as possible to the vessel’s
center of pitch and roll, i.e. close to the water line.
It should be as far away as possible from:
• disturbing magnetic interferences, for example, engines (minimum of 2 m)
• ignition cables
• large metal objects, particularly the autopilot drive unit.
On steel hull vessels, the compass can be mounted 0.75 - 1 m (2.5 - 3.3 ft) above the wheel house on a non-magnetic stand, if
no other options are available.
¼ Warning: Never mount the compass upside down. Level the compass as close to horizontal as possible.
To mount the compass directly to a flat, horizontal surface:
1. Use the supplied direct mount template to mark 2 screw holes and a hole for the network cable.
¼ Note: Position the compass so it is parallel to the vessel’s center line.
2. Drill holes at the marks and position the compass so the holes line up.
3. Use 2 pan head or roundhead machine screws to secure the compass to the surface.
¼ Note: You must supply your own screws for direct mounting. Screw recommendations: Ø 10G - 4.8 mm - 3/16". Max 7.5 mm
(0.29”). Length is determined by the surface thickness. Screws must be non magnetic.
To mount the compass to a flat, vertical surface, such as a bulkhead:
1. Use the supplied bracket template to mark 2 holes to a vertical surface, then drill holes at the marks.
2. Use the supplied self-tapping screws to attach the supplied bracket to the wall.
3. Position the compass on the bracket so the mounting holes line up.
4. Insert the supplied machine screws and tighten them loosely (only half way).
5. Manually swivel the compass so it’s orientation is parallel to the vessel’s center line.
6. Fully tighten the mounting screws to secure the compass.
Wiring
Connect the Precision™ 9 compass to your NMEA 2000® network using the supplied tee connector.
Calibration
After installing and wiring your compass, you should calibrate it to compensate for the deviation (local magnetic field) on
board the vessel, and adapt the sensors to the earth’s magnetic field strength.
Your Precision™ 9 compass supports two calibration modes:
• Auto calibration
• Manual calibration
Auto calibration
There are 4 different auto calibration modes. In all modes, the compass continuously collects and calculates new calibration
parameters during normal use on the water - the difference is in how and when new parameters are applied.
The default mode is Auto, and for most users it’s not necessary to change this. However, if you wish to make sure the
compass doesn’t change its calibration, you can set it to Locked once you're satisfied with the performance.
To change the mode, go to your compatible display unit and find your Precision™ 9 compass in the devices list, usually under
Settings > Network (or Boat network) > Device list (or Devices) > Precision-9. Open the compass configuration screen and
select a different mode from the Compass auto calibration drop-down.
¼ Note: If the Compass auto calibration option isn't available on your display unit, go directly to the Manual calibration
section of this installation guide.
Mode Behavior
Auto In this mode, the compass will phase in new calibration parameters only if the parameters in use are deemed
invalid (their performance has dropped below a certain threshold) and the new parameters are proven to be
better. Parameters can become invalid due to changes in the magnetic field. This could be from moving to a
different geographic position. It takes around 20 minutes to phase in the new settings.
Locked In this mode, the compass won’t change calibration parameters in use by itself. If new parameters are
deemed better than the current ones, the following warning displays, "Parameters in use are not valid”. In
this situation, you can switch to Auto or On mode and phase in the new settings. Locked mode is suitable for
vessels operating in a small geographical area with no big variation in the local magnetic field.
On In this mode, the compass will phase in new parameters if they are deemed better (their performance is over a
certain threshold) than the parameters in use. It takes around 20 minutes to phase in the new settings.
Off In this mode, no auto calibration parameters are used, and the compass uses manual calibration.
Statuses and warnings
Calibration status and warning information also displays on the compass configuration screen.
Status Description
Is not calibrated The needed magnetic raw data is not yet collected.
Is calibrating New calibration parameters have been found, and are being phased in.
Is calibrated Calibration parameters have been found and are being used.
--- Auto calibration mode is set to Off.
Warning Description
First calibration in progress Data for first calibration is being collected.
No warning Performance of current parameters is deemed good.
Parameters in use are not valid Current parameters are not valid. If this is seen when the mode is Locked, the mode
should at least temporarily be set to On or Auto, to switch parameters.
--- Auto calibration mode is set to Off.
Manual calibration
To manually calibrate your Precision™ 9 compass, go to your compatible display unit and find it in the devices list, usually
under Settings > Network (or Boat network) > Device list (or Devices) > Precision-9. Select Calibrate or Recalibrate
compass (depending on your display unit) and follow the on-screen instructions.
¼ Note: If your display unit supports auto calibration, the auto calibration mode must first be set to Off.
Important points:
• Manually calibrate your compass in calm sea conditions with minimal wind and current.
• Ensure there's enough open water around the vessel to maneuver a turn of about 390 degrees.
• Maintain a turn rate of about 2-3 degrees per second until you see a notification that the calibration is complete.
¼ Note: If an autopilot is configured, a setup guide automatically takes you through compass calibration, without having to
go through the Settings menu.
¼ Note: For optimal performance, you should recalibrate the compass if the vessel has traveled far from where it was
previously calibrated. Recalibration may be required because the strength of the earth’s magnetic field varies in different
geographic locations.
Data
To see the data your compass is generating, select Data or Show details (depending on your display unit) under Settings >
Network (or Boat network) > Device list (or Devices) > Precision-9.
Offsets
After calibrating your compass, you should apply offsets for the heading, pitch and roll outputs to compensate for any
mounting alignment errors.
To apply pitch and roll offsets:
1. Ensure the vessel is stationary at the dock, loaded in normal trim.
2. Open the compass data screen by selecting Data or Show details (depending on your display unit) and take note of the
pitch and roll output values.
3. Open the compass configuration screen and adjust the pitch and roll offsets.
4. Return to the data screen to confirm the pitch and roll output values are 0.
The heading offset compensates for any difference between the vessel’s center line (A) and the x
compass lubber line (B).
To apply the heading offset: A
1. Open the compass data screen by selecting Data or Show details (depending on your display B
unit) and take note of the heading output value.
2. If necessary, change the heading reference on your display unit (Settings > Units (or
Preferences) > Heading) so it's the same as the compass heading (°M or °T).
3. Use a chart or chartplotter to find the bearing from the vessel position to a visible object.
4. Steer the vessel so its center line aligns with the bearing line pointing towards the object.
5. Open the compass configuration screen and adjust the heading offset so the bearing value and the compass heading
output are the same.
¼ Note: The compass heading and bearing values may be damped. Allow time for the heading and bearing values to settle
before applying offset.
Dimensions
119 mm (4.69”) 133 mm (5.23”)
119 mm (4.69”)
36 mm
36 mm
(1.42”)
(1.42”)
126 mm (4.96”)
126 mm (4.96”)
90 mm (3.54”)
90 mm (3.54”)
72 mm (2.83”)
Technical specifications
Module weight 165 g (5.8 oz)
Bracket weight 130 g (4.6 oz)
Supply and interface 8-16 V via NMEA 2000®
Power consumption 0.4 W
Calibration Automatic or manual
Repeatability ± 1.0° (or better)
Roll/pitch range ± 45°
Heading accuracy ± 2° after calibration
NMEA 2000 ®
Load equivalence no. (LEN) 1
Ports (input/output) 1
Output Messages: PGN 127250, 127251, 127257, 127252
Data: Magnetic heading (20 Hz), rate of turn (20 Hz), pitch/roll (10 Hz),
heave (10 Hz)
Status and warning information
Dynamic performance
- with random excitation of ± 10° at max 1 Hz Heading error <2°
- with heading step input of 90° at a rate of 10°/s Heading error 10 sec. after turn <2°
Environmental protection IPX7
Compass safe distance 0.5 m (1.7 ft)
Temperature range
Operation temperature -25 to +65°C (-13 to +149°F)
Storage temperature -30 to +70°C (-22 to +158°F)
Cable supplied 4.5 m (15 ft) incl. connector
Mounting Horizontal or vertical surface
Material Plastic
Disclaimer
Warning: Refer to important safety information in the user app guides, product documentation and review all warnings, limitations, and disclaimers before using this product.
This product is not a substitute for proper training and prudent seamanship. It is the owner’s sole responsibility to install and use the equipment in a manner that will not cause
accidents, personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is solely responsible for observing maritime safety practices.
Navigational features that appear in this guide are not a substitute for proper training and prudent seamanship. They do not replace a human navigator and SHOULD NOT be
relied on as a sole or primary source of navigation. It is the operator’s sole responsibility to use more than one navigational methods to ensure the route suggested by the system
is safe.
BRUNSWICK CORPORATION AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, BRANCHES AND AFFILIATES DISCLAIM ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A WAY THAT MAY
CAUSE ACCIDENTS, DAMAGE OR THAT MAY VIOLATE THE LAW.
This document represents the product at the time of publishing. Brunswick Corporation and its subsidiaries, branches and affiliates reserve the right to make changes to the
product and/or specifications at any time without notice. Please contact your nearest distributor if you require any further assistance.
Compliance statements
Declarations
The relevant declarations of conformity are available at: www.simrad-yachting.com, www.lowrance.com and www.bandg.com.
United Kingdom
The Precision™ 9 compass complies with UKCA under Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016.
Europe
The Precision™ 9 compass complies with CE under Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU.
United States of America
Note: The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Australia and New Zealand
The Precision™ 9 compass complies with the requirements of Level 2 devices of the Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Standard 2017.
Note: This product includes code from the Eigen project licensed under the MPL v2.0 license, available from http://eigen.tuxfamily.org/.
Copyright
©
2023 Navico Group. All Rights Reserved. Navico Group is a division of Brunswick Corporation.
Trademarks
®Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off, and ™ common law marks.
Visit www.navico.com/intellectual-property to review the global trademark rights and accreditations for Navico Group and other entities.
Warranty
The warranty card is supplied as a separate document. In case of any queries, refer to the brand website of your unit or system.
NAIS-500 Class B
AIS Transceiver
NAIS-500 unit User Manual
ENGLISH
www.bandg.com | www.simrad-yachting.com | www.lowrance.com
Preface
As Navico is continuously improving this product, we retain the
right to make changes to the product at any time which may not be
reflected in this version of the manual. Please contact your nearest
distributor if you require any further assistance.
It is the owner’s sole responsibility to install and use the NAIS-500
AIS Class B Transceiver in a manner that will not cause accidents,
personal injury or property damage. The user of this product is
solely responsible for observing safe boating practices.
NAVICO HOLDING AS AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES, BRANCHES AND AF-
FILIATES DISCLAIM ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT
IN A WAY THAT MAY CAUSE ACCIDENTS, DAMAGE OR THAT MAY
VIOLATE THE LAW.
Governing Language: This statement, any instruction manuals, user
guides and other information relating to the product (Documenta-
tion) may be translated to, or has been translated from, another
language (Translation). In the event of any conflict between any
Translation of the Documentation, the English language version will
be the official version of the Documentation.
This manual represents the product as at the time of printing.
Navico Holding AS and its subsidiaries, branches and affiliates re-
serve the right to make changes to specifications without notice.
Copyright
Copyright © 2017 Navico Holding AS.
Warranty
The warranty card is supplied as a separate document.
About this manual
Important text that requires special attention from the reader is
emphasized as follows:
¼¼ Note: Used to draw the reader’s attention to a comment or some
important information.
Warning: Used when it is necessary to warn personnel that
they should proceed carefully to prevent risk of injury and/or
damage to equipment/personnel.
Preface | NAIS-500 User Manual |1
Contents
1 Preface
4 Notices
4 Safety warnings
4 General notices
8 About your AIS class B transceiver
8 About AIS
9 Static and dynamic vessel data
9 Important information for US customers
10 What’s in the box?
13 Installation
13 Preparing for installation
15 Installation procedures
23 Configuring your AIS transceiver
23 Switching on your AIS transceiver for the first time
23 Configuring your AIS transceiver
24 Introduction to NAIS System Configurator
26 Operation
26 Using the AIS transceiver
26 Switch functions
26 Using NAIS System Configurator with your AIS transceiver
27 Indicator functions
28 Troubleshooting
29 Specifications
2| Contents | NAIS-500 User Manual
Table of figures
10 Figure 1 Items included with the product
11 Figure 2 AIS transceiver overview
12 Figure 3 Electrical connections to the AIS transceiver
13 Figure 4 Typical installation configuration
16 Figure 5 AIS transceiver dimensions
16 Figure 6 AIS transceiver mounting
17 Figure 7 GPS antenna mounting
17 Figure 8 Position of the GPS antenna connector
18 Figure 9 Position of the VHF antenna connector
20 Figure 10 Connecting an external switch
21 Figure 11 Connecting to the NMEA 0183 data port
22 Figure 12 Connecting the power supply
27 Figure 13 Indicator location on the AIS transceiver unit
Contents | NAIS-500 User Manual |3
1
Notices
When reading this manual, please pay particular attention to warn-
ings marked with the warning triangle. These are important mes-
sages for safety, installation and usage of the product.
Safety warnings
Warning: This equipment must be installed in accordance
with the instructions provided in this manual.
Warning: This AIS transceiver is an aid to navigation and
must not be relied upon to provide accurate navigation informa-
tion. AIS is not a replacement for vigilant human lookouts and
other navigation aids such as RADAR. Also, take note that not all
vessels will have an AIS transceiver turned on, or installed. The
performance of the transceiver may be seriously impaired if not
installed as instructed in the user manual, or due to other factors
such as weather and or nearby transmitting devices. Compatibil-
ity with other systems may vary and is reliant on the third party
systems recognizing the standard outputs from the transceiver.
The manufacturer reserves the right to update and change these
specifications at any time and without notice.
Warning: Do not install this equipment in a flammable
atmosphere such as in an engine room or near to fuel tanks.
General notices
Position source
All marine Automatic Identification System (AIS) transceivers utilize a
satellite-based location system such as the Global Positioning Satel-
lite (GPS) network. The accuracy of a GPS position fix is variable and
is affected by factors such as the antenna positioning, the number
of satellites used to determine the position and for how long satel-
lite information has been received.
Compass safe distance
The compass safe distance of this unit is 0.55 m or greater for 0.3°
deviation.
4| Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual
RF emissions notice
¼¼ Note: The AIS transceiver generates and radiates radio frequency elec-
tromagnetic energy. This equipment must be installed and operated
according to the instructions contained in this manual. Failure to do so
can result in malfunctioning of the receiver or personal injury.
¼¼ Note: Never operate the AIS transceiver unless it is connected to a
VHF antenna.
To maximize performance and minimize human exposure to radio
frequency electromagnetic energy you must make sure that the an-
tenna is mounted at least 1.5 meters away from the AIS transceiver
and is connected to the AIS transceiver before power is applied.
The system has a Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) radius of
0.6 m. This has been determined assuming the maximum power of
the AIS transceiver and using antennas with a maximum gain of 3 db.
The antenna should be mounted 3.5 m above the deck in order to
meet RF exposure requirements. Higher gain antennas will require a
greater MPE radius. Do not operate the unit when anyone is within
the MPE radius of the antenna (unless they are shielded from the an-
tenna field by a grounded metallic barrier). The antenna should not
be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other transmit-
ting antenna. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
Warranty
This product is supplied with standard warranty as defined in the
accompanying warranty information.
Warning: Any attempt to tamper with or damage the
product will invalidate the warranty.
Disposal of this product and packaging
Please dispose of the AIS transceiver in accordance with the
European WEEE Directive or with the applicable local regulations for
disposal of electrical equipment.
Every effort has been made to ensure the packaging for this product
is recyclable. Please dispose of the packaging in an environmentally
friendly manner.
Accuracy of this manual
The AIS transceiver may be upgraded from time to time and future
versions of the AIS transceiver may therefore not correspond exactly
Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual |5
with this manual. Information contained in this manual is liable to
change without notice. The manufacturer of this product disclaims
any liability for consequences arising from omissions or inaccura-
cies in this manual and any other documentation provided with this
product.
Declaration of conformity
The manufacturer of this product declares that this product is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other provisions of
the 2014/53/EU Directive. The declaration of conformity is provided
with the product document pack. The product carries the CE mark,
notified body number and alert symbol as required by the 2014/53/
EU Directive. The product is intended for sale in the countries listed
under Specifications.
FCC notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the lim-
its for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. This device complies
with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Warning: It is a violation of the rules of the Federal Communi-
cations Commission to input an MMSI that has not been properly
assigned to the end user, or to otherwise input any inaccurate
data in this device.
6| Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual
Industry Canada notice
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le Fonctionne-
ment.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
Notices | NAIS-500 User Manual |7
2
About your AIS class B transceiver
About AIS
The marine Automatic Identification System (AIS) is a location and
vessel information reporting system. It allows vessels equipped with
AIS to automatically and dynamically share and regularly update
their position, speed, course and other information such as vessel
identity with similarly equipped vessels. Position is derived from the
Global Positioning System (GPS) and communication between ves-
sels is by Very High Frequency (VHF) digital transmissions.
There are a number of types of AIS device as follows:
• Class A transceivers. These are similar to class B transceivers, but
they are designed to be fitted on large vessels such as cargo ships
and large passenger vessels. Class A transceivers transmit at a higher
VHF signal power than class B transceivers and therefore can be
received by more distant vessels, and also transmit more frequently.
Class A transceivers are mandatory on all vessels over 300 gross
tonnes on international voyages and certain types of passenger ves-
sels under the SOLAS regulations.
• Class B transceivers. Similar to class A transceivers in many ways,
but are normally lower cost due to the less stringent performance
requirements. Class B transceivers transmit at a lower power and at a
lower reporting rate than class A transceivers.
• AIS base stations. AIS base stations are used by Vessel Traffic Sys-
tems to monitor and control the transmissions of AIS transceivers.
• Aids to Navigation (AtoN) transceivers. AtoNs are transceivers
mounted on buoys or other hazards to shipping which transmit
details of their location to the surrounding vessels.
• AIS receivers. AIS receivers will generally receive transmissions
from class ANAIS-500
transceivers,
unit
class B transceivers, AtoNs and AIS base sta-
tions but do not transmit any information about the vessel on which
they are installed.
• This NAIS-500 product is an AIS Class B transceiver.
NAIS-500
8| About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
Static and dynamic vessel data
There are two categories of information transmitted by an AIS trans-
ceiver: static and dynamic data.
The vessel’s dynamic data, which includes location, speed over
ground (SOG) and course over ground (COG), is calculated auto-
matically using the installed AIS antenna.
Static data is information about the vessel which must be pro-
grammed into the AIS transceiver. This includes:
• Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI)
• Vessel name
• Vessel call sign (if available)
• Vessel type
• Vessel dimensions
In most countries the operation of an AIS transceiver is included
under the vessel’s marine VHF license provisions. The vessel on to
which the AIS unit is to be installed must therefore possess a current
VHF radiotelephone license which lists the AIS system, vessel Call
Sign and MMSI number.
Warning: An MMSI number is required in order for the AIS
transceiver to operate. Please contact the relevant authority in
your country for more information.
Important information for US customers
There are specific laws in the USA regarding the configuration of AIS
class B transceivers. If you are a US resident and intend to use your
AIS class B transceiver in US waters, you should make sure that your
retailer has configured your product prior to supplying it to you. If
your AIS transceiver has not been pre-configured, please contact
your dealer for details of how to have it configured.
Warning: In the United States of America, the MMSI and
static data must only be entered by a competent installer. The
end user of the equipment is not authorized to enter their own
vessel data.
About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual |9
What’s in the box?
Figure 1 shows the items included with your AIS transceiver pur-
chase. The following sections will give a brief overview of each item.
Please
Fig. 1 ensure allboxitems are present. If any of the items are missing,
What’s in the
please contact your dealer.
¼¼ Note: Optional items are included only in NAIS-500 kit: 000-13609-001.
NAIS-500 Quick
start guide
Product manual
Product CD
Warranty
information
Screws T-Connector
(packet of 4) (Optional)
Power and data cable USB configuration cable GPS antenna (Optional) N2k cable (Optional)
Figure 1 Items included with the product
Support tools CD
The CD supplied with the package contains the following:
• NAIS System Configurator software tool necessary to configure the
AIS transceiver. Please refer to section 4 for details of the configura-
tion process and how to use the NAIS System Configurator tool.
• USB drivers required to connect to the AIS transceiver via USB.
• Alternative language versions of this manual.
Quick start guide
The quick start guide gives a handy one-page reference for the
installation process.
Product manual
This document is the product manual and should be read thor-
oughly prior to any attempt to install or use the AIS transceiver.
10 | About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
Fixing screws
Four fixing screws are provided with the product for mounting of
the AIS transceiver. Please refer to the Installation procedures, chap-
ter 3 for details of how to mount the AIS transceiver.
AIS transceiver unit
Figure 2 shows an overview of the AIS transceiver unit.
The AIS transceiver has a number of indicators which provide in-
formation to the user about the status of the AIS transceiver. Please
refer to Indicator functions, chapter 5 for more details.
The AIS transceiver has an external GPS antenna. You should ensure
that the GPS antenna is mounted where it has a clear view of the
sky.
Power and data cable
The power and data cable connects to the AIS transceiver and en-
ables connection
Fig. 2 Overview to power, NMEA 0183 and an external silent mode
switch.
Indicator lights VHF Antenna GPS Antenna
Orange/
Green Red Green
Green
Mounting holes Mounting holes
USB Power and data
NMEA 2000
Figure 2 AIS transceiver overview
About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual | 11
Electrical connections
ctric connections The AIS transceiver has the following electrical connections:
• Power supply
• Two independent NMEA 0183 data ports for connection to chart-
plotters and other NMEA 0183 compatible equipment
• USB port for connection to a PC or Mac
• External switch input for silent mode control
• NMEA 2000 port for connection to NMEA 2000 compatible equip-
ment.
In addition, there are two other connections for the VHF antenna
and the external GPS antenna. Figure 3 shows an overview of the
electrical connections to the AIS transceiver.
NAIS-500
Chartplotter
NMEA0183
device
USB Switch
Power in
NMEA 2000
Figure 3 Electrical connections to the AIS transceiver
12 | About your AIS class B transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
3
Installation
Preparing
Fig. 4 Installation config. for installation
Figure 4 shows a typical installation configuration for the AIS trans-
ceiver. Please take the time to familiarize yourself with the system
elements and their connections prior to attempting installation.
VHF antenna
GPS antenna
NAIS-500
Chartplotter
NMEA 0183
device
Switch
PC (optional)
Power in
NMEA 2000
Figure 4 Typical installation configuration
In addition to the items provided with your AIS transceiver the fol-
lowing items will be required for installation:
VHF antenna
Connection to a suitable VHF antenna will be required for the AIS
transceiver to operate. A standard marine band VHF antenna such as
that used with VHF voice radios will be sufficient. Please take note of
the warnings in section 1 regarding the use of antennas.
Alternatively, if you wish to use an existing VHF antenna, install a
Navico NSPL-500 VHF Antenna Splitter, which allow the existing an-
tenna to be used with two radio devices, such as a VHF voice radio
and the NAIS-500 transceiver.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 13
Warning: If using a VHF Antenna Splitter, you must use the
NSPL-500 as it is specifically designed to work with the NAIS-500
transceiver. The use of third party antenna splitters may result in
malfunction or permanent damage to the NAIS-500 transceiver.
Optional Silent Mode switch
A switch can be connected to the transceiver to enable and disable
‘silent mode’ (see Step 4 and 5 in Installation procedures, chapter 3).
A latching toggle switch is required to use this feature.
VHF antenna cable
Please check that the VHF antenna you intend to use has sufficient
cable to reach between the VHF antenna and the AIS transceiver
unit. If it is not sufficient, you will need an extension cable. Please
contact your dealer for details of suitable products. For reference,
the VHF antenna connector type on the AIS transceiver unit is
SO 239, and is intended to mate with a PL 259 connector. The re-
quired cable impedance is 50 ohms.
Power and data cable
The AIS transceiver unit is supplied with a 2-meter-long power and
data cable as an accessory. If you require longer cables to reach your
power supply, please ensure the cables are capable of carrying cur-
rents of up to 2A peak and 200mA on average. Please contact your
local qualified marine installer.
Chartplotters
To display received AIS messages from other vessels on your chart-
plotter, you will need to connect your AIS transceiver to your chart-
plotter. Please refer to the user manual supplied with your chartplot-
ter for details of how to connect and configure your chartplotter for
use with AIS devices. For general guidance, your chartplotter should
be configured to accept NMEA 0183 data at 38400 baud (sometimes
referred to as ‘NMEA HS’ in the plotter configuration menu).
Alternatively, if you use an NMEA 2000 network on your vessel, you
can connect the AIS transceiver to your NMEA 2000 network via the
supplied cable. Refer to your chartplotter manual for making NMEA
2000 connection. You may also need to enable the display of AIS
targets in the chart options.
14 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Connection to a PC or Mac
If you choose to use a PC or Mac with suitable charting software
to display received AIS messages from other vessels, this can be
accomplished by connecting to the USB connector on the AIS
transceiver.
Installation procedures
Before beginning the installation of your AIS transceiver, please en-
sure you have the necessary additional items as detailed in the previ-
ous section Preparing for installation. It is strongly recommended that
you read all of the instructions in this manual prior to installation.
If, after reading this manual, you are unsure about any element of
the installation process, please contact your dealer for advice.
The following sections explain the installation process step by step
for each of the main elements of the system.
Step 1 - Installing the NAIS-500 AIS transceiver
Please note the following guidelines when selecting a location for
your AIS transceiver:
• The compass safe distance of this unit is 0.55 m or greater for 0.3°
deviation.
• There should be adequate space around the AIS transceiver for rout-
ing of cables. See Figure 5 for details of the AIS transceiver dimen-
sions.
• The ambient temperature around the AIS transceiver should be
maintained between -15°C and +55°C.
• The AIS transceiver should not be located in a flammable or hazard-
ous atmosphere such as an engine room or near fuel tanks.
• The AIS transceiver is fully waterproof to ingress protection rating
IPx7. However, it is recommended that the AIS transceiver not be
subjected to extended periods of exposure to spray or submersion.
• It is acceptable to mount the AIS transceiver either vertically or
horizontally.
• It is recommended that the AIS transceiver is installed in a ‘below
deck’ environment.
• The product is supplied with four selftapping screws for attachment
of the AIS transceiver to a suitable surface. Please refer to Figure 6 for
guidance.
• The AIS transceiver should be mounted in a location where the
indicators are readily visible as these provide important information
on the status of the AIS transceiver.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 15
Fig. 5 Dimensions
132.5mm 53mm
47mm
98mm
151.5mm
Fig. 6 Mounting
Figure 5 AIS transceiver dimensions
Figure 6 AIS transceiver mounting
Step 2 - Installing the external GPS antenna
It is not recommended that the GPS antenna is mounted up a mast
where the motion of the vessel will cause the antenna to swing and
potentially reduce the accuracy of the GPS position. Also, do not
mount the antenna in the direct path of a radar transmitter.
To pole mount the external GPS antenna, you will require a 1-inch
14 TPI thread pole.
• Feed the cable attached to the GPS antenna through the pole.
• Mount the pole into position as shown in Figure 7.
• Fit the GPS antenna to the pole adapter using the 2 small screws.
16 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Figure 7 GPS antenna mounting
To surface mount the external GPS antenna, select a flat clean sur-
face area that has a clear view of the sky. Mount the antenna using
the supplied gasket and the 2 small screws.
• Mark and drill the 2 mounting holes and a further hole if necessary
for the GPS cable.
• Install the gasket by firstly threading the attached cable through the
center of the gasket.
• Screw the GPS antenna to the mounting surface.
• Route the cable to your AIS transceiver unit, adding any necessary
extension cables.
• Connect the cable from the GPS antenna to the GPS connector on
the AIS transceiver as shown in Figure 8.
Fig. 8 Location - GPS
¼¼ Note: Ensure the surface mounting area is clean with no dirt, old
paint or debris.
VHF Antenna GPS Antenna
Figure 8 Position of the GPS antenna connector
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 17
Step 3 - Connecting the VHF antenna
Route the cable from the VHF antenna to the AIS transceiver and
connect to the VHF connector on the AIS transceiver as shown in
Figure 9. Fig. 9 Location - VHF
VHF Antenna GPS Antenna
Figure 9 Position of the VHF antenna connector
A standard marine band VHF antenna or AIS antenna should be used
with the AIS transceiver. The connector type on the AIS transceiver
is SO239. Your chosen VHF antenna requires a PL259 connector to
mate with this. If your VHF antenna does not use this type of connec-
tor, please contact your dealer for details of available adaptors.
18 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Step 4 - Connecting the accessory cable
An accessory cable is supplied with the product to provide connec-
tions to power, the external switch and the NMEA 0183 data ports.
The cable has a pre-moulded connector at one end which should
be connected to the connector on the unit marked ‘PWR/0183’. The
other end of the cable has eight color-coded bare wires ready for
connection. The table below lists the function of each color-coded
wire for reference.
Pin
Wire color Description Function
no.
Red 8 Power in + Power supply
Power in - connections
Black 9 12 V to 24 V DC
Light green 12 Switch input- External switch
connection for silent
Orange 10 Switch input+ mode
NMEA 0183 port 1
Brown 1
TX+ (Transmit +)
NMEA 0183 port 1 High speed NMEA 0183
Blue 2
TX- (Transmit -) - Port 1: (38,400 baud)
NMEA 0183 port 1 intended for connection
White 3 to chartplotters
RX+ (Receive +)
NMEA 0183 port 1
Green 4
RX- (Receive -)
NMEA 0183 port 2
Purple 11
TX+ (Transmit +)
NMEA 0183 port 2 Low speed NMEA 0183
Pink 7 - Port 2: (4,800 baud)
TX- (Transmit -)
intended for connection
NMEA 0183 port 2 to other NMEA 0183
Grey 6
RX+ (Receive +) compatible devices
NMEA 0183 port 2
Yellow 5
RX- (Receive -)
Color-coding of wires in the accessory cable
Warning: Please check your wiring very carefully before ap-
plying power to the product. Failure to wire the product correctly
could result in permanent damage.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 19
Step 5 - Connecting an external switch for Silent Mode operation
A toggle switch can be connected to the AIS transceiver to provide
remote control of silent mode. Connect the toggle switch between
the light green and orange wires as shown in Figure 10. Connection
of an external switch to toggle silent mode is optional and not es-
sential for normal operation of the product.
Warning:
Fig. 10 External switch
Do not connect a voltage source across the switch
inputs, as this may damage the transceiver.
Red
Power in +
Black
Power in –
Light green
Switch input +
Orange
Switch input –
Brown
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Blue
Port 1 Transmit –
38,400baud White
Receive +
(chart plotter) Green
Receive –
Purple
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Pink
Port 2 Transmit –
Grey
4,800baud Receive +
(other NMEA0183 device) Yellow
Receive –
Figure 10 Connecting an external switch
Step 6 - Connecting to NMEA 0183 compatible equipment
The two independent NMEA 0183 data ports provide connection
to your chartplotter and other NMEA 0183 compatible equipment.
Each port consists of four color-coded wires, as shown in the table
(Step 4) and in the diagram in Figure 11. Connect the wires to the
appropriate connections on your NMEA 0183 compatible equip-
ment. Please refer to your equipment manual for more information.
The AIS transceiver has a high speed bi-directional port, which
operates at 38,400 baud and a low speed bi-directional port, which
operates at 4,800 baud. The high speed port is intended primarily
to connect to a chartplotter, while the low speed port is intended
to connect to other NMEA 0183 devices. A multiplexing feature is
provided, which means any messages received via the low speed
port are automatically transmitted via the high speed port and vice-
20 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
versa. This is particularly useful when using a chartplotter having
only a single NMEA 0183 port. An additional sensor, such as a gyro-
compass, can be connected to the AIS transceiver via the low speed
port and the AIS transceiver can be connected via the high speed
port to the chartplotter resulting in the chartplotter receiving both
AIS information and heading information simultaneously. Please
Fig. 11 NMEA0183 data
ensure your equipment is configured to use the correct baud rate
for the port it is connected to.
Red
Power in +
Black
Power in –
Light green
Switch input +
Orange
Switch input –
Brown
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Blue
Port 1 Transmit –
38,400baud White
Receive +
(chart plotter) Green
Receive –
Purple
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Pink
Port 2 Transmit –
Grey
4,800baud Receive +
(other NMEA0183 device) Yellow
Receive –
Figure 11 Connecting to the NMEA 0183 data port
Step 7 - Connection to an NMEA 2000 network (optional)
The AIS transceiver can be connected to an NMEA 2000 network
by a suitable Navico NMEA 2000 network cable. If your vessel has
a NMEA 2000 network, please refer to the relevant documentation
for your NMEA 2000 equipment. Once connected, and with your
chartplotter also connected to your NMEA 2000 network, you will
be able to receive AIS targets on your chartplotter.
Step 8 - USB Connection (optional)
The AIS transceiver is supplied with a USB port for connection to
a PC or Mac. The USB connector can be connected directly to the
USB port on the PC or Mac via the supplied USB cable. To enable
connection of the AIS transceiver to a PC, the USB drivers must be
installed first.
Please install NAIS System Configurator as described in section 4
before attempting to connect the USB port to a PC.
Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 21
Once installed the AIS unit can be connected to the PC. The USB
device will be automatically detected and will appear as a new COM
port device. Select this COM port and a baud rate of 38,400 in PC
based navigation software to make use of the AIS data.
Warning: If the USB connection is removed from the PC or
Mac during use, you must reset the connection before further
use. To reset the connection: disconnect, then re-apply power to
the AIS before closing and re-launching any PC or Mac applica-
tions using the USB connection. Finally, re-connect the USB cable
between the PC or Mac and the AIS transceiver.
Step 9 - Connection to a power supply
The AIS transceiver requires a 12V or 24V power supply, typically
provided by the vessel’s battery. It is recommended that crimped
and soldered lugs are used to connect the AIS transceiver to the
power source. It is recommended that the power supply is con-
nected via a suitable circuit breaker and/or 3A fuse block.
1. Connect the red wire to a 12V or 24V power supply positive terminal.
2. Fig.
Connect
12 Powerthe black wire to the supply negative terminal.
supply
Red
Power in +
Black
Power in –
Light green
Switch input +
Orange
Switch input –
Brown
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Blue
Port 1 Transmit –
38,400baud White
Receive +
(chart plotter) Green
Receive –
Purple
Transmit +
NMEA0183 Pink
Port 2 Transmit –
Grey
4,800baud Receive +
(other NMEA0183 device) Yellow
Receive –
Figure 12 Connecting the power supply
22 | Installation | NAIS-500 User Manual
4
Configuring your AIS transceiver
Until correctly configured, your AIS class B transceiver will only
receive AIS messages and will not transmit AIS messages.
Switching on your AIS transceiver for the
first time
A few seconds after applying power to the AIS transceiver, the
indicators on the unit will illuminate in a pattern dependent on the
configuration state of the unit. The function of the four LED indica-
tors are:
Indicator Light Function
PWR Green Unit is powered up and operating normally
ERR Red Unit has experienced an error or invalid
MMSI*
Rx Green Unit is receiving AIS data when flashing
Tx Orange Silent mode is activated
*) See table in section 5 for details.
If the AIS transceiver has been pre-configured, the orange (Tx) indi-
cator will illuminate until a transmission has been sent by the unit.
This may take several minutes, as the transceiver must acquire a GPS
position fix prior to transmitting its first message.
If the transceiver has not been pre-configured, the orange and red
indicators will be illuminated until the configuration process has
been completed.
Configuring your AIS transceiver
There are two potential ways in which your AIS transceiver can be
configured:
1. Configuration in advance by your dealer or installer. If your AIS transceiver
has been configured for you by your dealer or installer, you can proceed to
chapter 5.
2. Configuration using NAIS System Configurator.
Providing it is acceptable to do so under your local legislation, it is
possible to configure your AIS transceiver yourself using the NAIS
System Configurator software provided with the product.
Configuring your AIS transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual | 23
Warning: US Customers only: It is a violation of the rules of
the Federal Communications Commission for the end user to
program the vessel data. The vessel data must only be pro-
grammed by a competent installer. If your AIS transceiver has
not been pre-configured for you, please contact your dealer
for advice on how to have the AIS transceiver configured by a
competent installer.
Introduction to NAIS System Configurator
Included in the CD supplied with your product is a software tool
called ‘NAIS System Configurator’. NAIS System Configurator provides
the facility to configure, monitor and diagnose issues with your AIS
transceiver. NAIS System Configurator can provide assistance when
ensuring that a satisfactory GPS signal is being received.
See the sections immediately below for how to install NAIS System
Configurator and how to configure the AIS transceiver using NAIS
System Configurator. Further help on how to use the features of NAIS
System Configurator can be found in the ‘Help’ menu within the NAIS
System Configurator tool. NAIS System Configurator is designed to be in-
stalled and used with a PC or Mac connected to the AIS transceiver
via USB using the supplied USB cable.
Installing NAIS System Configurator - PC
1. Insert the CD into your PC, navigate to the “NAIS System Configurator”, then
the “Windows” folder and run the setup.exe file. Now follow the on-screen
prompts.
2. If a security warning appears, click ‘Run’ to continue with the installation.
3. Once the installation is complete, NAIS System Configurator will launch au-
tomatically and a start menu folder and shortcut will be created for future
use.
Installing NAIS System Configurator - Mac
1. Insert the CD into your Mac, then navigate to the ‘NAIS System Configura-
tor’ then the ‘OSX’ folder.
2. Double click the NAIS System Configurator.dmg file and then follow the on-
screen instructions to complete the installation.
24 | Configuring your AIS transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual
Configuration using NAIS System Configurator
For configuration purposes only, it is possible to power the AIS
transceiver via its USB connection. This is useful if you wish to con-
figure your AIS transceiver away from the vessel power supply. The
AIS transceiver will not transmit any data or acquire a GPS position
fix whilst powered by USB.
You will require the following information in order to configure your
AIS transceiver:
• MMSI
• Vessel name
• Vessel type
• Call sign
Vessel dimensions and position of your GPS antenna installation.
For further assistance in configuring your AIS transceiver, please
refer to the Help menu within NAIS System Configurator.
Warning: Please ensure that you enter all vessel data ac-
curately. Failure to do so could result in other vessels failing
to identify your vessel correctly. The vessel MMSI can only be
programmed once using NAIS System Configurator, please take
care to program your MMSI correctly. If you need to change the
MMSI for any reason, please contact your dealer who will arrange
to have the MMSI reset.
Configuring your AIS transceiver | NAIS-500 User Manual | 25
5
Operation
Using the AIS transceiver
Once the unit has been configured, it is ready for use. Providing that
other vessels with AIS transceivers installed are within radio range of
your vessel, you should see their details appear on your chartplotter
or PC. These vessels will also be able to see your vessel on their
chartplotter or PC. It may take up to six minutes for your full vessel
details to be visible to others.
Specific details of how to configure your chartplotter to make use
of the AIS transceiver features will be given in your chartplotter
manual. If you are using charting software running on a PC, please
refer to the instructions provided with your chartplotting software
for details of how to configure it to display AIS information.
Switch functions
When connected to the AIS transceiver and by following the in-
structions in Step 4 and 5 under Installation procedures, chapter 3,
an external switch provides the ability to set the AIS transceiver into
‘silent mode’. In silent mode, the transmission of your own vessel
position ceases, whilst the reception of other vessels’ AIS position
continues. You should use silent mode if you do not wish your ves-
sel data to be received by other AIS devices. When silent mode is
active, the orange light on Tx indicator will be illuminated.
Warning: When silent mode is active, other vessels will not be
able to receive your vessel information on their AIS devices. Your
navigational safety may be compromised as a result.
Using NAIS System Configurator with your
AIS transceiver
The NAIS System Configurator tool has a range of features to help
monitor the performance of your AIS transceiver. To use the full
range of features, your AIS transceiver must be installed as described
in chapter 3 and connected to a PC, running the NAIS System Con-
figurator application. Follow the instructions provided in the help
menu within NAIS System Configurator.
26 | Operation | NAIS-500 User Manual
Indicator functions
The AIS transceiver includes four LED indicators, as shown in Figure
Fig. 13 Indicator lights
13. The state of the indicators provides information regarding the
status of the AIS transceiver.
Indicator lights
Green Amber Red Blue
Figure 13 Indicator location on the AIS transceiver unit
The meaning of typical indicator configurations is shown in the table
below and Figure 13 shows the orientation of the AIS transceiver.
Indicator Light Description
PWR Green, steady The transceiver has been powered up correctly.
ERR Red, steady MMSI is not properly programmed.
Red, flashing The transceiver has detected a system error. Also the state when
connected to USB only for initial programming.
Rx Green, flashing The transceiver is receiving AIS data.
Tx Orange, The transceiver is acquiring a GPS fix, no AIS transmission during
flashing this time period.
This can be the following situation:
The device is just newly powered on and is acquiring a GPS
position fix prior to transmitting its first vessel information
report. This process may take several minutes.
The GPS position fix has been lost. The device is attempting
to re-acquire position fix for 30 minutes before entering a BIIT
system error state.
Orange, steady The transceiver is in silent mode, no AIS transmission at all.
Green, flashing The transceiver is transmitting AIS data.
The flash interval is 3 minutes when vessel speed under 2 knots.
The flash interval is 30 seconds when vessel speed above 2
knots.
Operation | NAIS-500 User Manual | 27
6
Troubleshooting
Issue Possible cause and remedy
No data is being • Check that the power supply is connected
received by the correctly.
chartplotter • Check that the power supply is a 12 V or 24 V
supply.
• Check that the connections to the chartplotter
are correct.
No indicators are • Check that the power supply is connected
illuminated correctly.
• Check that the power supply is a 12 V or 24 V
supply.
The Red 'error' • The unit may not have a valid MMSI. Check that
indicator is the AIS transceiver is correctly configured with a
illuminated valid MMSI.
• The VHF antenna may be faulty. Check the
connection to the VHF antenna and that the
VHF antenna is not damaged. The red indicator
may illuminate briefly if the power supply is
interrupted or the VHF antenna characteristics
are briefly affected.
• No GPS position fix can be obtained. Check that
the external GPS antenna is properly connected
and installed. Review the GPS signal strength
graph available in NAIS System Configurator.
• The power supply is outside the allowable
range. Check that the power supply is within the
range 9.6 V to 31.2 V.
• If none of the above will correct the error
condition, please contact your dealer for advice.
My MMSI is being Some older AIS devices and chartplotters do not
received by other process the specific class B AIS message, which
vessels, but my provides the vessel name (message 24). This
vessel name is not is not a fault of your AIS transceiver. Software
shown on their upgrades are available for many older chart-
chartplotter or PC plotters which will correct this issue. The other
vessel should update its AIS unit and/or chart-
plotting software to receive AIS message 24.
If the guidance given in the table above does not rectify the prob-
lem you are experiencing, please contact your dealer for further
assistance.
28 | Troubleshooting | NAIS-500 User Manual
7
Specifications
Parameter Value
Dimensions 152 x 98 x 52 mm (L x W x H)
Weight 260 g
Power DC (9.6 V - 31.2 V)
Average power consumption 180 mA at 12
VDC
Peak current rating 2 A at 12 VDC
GPS receiver 50 channel IEC 61108-1 compliant
(AIS internal)
Electrical USB
interfaces NMEA 0183, default 38,400 baud (bi-
directional)
NMEA 0183, default 4,800 baud (bi-
directional)
NMEA 2000 LEN=1
Connections VHF antenna connector (SO-239)
External GPS antenna connector (SMA)
USB type mini-B
NMEA 2000 standard connector
12 way power input/NMEA 0183/external
switch
VHF transceiver AIS transmitter x 1
AIS receiver x 2 (one receiver time shared
between AIS and DSC)
Frequency: 156.025 to 162.025 MHz in 25 kHz
steps
Output power 33 dBm ± 1.5 dB
Channel 25 kHz
bandwidth
Channel step 25 kHz
Modulation 25 kHz GMSK (AIS, Tx and Rx)
modes 25 kHz AFSK (DSC, Rx only)
Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual | 29
Bit rate 9600 b/s ± 50 ppm (GMSK)
1200 b/s ± 30 ppm (FSK)
RX sensitivity Less than -107 dBm at 20% PER
Co-channel 10 dB
Adjacent channel 70 dB
IMD 65 dB
Blocking 84 dB
Parameter Value
Environmental Water resistant to IP67
Operating temperature: -15ºC to +55ºC
Tested to IEC 60945 'Protected' category
Indicators Power, Error, Rx, Tx (silent mode)
Countries of intended use in the EU
AT - Austria HU - Hungary PL - Poland
BE - Belgium IS - Iceland PT - Portugal
BG - Bulgaria IE - Ireland RO - Romania
CY - Cyprus IT - Italy SK - Slovakia
CZ - Czech Republic LI - Liechtenstein SL - Slovenia
DK - Denmark LV - Latvia ES - Spain
EE - Estonia LT - Lithuania SE - Sweden
FI - Finland LU - Luxembourg CH - Switzerland
FR - France MT - Malta TR - Turkey
DE - Germany NL - Netherlands UK - United
Kingdom
GR - Greece NO - Norway
30 | Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual
NOTES:
Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual | 31
NOTES:
32 | Specifications | NAIS-500 User Manual
*988-11240-001*
www.bandg.com
www.simrad-yachting.com
www.lowrance.com
201-0320:2 NAIS-500 Product Manual
1 (15)
04.06.2025
Boomeranger Boats_Features and Equipment under 6m
FOREWORD
This document includes marketing images and drawings from Boomeranger and its vendors.
All boat pictures are from existing earlier delivered Boomeranger Boats RHIBs. The images are
included for illustrative purposes only and do not necessarily reflect the actual, offered
product in all aspects. In case of any conflict between the written specification and included
images/pictures/drawings, the written text prevails.
Picture: C-550 OB
Boomeranger Boats Oy Tel. +358 19 515 805
[email protected]
Troolitie 12, FIN-07910 Valko, Finland www.boomeranger.fi
2 (15)
INTRODUCTION
The Boomeranger Special Operations Boats are based on Boomeranger’s proprietary hull
platforms and solutions which are customized according to customer requirements by
Boomeranger’s in-house design department.
Boats are built by experienced craftsmen, in a purpose-built factory in Finland. There is no
significant outsourced manufacturing involved, the quality controlling mechanisms are
entirely within the company and the highest quality level in all manufacturing stages is
guaranteed.
Picture: C-400 OB
Picture: C-600 OB
3 (15)
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 2
1. REGULATIONS AND RULES .............................................................................................................. 4
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 4
3. EXPORT LICENCE .............................................................................................................................. 5
4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................................... 6
5. HULL AND DECK ................................................................................................................................. 7
Hull, bilge system and hull equipment ........................................................................................................... 7
Deck ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
6. COLLAR ............................................................................................................................................. 10
Inflatable tube ............................................................................................................................................... 10
7. LIFTING SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 12
4- point lifting ................................................................................................................................................ 12
8. PAINTS AND COLOUR ...................................................................................................................... 12
9. PLATES AND TAGS........................................................................................................................... 13
10. SAFETY EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................................... 13
11. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 14
Road and slipway trailer ............................................................................................................................... 14
4 (15)
1. REGULATIONS AND RULES
The boat shall be built according to Eurofins Scientific Expert Services Guidelines for
Commercial Craft version 2021, Category C (significant wave height up to 2m, wind force and
Beaufort wind force 6), length less than 24 m. Stability and loading are according to the ISO
6185-3 standard.
Project-specific rules and certificates may apply.
The company holds valid ISO9001 and ISO14001 quality management system certificates.
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION
Warranty period
Hull 60 months
Tube 12 months
Seats 12 months
Other equipment 12 months
Construction work 24 months
Spare part installation 12 months
*whichever comes first and depending of the engine model
Warranty is subject to maintenance of all the components as per manuals and instructions
during the warranty period.
Warranty period starts from accepted delivery of the boat.
5 (15)
3. EXPORT LICENCE
The product is categorized as a military product due to the equipment installed. Delivery of this
product requires an export license from respective authorities. For the licensing process, end-
user certificates are required to be delivered prior or during the contract signing process.
6 (15)
4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Main Dimensions
Length over all 2,5 – 6,0 m
Beam over all c. 1,5 – 2,5 m
Hull draft* max. 0,7 m
Light weight* TBD
Performance
Performance at light weight in SeaState TBD
0
Range TBD
Fuel tank size TBD
Propulsion
Engines TBD
Power TBD
Propeller type TBD
Environmental conditions for operation and storage
Ambient temperature -10°C to +45°C
Sea water temperature 0°C to +35°C
The OEMs instructions for use and maintenance must be followed to ensure the proper functioning
of the equipment. Temperature-related instructions are compiled in the boat's user manual.
7 (15)
5. HULL AND DECK
Hull, bilge system and hull equipment
The hull is a conventional deep-V mono hull with spray rails with a 22 degrees dead rise at the
transom to minimize physical impacts on the personnel and for logical behaviour in rough
weather conditions and different loading conditions. Deep V-shape hull combined with a
robust structure translates to a softer ride with lower peak accelerations in waves, and the
ability to travel at a higher speed in rough conditions.
8 (15)
Hull equipment
Keel can be protected with metal keel
guard. Another option is integrated
casted PU-keel flush with hull.
Heavy duty bow ring for trailering,
mooring or towing. The bow ring is
recessed to avoid getting stuck to
protruding objects.
D-rubber profiles to protect the edges
and nose of the hull.
Two Heavy duty D-rings in the aft for
towing or trailer lashing.
9 (15)
Deck
The deck is manufactured from glass fibre using vinyl ester resin, the core material being high
density PVC foam. The deck is bonded into the hull beams to form a solid structure.
The deck is positioned above
water level and has two draining
outlets that allow it to self-drain
through the transom. The
outlets are equipped with heavy-
duty sleeves to prevent
backflush.
The deck is equipped with a
deck track system. The deck
track system allows the seats, ,
cargo tie-downs and other
equipment to be easily
replaced for re-configuration of
the deck area (front and aft of
the console) without any
special tools. Lashing points
can be attached on the track
where needed.
Lashing points on the sides of
the deck.
The deck will have anti-slip
protection.
10 (15)
6. COLLAR
Inflatable tube
The RHIB is provided with a round air-filled tube. Additional foam cover can be added in the
tube or only in bow section.
Main characteristics
Rules The inflatable tube material, volume and
compartmentation fulfil requirements of EN
ISO 6185-3. RIB tube collar material,
production and testing fulfil requirements of
ISO 6185-3:2024.
Material and density The inflatable tube is manufactured from Orca
866 fabric (equivalent to Hypalon*) which is
designed for heavy duty applications. The density
of the fabric is 1500 g/m2 (1670 dtex).
Chambers The tube consists of separate circular buoyancy
chambers, each equipped with filling and over
pressure valves.
11 (15)
Equipment
Heavy duty EPDM rubbing strakes on the
whole length to protect the tube from
side impacts. The material is non-
staining. The rubbing strake is
adhesively installed, and it is easily
replaceable if damaged or worn out.
Flush or profiled.
Tube is fitted with non-slip surface on the
upper side in all walking areas.
Lifeline as per customer requirement.
Pouches and handles
12 (15)
7. LIFTING SYSTEM
4- point lifting
The boat is fitted with heavy duty 4-point lifting eyes and delivered with certified lifting sling set.
The equipment is dimensioned and intended for lifting the boat with delivered items and a full
fuel tank.
The lifting points are located well off the work deck area so that they don’t disturb operation on
open deck when they are not in use.
Sling lengths will be minimized allowing the operation in confined spaces, TBD with the
Customer.
8. PAINTS AND COLOUR
High quality, commercial paint system will be applied to all boat parts and structures. Paint
systems comply with environmental legislation.
Colour of the boat is black or grey. Small parts will be black, grey or mutually agreed colour.
Hull, deck and console To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
13 (15)
Collar To be defined with the customer (available Hypalon
fabrics)
Anti-slip hypalon for the collar To be defined with the customer (available Hypalon
fabrics)
Anti-slip area of the deck To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
Seats Black or grey.
Metal parts (visible from 50m To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
distance)
Boat cover(s) To be defined with the customer (RAL-colour chart)
9. PLATES AND TAGS
The boat has a permanently affixed builder's plate according to relevant ISO standard and
customer requirements. Also, robust and durable tags and tally plates are fitted in appropriate
places. Text, language, colours and positions and language to be mutually agreed with the
customer.
Switches, valves and hazards are marked with nameplates.
10. SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The boat will be delivered with following equipment, tools and accessories:
i. Basic tool and repair set
ii. Mooring ropes
iii. Fenders
14 (15)
11. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Road and slipway trailer
A road trailer capable of slipway launch is quoted separately on request.
15 (15)
END OF DOCUMENT
Annex 3
to the 22.07.2025
contract No 2-2/25/429
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
The location of the public procurement object is in the restricted military area of the Defence Forces and
due to that, the contracting party is notified of the following conditions:
1. Purpose of giving notice of security conditions
The purpose of giving the contracting party notice is to explain to the contracting party the relations,
rights and obligations of the parties in adhering to security requirements in the restricted military area of
the Defence Forces.
2. Definitions
2.1. Giving notice, the following definitions shall apply:
2.1.1. Person to be checked – employee of the contractor or subcontractor who is subject to a
background check, having given his or her prior written consent when applying for the right
to enter to the restricted military area of the Defence Forces.
2.1.2. Background check – inspection of the circumstances provided for in § 413 of the Estonian
Defence Forces Organisation Act with the purpose of ensuring the security of the Defence
Forces and to decide on allowing the person to be checked to enter the restricted military
area of the Defence Forces.
2.1.3. Structural unit of the Defence Forces – in the meaning of § 12 and § 13 of the Estonian
Defence Forces Organisation Act.
2.1.4. Restricted military area of the Defence Forces – in the meaning of § 50 of the Estonian
Defence Forces Organisation Act.
2.1.5. Subject-matter of the public procurement – the area of work located in the restricted
military area of the Defence Forces intended for performing the contract.
2.1.6. Security requirements – the general security requirements specified in this document, incl.
the requirements related to conducting background checks and the requirements
established to ensure the security of the Defence Forces arising from other legal acts.
2.1.7. Access application – document, that the contractor’s responsible person is obligated to
submit in order to initiate a background check of the person to be checked and for that
person to obtain a right to access the site. Access application can be submitted using the
attached sample or by sending a free-form e-mail to the e-mail address:
[email protected]. Completed background check consent forms shall be attached
to the application.
2.1.8. Consent form – document form accompanying the access application that the person to
be checked is required to complete.
2.1.9. Right of access – the right to be present at the site in connection to performing the contract.
One of the prerequisites for obtaining the right of access is to pass a background check.
2.1.10. Person with the right of access – employee of the contractor or subcontractor who has
passed the background check and who has the right to enter and stay at the site
unaccompanied in connection with performing the contract. Person with the right of access
shall be admitted to the object under the conditions established by the specific structural
unit of the Defence Forces.
1/4
2.1.11. Person with a special right of access – person with the right of access who, only in
exceptional cases and with the prior approval of the responsible person of the Defence
Forces, has the right to enter and stay at the site with an escort of the contractor in
connection with performing the contract.
2.1.12. Responsible person of the Defence Forces – person appointed by the Defence Forces who
is responsible for compliance with the security requirements at a site in a specific restricted
military area of the Defence Forces.
2.1.13. Responsible person of the Estonian Centre for Defence Investments – contractual contact
person, through whom the performance of contractual obligations and the forwarding of
the notices, requirements and other documents prescribed in the contract is organized.
2.1.14. Responsible person of the contractor – person appointed by the contractor responsible for
compliance with security requirements.
2.1.15. Responsible person at the site – person appointed by the contractor responsible for
compliance with security requirements at the site located in the restricted military area of
the Defence Forces.
Person referred to in clauses 2.1.14 and 2.1.15 may be the same person.
3. Rights and obligations of the contractor
3.1. Contractor has the right to:
3.1.1. receive from the responsible person of the Defence Forces information necessary for
fulfilling security requirements;
3.1.2. receive information on obtaining a right of access from the responsible person of the
Defence Forces, dependent on the results of the background check.
3.2. Contractor is obligated to:
3.2.1. ensure the provision of the service agreed upon in the contract only by a person with a right
of access;
3.2.2. ensure the compliance of the person with a right of access, incl. a person with a special right
of access, with the conditions established in the restricted military area of the Defence
Forces and to ensure the compliance of the subcontractor as well;
3.2.3. not to make a plan whereby the service would be provided by a person:
3.2.3.1. to whom a right of access has not been granted;
3.2.3.2. who has not undergone a background check; or
3.2.3.3. who has a special right of access but the right of access has not been coordinated;
3.2.4. submit the following documents to the e-mail address
[email protected], that are
required to be presented in order to obtain a right of access and initiate the background
check as soon as possible, ad not later than seven (7) working days before the
commencement of the work agreed upon in the contract, of the physical person providing
a service at the site
3.2.4.1. access application (see example), and
3.2.4.2. completed and handwritten (scanned) or digitally signed consent of the person to
be checked;
3.2.5. forward the original documents of the consents indicated in the aforementioned clause to
the postal address: Defence Forces, Magasini 31A, 10138, Tallinn;
3.2.6. indicate in the free-form access application:
3.2.6.1. the forename and surname, personal identification code of the natural person
providing the service and the name of the contractor and / or subcontractor;
3.2.6.2. justification for obtaining the right of access, i.e. description of the service or work
to be performed at the specific site;
3.2.6.3. reference to the contract concluded and the term of the contract;
2/4
3.2.6.4. information on the vehicle (make/model and registration number) with which the
restricted military area of the Defence Forces would be accessed;
3.2.6.5. contact details of the contractor’s representative (e-mail address, phone
number);
3.2.6.6. signed consent of the person to be checked; attach it to the applicatio
3.2.7. add the following to the application for gaining right of access and initiating a background
check for an alien: copy of the picture page of the identity document, incl. a visa or other
document confirming the legal basis for staying in Estonia;
3.2.8. confirmation and certification of granting, possessing and extending the legal basis for the
employment of an alien in Estonia (Aliens Act § 19 and § 20);
3.2.9. submit a new access application together with the person’s consent, if, as a result of the
background check of the person being checked, a right of access has not been obtained;
3.2.10. maintain an up-to-date list of persons with a right of access, and to update, at the end of
each calendar year, the list of employees who will continue to provide the service during
the new calendar year, to this end an up-to-date list shall be sent to the e-mail address
[email protected];
3.2.11. notify without delay of a person with a right of access no longer needing access to the site,
by sending an e-mail to
[email protected];
3.2.12. notify without delay the responsible person of the Defence Forces of any security
requirement violations or suspicions of violations at the site.
4. Rights and obligations of the Defence Forces
4.1. The Defence Forces have the right to:
4.1.1. conduct a background check on the person to be checked, this is generally done within
seven (7) working days of receiving a proper access application and consent;
4.1.2. conduct a new background check if the conditions specified in clause 3.2.9 are met,
following the deadlines set forth in clause 4.1.1;
4.1.3. in other justified cases, extend the deadline for a background check by up to seven (7)
working days, giving notice of this to the responsible person of the Contractor in a form
that can be reproduced in writing;
4.1.4. establish security requirements, notifying the responsible person of the Contractor of these
without delay;
4.1.5. grant a right of access to the person being checked or restrict that person’s right of access
or grant the right of access to that person with a special condition on the basis of
circumstances revealed in the background check;
4.1.6. refuse to grant a right of access for security reasons, incl. to a person who has not been a
subject of a background check or to a person who cannot be subjected to a background
check, but also to refuse to coordinate the right of access of a person with a special right of
access;
4.1.7. restrict access to military restricted areas for stateless persons or persons with foreign
citizenship, adhering to right of access to state secrets, the need to know and other
requirements provided for in the State Secrets and Classified Foreign Information Act;
4.1.8. prohibit the person checked from entering the site if no consent was submitted or if it was
submitted incorrectly;
4.1.9. check the observance of security requirements established at the site with regard to a
person with a right of access and / or to a person with a special right of access;
4.1.10. prohibit the person referred to in clauses 2.1.10 and 2.1.11 from staying in the restricted
military area of the Defence Forces in the event of non-compliance with or violation of
security requirements.
3/4
4.2. The Defence Forces undertakes to:
4.2.1. notify, in a form reproducible in writing, the responsible person of the Contractor in writing
of a person checked being given a right of access, incl. the relevant restrictions at the site;
4.2.2. notify the responsible person of the Contractor of determining a violation of the security
requirements by a person with a right of access or a special right of access, which excludes
him or her from acquiring a further right of access to the site;
4.2.3. introduce the security requirements established at the site or amendments thereto to the
person with a right of access, incl. person with a special right of access.
4.3. The contacts of the responsible person of the Defence Forces (clause 2.1.12), the
responsible person of the Centre for Defence Investment (clause 2.1.13), the responsible
person of the contractor (2.1.14), the responsible person at the site (clause 2.1.15) shall be
determined upon concluding the contract.
5. Final provisions
5.1. A party shall notify the other party in writing of a change of responsible persons in a format
which can be reproduced in writing.
5.2. During the processing of personal data, the requirements of the applicable legislation are
adhered to.
5.3. The Defence Forces have the right to make extraordinary proposals to the Estonian Centre
for Defence Investments to terminate the contract regardless of the period for giving notice,
if the contractor violates the obligations specified in clauses 3.2.1. – 3.2.4, the confidentiality
requirement provided in the contract is not observed or the contractor’s or subcontractor’s
employees do not comply with the requirements established in the restricted military area
of the Defence Forces.
4/4
ESTONIAN DEFENCE FORCES
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
Restrictions on access apply
as of the date the form is completed
and as long as required but no longer than 75 years.
Legal grounds: Public Information Act clause 35 (1) 12)
APPLICATION FOR GAINING ACCESS TO THE RESTRICTED MILITARY AREA OF THE DEFENCE FORCES
ACCESS APPLICATION
[Registration number]
[………..……] date
With this application, I confirm that [company name] has concluded a contract with [name of the
institution] and has a need to gain access to the restricted military area of the Defence Forces in
connection with Contract No. [Contract No.]. The Contract shall remain in force from [start date of the
contract] to [end date of the contract].
[Name of the company] performs in the restricted military area of the Defence Forces [purpose of the
contract, nature of the works] and applies for a right of access to the following sites:
1. Name of the site: [name of the site]
Address: [address]
Responsible person at the site: [forename and surname], [phone number], [e-mail address]
Responsible person of the Defence Forces: [forename and surname]
2. etc.
With regard to need to access the aforementioned sites of the Defence Forces, the contractor [company
name] requests that a background check be initiated on the following person(s) as employees of the
contractor [company name] [and name of the subcontractor], based on the consent of the persons
(signed consent forms attached to the application) and vehicles noted in the access application.
Employees of the main contractor [company name]:
1. [forename and surname, personal identification code]
2. etc.
Employees of the subcontractor [company name]:
1. [forename and surname, personal identification code]
2. etc.
Vehicles:
1. Registration numberMake / model
2. etc.
The contractor is aware that, depending on the result of the background check, the Defence Forces has
the right to restrict the access of persons to the restricted military area of the Defence Forces and that
successfully passing the background check does not guarantee automatic access to the restricted military
area of the Defence Forces.
[Signature]
[forename and surname]
[Position]
1/1
ESTONIAN DEFENCE FORCES
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
Restrictions on access apply
as of the date the form is completed
and as long as required but no longer than 75 years.
Legal grounds: Public Information Act clause 35 (1) 12)
KINNITATUD
Kaitseväe juhataja 07.02.2025
käskkirjaga nr 223
Lisa nr 4
AUTHORISATION FOR BACKGROUND CHECK FOR A PERSON APPLYING TO GET CLEARANCE TO ENTER
THE RESTRICTED MILITARY AREAS OF THE ESTONIAN DEFENCE FORCES FOR THE PROVISION OF
SERVICES
(first and last name)
Personal identification code:
I hereby authorise the Estonian Defence Forces to process my personal data in order to obtain clearance
to access restricted military areas for the duration of my service provision agreement but no longer
than five years after I gave authorisation.
By giving this authorisation, I confirm that I am aware of the following conditions:
1. The Estonian Defence Forces (EDF) has the right to conduct a background check in accordance with
section 415 of the Estonian Defence Forces Organisation Act (hereinafter the EDFOA).
2. I have the right to refuse to authorise the background check (clause 416 (2) 1) of the EDFOA).
3. I have the right to refuse to disclose information that might cause myself, my partner or a person
close to me to become subject to offence proceedings (clause 416 (2) 2) of the EDFOA).
4. I have the right to request the termination of collecting my data or making queries about me (clause
416 (2) 3) of the EDFOA).
5. I have the right to give explanations about the information collected about me (clause 416 (2) 4) of
the EDFOA).
6. I have the right to turn to the court, the Chancellor of Justice and the Data Protection Inspectorate to
protect my rights and challenge the decisions made about me based on the data collected in
accordance with section 416 of the EDFOA to verify that my data is collected in compliance with my
fundamental rights and freedoms and the principle of good governance (clause 416 (2) 5) of the
EDFOA).
7. If I refuse to authorise or request the termination of collecting my data or making queries about me,
this serves as the grounds for not giving me clearance to enter the restricted military area of the EDF
(section 417 of the EDFOA).
8. The EDF has the right to restrict my rights regarding the personal data being processed (clause 4110
(3) 4) of the EDFOA).
9. When I am on the restricted military area of the EDF (subsection 52 (3) of the EDFOA), I am obligated
to follow the order in force in the EDF (including the order for fire safety, traffic and parking) and the
orders of representatives of the EDF (subsection 52(2) of the EDFOA), and I am aware that
9.1. it is forbidden to enter the restricted military area of the EDF while in the possession of alcohol
or narcotic or psychoactive substances, firearms, explosives, partially or fully automatic or
remote-controlled flying objects (e.g. drones), radioactive and easily flammable substances or
1/2
ESTONIAN DEFENCE FORCES
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
Restrictions on access apply
as of the date the form is completed
and as long as required but no longer than 75 years.
Legal grounds: Public Information Act clause 35 (1) 12)
items that contain such substances, and other things that might endanger myself or other
persons, technology and equipment on the premises;
9.2. third persons cannot be brought to or allowed to enter the restricted military area of the EDF
without the permission of the EDF;
9.3. the person entering the restricted military area of the EDF in a vehicle is obligated to cover up,
turn off or remove all on-board cameras with video and/or audio recording;
9.4. the EDF has the right to detain a person (or a vehicle) entering, staying in or leaving the restricted
military area of the EDF to conduct a security inspection and check the person (including their
clothing, possessions and vehicle) by visual inspection, groping, or with a technical device or a
trained service dog;
9.5. for security and safety reasons, the EDF can temporarily prohibit a person from entering the
restricted military area, or to order the persons staying in the restricted military area of the EDF
to leave, or to prohibit them from leaving;
9.6. without a prior consent of the EDF, it is forbidden to take photographs or videos or make audio
recordings in the restricted military area or buildings of the EDF, and to share/upload such
recordings in any form or environment;
9.7. it is forbidden to stay in the restricted military area of the EDF under the influence of alcohol,
narcotic, or psychoactive substances, or with the suspicion or signs of such influence;
9.8. it is forbidden to display symbols of aggression (including in vehicles) in the restricted military
area of the EDF.
(day, month, year) [ signed digitally ]1
1
Can also be signed on paper
2/2
Annex 5
to the 22.07.2025
contract No 2-2/25/429
CODIFICATION CONDITIONS
The conditions apply to the goods to be codified according to the NATO Codification System
(C/NNC/1294/I00615).
The codification office in Estonia is the Centre for Defence Investments, Järve 34a, 11314 Tallinn, e-mail
[email protected].
1. Requirements
1.1. For the purposes of codification of the goods, the Seller shall at least submit the codification
office the details referred to in the clause 2 in a format that can be reproduced in writing and
at the request of the codification office additional details without delay.
1.2. Codification details do not need to be transmitted if they have been previously transmitted
for the same goods. In this case, the Seller shall inform the codification office of the previous
transmission of the codification details and shall indicate the codification office to which the
details have been submitted.
1.3. The Seller shall submit or coordinate the submission of supplementary information to the
codification office for all modifications, design or drawing changes during the term of the
Agreement.
1.4. The codification office has the right to request additional information from the Seller,
including drawings, standards and specifications and their reference numbers, spare parts
data, product catalogues, user manuals.
1.5. Where the Seller subcontracts the performance of the Agreement, the Seller shall ensure
that the information required for codification is also provided for the subcontracted items.
1.6. The codification office informs the Seller of the completion of the code or the reasons for
refusing to create the code. In the case of goods produced in Estonia, a code shall be
generated within two weeks if sufficient details are available. In the case of goods produced
abroad, the NATO Stock Number shall be created by the codification office of the country
concerned within two months.
2. Details to be provided for the codification of items of equipment for the Estonian Defence Forces
2.1. DETAILS OF THE MANUFACTURING COMPANY (company owning the copyrights to the
goods):
2.1.1. name;
2.1.2. address;
2.1.3. phone number;
2.1.4. email address;
2.1.5. website address.
2.2. DETAILS RELATING TO THE GOODS:
2.2.1. The designation of the goods and the name of the manufacturer, if different from
the name of the subject of the Agreement (in Estonian and English).
2.2.2. 13-digit NATO STOCK NUMBER NSN (if known).
2.2.3. Manufacturer’s markings (manufacturer-issued markings (model number), factory
designations and codes; spare part names, markings, designations and codes;
references to product catalogue and user manual).
1/2
2.2.4. Supplementary technical documentation (references to drawings, standards,
specifications, if available).
2.3. DETAILS OF THE DATA PROVIDER/CONTACT PERSON:
2.3.1. name;
2.3.2. address;
2.3.3. phone number;
2.3.4. email address.
2/2
Annex 4
To the 22.07.2025
contract No 2-2/25/429
1. Labelling Spare Parts (hereinafter „Goods“)
The label attached to the original packaging of the Goods must contain the following details at a minimum:
• name of the Goods;
• vehicle make;
• NSN-code (if applicable);
• product code;
• the Seller’s warehouse code.
2. Packaging
When transporting Goods on pallets, the products are packaged into grouped packaging (packing crates).
The Seller agrees to provide packaging that ensures the Goods’ conservation during its transportation to
the destination and its long-term storage in unchanged form.
Labels for grouped packaging are at least an A4-size in capital letters and in bold. The minimum letter
height is 8 mm. There is a label on at least two sides of the packing box.
The labelling details on the label are in the following order:
• name of the Goods;
• product and/or NSN-code (if applicable);
• quantity and unit (pieces/EA);
• delivery time (month and year);
• contract number and batch number (if the Goods are delivered in several parts);
• the Seller’s name;
• the Seller’s address;
• delivery address.
Packing crates are placed on pallets. The pallet dimensions are 800x1200 mm. Pallets must be intact (not
decayed, mouldy and with no broken boards), clean and there cannot be any protruding nails. Pallets
must endure the long-term storage of the Goods. The maximum height of packing crates placed on pallets
is 1200 mm (pallets are not returnable). Plastic film is used for transport, which covers the packing crates
on the pallets. Plastic film keeps the product crates firmly on pallets and protects them from the elements.
Labels for transporting packaging are at least an A4-size in capital letters and in bold. The minimum letter
height is 8 mm. There is a label attached on all sides (four labels on one package). The conservation
conditions are up to five years in ventilated permanent structures. Transport is in confined form and on
land, air and sea. The package must endure handling with mechanical tools. The labelling details on the
label are in the following order:
• NSN-code (if applicable);
• product name;
• quantity and unit (pieces/EA);
• delivery time (month and year);
• contract number and batch number;
• the Seller’s name;
1/2
• the Seller’s address;
• delivery address.
If the order is for a single product or a small quantity of Goods, then the Goods must be packaged in other
appropriate and suitable packaging. The cost of the Goods’s packaging is covered within the cost of the
sold Goods.
3. Delivery Conditions
The Goods must be delivered unbroken and unspoiled and in suitable packaging for transport.
Delivery address in Estonia:
- Naval base, Miinisadama 4, 10416 Tallinn.
During the validity of the contract, the locations may change. The Seller will be notified of the changes
when requesting a price quotation. Transport of the Goods to the destination set by the Buyer takes place
with the Seller’s own mode of transportation.
2/2